JP7016940B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

A so-called pachinko gaming machine is known as a gaming machine that plays a game using a gaming ball. In this pachinko gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine is known to have a movable accessory that can move between the inside of the liquid crystal display area and the outside of the liquid crystal display area in the display area for displaying an image (see, for example, Patent Document 1). ).

In this movable accessory, a part of the back cover of the movable accessory also serves as a light emitting substrate and can emit light.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-21401

As such a conventional gaming machine, there is also one that gives a big hit notice.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of giving a more varied jackpot notice.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention provides a specific gaming state determining means for determining whether or not to execute a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect. It is an effect of notifying the execution expectation degree of the specific gaming state by the effect display means to be displayed and the expectation degree stage of the specific effect displayed on the effect display means, and the specific effect executed during the change of the identification symbol. Whether or not to display the effect content determining means for determining the content of the effect, the effect control means for controlling the effect displayed on the effect display means, and the specific display for changing the content of the specific effect on the effect display means. The effect control means is provided with a specific display determining means for determining in advance, and the effect control means is determined by the effect content determining means when it is not determined by the specific display determining means to display the specific display. When the expected degree type is the expected degree type of the specific stage, the expected degree type of the stage lower than the expected degree type of the specific stage is executed, and then the content of the effect is specified without being based on the specific display. It is possible to execute an effect that changes to the expected degree type of the stage, and when the specific display (for example, plate A) is displayed, the expected degree determined by the effect content determining means. When the type is the expected degree type (for example, pseudo-ream) of the specific stage (for example, three times), the content of the effect is lower than the expected degree type of the specific stage (for example, for example) without being based on the specific display. It is possible to change to the expected degree type (for example, pseudo-ream) of the first time), and then change the content of the effect to the expected degree type of the specific stage based on the specific display, and the specific display is displayed in plurality. The effect to be performed is characterized in that the degree of expectation is higher than that of the effect in which a plurality of the specific displays are not displayed.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to give a more varied jackpot notice.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of giving a more varied jackpot notice.

It is external perspective view of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the gaming board in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the game board in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the LED unit in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which looked at the lower movable effect member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the right front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the lower movable effect member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the right front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the lower movable effect member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the right rear. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the movable body and the movable member of the lower movable effect member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the right front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the movable body and the movable member of the lower movable effect member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the right rear side. It is a schematic rear view of the movable body in the case where the lower movable effect member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is in a standby position. It is a schematic rear view of the movable body when the lower movable effect member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention expands a movable part in a standby position. It is a schematic rear view of the movable body in the case where the lower movable effect member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is in a movable position. It is a schematic rear view of the movable member when the lower movable effect member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is in a movable position. It is a schematic rear view of the movable member when the lower movable effect member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention expands a movable part in a standby position. It is a schematic rear view of the movable member when the movable part expands in the movable position of the lower movable effect member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the gaming board which shows the state which the lower movable effect member expands in the standby position in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the gaming board which shows the state which the lower movable effect member expands in the movable position in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the winning opening unit and the lower movable effect member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view of the winning opening unit in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view seen from the right rear of the winning opening unit in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which looked at the periphery of the rear cover and the lower movable effect member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the right front. It is a front view of the winning opening unit and the lower movable effect member enlarged in the standby position in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the lower movable effect member which the structure of the winning opening unit and the movable part is different in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment (variant example) of this invention. It is a front view of the state in which the lower movable effect member which is different from the structure of the winning opening unit and the movable part in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment (variant example) of this invention is enlarged in the standby position. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper movable production member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the right front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the upper movable effect member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the right front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the upper movable production member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the right rear. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the case, the fixed base and the rear side movable base of the upper movable effect member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the right front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the case, the fixed base and the rear side movable base of the upper movable effect member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the right rear. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a front movable base, a blade movable rack, and a decorative member of an upper movable effect member in a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front right. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a front movable base, a blade movable rack, and a decorative member of an upper movable effect member in a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the right rear. It is a schematic front view of the rear movable base and the front movable base when the upper movable effect member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is in a standby position. It is a schematic front view of the rear movable base and the front movable base when the upper movable effect member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is in a movable position. It is a schematic front view of the front movable base and the blade movable rack when the upper movable effect member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is in a standby position. It is a schematic front view of the front movable base and the blade movable rack when the upper movable effect member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is in a movable position. It is a schematic front view of the illuminated board in the case where the upper movable effect member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is in a standby position. It is a schematic front view of the illuminated board in the case where the upper movable effect member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is in a movable position. FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in the XL-XL direction of FIG. FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in the XLI-XLI direction of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the rear movable base, the front movable base, and the blade movable rack in the state which the upper movable effect member moved from the state of FIG. 41 to the movable position. FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in the XLIII-XLIII direction of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the rear movable base, the front movable base and the blade movable rack in the state which the upper movable effect member moved from the state of FIG. 43 to the movable position. It is a figure which shows the state of the flexible cable accommodated in the rear movable base, the front movable base, and the blade movable rack when the upper movable effect member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is in a standby position. It is a figure which shows the state of the flexible cable accommodated in the rear movable base, the front movable base, and the blade movable rack when the upper movable effect member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is in a movable position. It is explanatory drawing which showed the state which the upper movable production member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention moves from a standby position to a movable position in the order of (a)-(c). It is a front view of the gaming board which shows the state which the upper movable effect member moved to the movable position in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition diagram which shows the gaming state and the effect mode of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the spec of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the one-round opening and closing pattern of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the displacement member operation pattern of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening opening / closing pattern and the interval time between rounds of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows a part of the sub-effect content determination table of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows a part of the sub-effect content determination table of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the hit effect pattern determination table of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the main control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the main control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prize opening switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize opening switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control processing of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory check process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation time management process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting time management process before reopening of the big winning opening of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of the big winning opening of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end interval management process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol game end processing of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the sub-control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interrupt processing of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern determination process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process in ST mode of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the story effect pattern change process in ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the item look-ahead effect processing of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the item use effect processing of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the plate A use effect processing of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the plate B use effect processing of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the plate C use effect processing of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the item acquisition effect processing of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit effect pattern determination process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start effect processing of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end effect process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example of the live bonus of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example of the live bonus of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example in a normal time of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the music pattern A of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the music pattern A of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story section of the ST mode of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story section of the ST mode of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the production pattern per story for SP bonus of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story effect pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story effect pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story effect pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story effect pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story effect pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story effect pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story effect pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story effect pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story effect pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the item look-ahead effect of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the item look-ahead effect of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the item look-ahead effect of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the hit effect pattern determination table of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment (variant example) of this invention. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the story production table group of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment (modification example) of this invention. It is a figure which shows the main fluctuation time determination table of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment (modification example) of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the big prize opening of the gaming machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big prize opening opening / closing pattern of the gaming machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the displacement member operation pattern of the gaming machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control processing of the gaming machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram of the left side movable effect member and the right side movable effect member of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the left side movable effect member and the right side movable effect member have moved to the movable position in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the gaming board in the gaming machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which looked at the ball passage unit in the gaming machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention from the right front. It is a front view of the ball passage unit in the gaming machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. FIG. 125 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in the direction of CXXVI-CXXVI of FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in the direction of CXXVII-CXXVII of FIG. 125. It is a front view of the gaming board in the gaming machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
[Structure of gaming machine]
First, an overview of the pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 5.

1 and 2 are an external perspective view and a front view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a front view of a gaming board used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the game board. FIG. 5 is a front view of the LED unit provided on the game board. The gaming machine of the present embodiment is applied to a pachinko gaming machine as an example.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is provided with a detachable gaming board 1 (see FIG. 3) having a gaming area in which a gaming ball as a gaming medium can roll and flow. The main body frame 2 provided with the main body frame base plate 2a (also referred to as the main body frame base) and the front frame base plate 3a (hereinafter referred to as the front frame opening) provided with an opening 3h (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) in which the game board 1 can be visually recognized. A front frame 3 that is provided with a front frame base (also referred to as a front frame base) and is rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 in front of the main body frame 2 (player side), and a liquid crystal display device 4 (for performing a predetermined effect display). A rear frame base plate (not shown) provided with a detachable rear frame (see FIG. 3) is provided, and a rear frame rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 behind the main body frame 2 (on the anti-player side) (not shown). (Omitted) and.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via an outer frame 6. The main body frame 2 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 6 via the main body frame hinge 2b. Note that FIG. 1 shows a state in which the table frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2 and the main body frame 2 is closed with respect to the outer frame 6. In such a state, the rear frame is , Is not shown because it is housed in the outer frame 6.

The table frame 3 has a table frame base plate 3a and various table frame constituent members provided in the table frame base plate 3a. The table frame constituent members include a protective glass 7, a dish unit 8, an operation unit 9, speakers 10a to 10b, various decorative members (top decoration 14, right side decorative member 15, left side decorative member 16) and the like. The table frame constituent members are not limited to these, and include all the members constituting the table frame 3. Further, in the plate unit 8, each cover member (upper plate upper cover 8a, lower plate cover 8b, etc.) is attached to the front frame base plate 3a via a locking structure described later.

In the table frame 3, the protective glass 7 having transparency is provided in the above-mentioned table frame opening 3h. The protective glass 7 is detachably attached to the front frame opening 3h (window portion) provided in the front frame base plate 3a provided in the front frame 3 from the back surface side (rear surface side) of the front frame base plate 3a. The table frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 2 so as to face the surface (front surface) side of the game board 1 and cover the surface (front surface) side thereof. In the upper part of the table frame 3, speakers 10a and 10b for producing a sound effect are provided on both upper sides of the table frame opening 3h.

Further, on the surface (front surface) of the front frame 3, a decorative member for improving the aesthetic appearance is provided so as to surround the front frame opening 3h. As an example of the decorative member, a top decoration 14 incorporating a patrol lamp accessory, which will be described later, is provided on the upper side of the front frame opening 3h, and a light emitting display mode is provided on the left and right sides of the front frame opening 3h. A right side decorative member 15 (for example, an upper right lens 15a, a right middle lens 15b, a right panel cover 15c, etc.) and a left side decorative member 16 (for example, a left outer lens 16a, etc.) that can be changed are provided.

Inside the right side decorative member 15 and the left side decorative member 16, light emitting means (for example, a lamp, LED 27, etc.) controlled by a sub-control circuit 70 (see FIG. 6) described later is provided (see FIG. 6). .. The light emitted from the lamp / LED 27 passes through the right side decorative member 15 and the left side decorative member 16, and is perceived by the right side decorative member 15 and the left side decorative member 16 as synchrotron radiation, diffused light, or the like having excellent aesthetics. As a result, it is possible to change the display mode by light, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, on the surface (front surface) of the table frame 3, a dish unit 8 is provided below the table frame opening 3h of the table frame base plate 3a. The plate unit 8 is provided with an upper plate 17 for storing rental balls and prize balls, and a lower plate 18 which is provided on the lower side of the upper plate 17 and can store game balls and the like overflowing when the upper plate 17 is full, for example. Is provided.

The lower plate 18 includes a lower plate main body 18p capable of storing a game ball, and a lower plate cover 8b attached so as to cover the upper portion of the lower plate main body 18p. On the other hand, the upper plate 17 includes an upper plate main body 17p capable of storing game balls, and an upper plate upper cover 8a detachably attached to the front frame base plate 3a so as to cover the upper portion of the upper plate main body 17p. It is provided with an upper plate decorative member for improving the aesthetic appearance of the upper plate 17. As an example of the upper plate decorative member, the upper plate main body 17p is provided with an upper plate left decoration 17a, an upper plate front decoration 17c, etc. so as to surround the upper plate upper cover 8a, and the upper plate front decoration 17c. Has a shape bent from the left side of the upper plate upper cover 8a to the lower plate 18 from the middle toward the right side via the front side.

The front frame base plate 3a has a payout port 20 for paying out the game balls to the upper plate 17, and a discharge port for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 to the back side of the front plate base plate 3a (not shown). ) And a supply port 21 for supplying the game ball discharged from the discharge port to the lower plate 18. On the back side of the front frame base plate 3a, there is a ball passage for a game ball to be dispensed from the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6), and a ball passage cover (illustrated) for forming a ball passage by communicating the discharge port and the supply port 21. (Omitted) is provided. When the game ball is paid out from the payout device 83, the game ball is sent to the upper plate 17 through the payout port 20, while the upper plate 17 is so large that the game ball stays in the vicinity of the payout port 20 although the game ball is paid out. When the ball is full or when the ball removal button 22 provided on the upper plate upper cover 8a is pressed, the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 are sent from the discharge port to the lower plate via the ball passage and the supply port 21. Sent to 18.

In the present embodiment, the plating member is used for the decoration of the front surface of the gaming machine, and the plating member 17b is also used for the upper plate front decoration 17c that decorates the front surface portion of the upper plate 17. By using the plated member 17b, the decorative effect of the appearance design of the gaming machine is enhanced to improve the interest of the player.

The upper plate cover 8a has a ball lending button 23 for receiving a ball lending, a return button 24 for returning a card from a card unit 84 (see FIG. 6) for lending a game ball (not shown), and a predetermined value. An operation unit 9 is provided for changing the display mode of various effects by the player operating (pressing operation, rotating operation) during the game. The arrangement configuration (position, orientation) of the operation unit 9 is not particularly limited, but as an example in the drawing, the push operation button 9A is projected vertically from the upper plate upper cover 8a, and the outer circumference of the push operation button 9A is formed. The operation unit 9 configured to arrange the jog dial 9B is shown in.

Regarding the front frame 3, the portion of the surface (front surface) on the left side (that is, the side rotatably supported by the main body frame 2) from the player side, for example, is an illegal piano wire or the like. It is possible to envision a situation in which a member is invaded and a fraudulent act is performed by the fraudulent member against various configurations constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3 in the vicinity of the back side of the portion.

Therefore, in order to prevent such fraudulent activity, a cover member with a wiring holding function (not shown) is provided on the back surface of the front frame 3 at a portion where the above-mentioned fraudulent member invades. The cover member with a wiring holding function includes a wiring holding portion for holding wiring such as a harness, a substrate covering portion for covering a substrate (not shown) constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3, and an illegal member such as a piano wire. It is configured by integrating with the fraud prevention unit that prevents intrusion. According to this, since it is possible to realize a single cover member with a wiring holding function having three functions of wiring holding, board covering, and fraud prevention, it is necessary to separately prepare a member for each of these functions. It is possible to reduce the cost by that amount.

The main body frame 2 has a main body frame base plate 2a and various main body frame constituent members provided in the main body frame base plate 2a. The main body frame constituent members include a launching device 26, a speaker 10c, various control boards, relay boards, and the like. The main body frame constituent members are not limited to these, and all the members constituting the main body frame 2 are included.

In the main body frame 2, a main body frame opening (not shown) having substantially the same shape as the front frame opening 3h is provided at a predetermined position of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the front frame opening 3h. At the same time, on the surface (front surface) of the main body frame base plate 2a, a launching device 26 for launching a game ball is provided on the lower right side of the main body frame opening.

The launching device 26 includes a panel body 26a for disposing the launching device 26 on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a, a launching handle 26b disposed on the front surface side of the panel body 26a, and a panel body 26a. It is arranged on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the back side of the body, and is provided with a launch drive device (not shown) for launching a game ball.

The lower right side of the table frame 3 is provided with a notch 3p for exposing the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) to the player side. When the table frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) is exposed via the notch 3p of the table frame 3 and is adjacent to the above-mentioned dish unit 8. Positioned. Such a launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) and the dish unit 8 exhibit an aesthetic appearance as if they are continuously integrated with each other.

The launch handle 26b is provided in a support portion (not shown), a handle gup 26d that is rotatably attached to the support portion and can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise, and a game. It is arranged so as to cover the launch stop switch (not shown) for stopping the launch of the ball, the launch stop button 26e (also referred to as an operation member) for turning the launch stop switch ON / OFF, and the opening of the handle grip 26d. It is equipped with a handle cap 26h.

When the handle grip 26d of the launch handle 26b is rotated in the clockwise direction, the driving force of the launching drive device is increased or decreased according to the amount of rotation (rotation angle), and the driving force at that time is stored in the upper plate 17. The game ball is launched toward the game area 1p (see FIG. 3) of the game board 1. At this time, when the launch stop button 26e is operated, the launch drive device is stopped and controlled, whereby the launch of the game ball can be stopped.

In the present embodiment, the payout / launch control circuit 82 (see FIG. 6) connected to the main control circuit 60 (see FIG. 6) controls the operation of the launch stop switch and the launch handle 26b. Inside the launching device 26, a spring member (not shown) for elastically urging the handle grip 26d in the counterclockwise direction is provided, and the player can make the spring member elastic. The game ball is launched by rotating the handle grip 26d in the clockwise direction.

Further, when the player interrupts the game and releases the handle grip 26d, the handle grip 26d is returned to the starting position by the elasticity of the spring member. At this time, the firing of the game ball is stopped by pressing the firing stop button 26e by the protrusion (not shown) of the handle grip 26d.

Here, as a method of increasing or decreasing the firing intensity of the game ball, the resistance value of the firing volume (not shown) is changed according to the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b, and the firing solenoid (not shown). It is known that the firing intensity of the game ball is increased or decreased by changing the electric power supplied to (omitted). However, in the launching device 26 of the present embodiment, the rotation operation of the handle grip 26d of the launching handle 26b is performed. A firing spring (not shown) interlocking with the firing spring and a gear mechanism for winding (tightening) the firing spring (not shown) are provided. In the launching device 26, the amount of rotation of the winding gear mechanism is adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle grip 26d of the launching handle 26b to increase or decrease the degree of winding (tightening) of the launching spring. The firing intensity of is changed to increase or decrease.

The speaker 10c is provided in the center of the lower part of the main body frame 2 so as to produce a sound effect. The sound emitted from the speaker 10c is emitted through the speaker cover 10k provided in the portion of the plate unit 8 of the table frame 3 (specifically, the portion between the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 18). It has become.

The game board 1 is arranged in front of a rear frame (not shown) so as to be located behind the protective glass 7, and a rear cover 1A (see FIG. 23) is provided behind the game board 1. There is. The game board 1 has a game area 1p (see FIG. 3) in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down. The game board 1 is made of a translucent material (for example, polycarbonate or the like), but may be formed of a non-translucent material such as plywood or the like.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board 1 includes a guide rail 30, a stage 31, a first starting port 32, a second starting port 33, a blade member 34 for opening and closing the second starting port 33, and a passing gate 35. The first big winning opening 36, the second big winning opening 37, the first big winning opening shutter 36A that opens and closes the first big winning opening 36, the second big winning opening shutter 37A that opens and closes the second big winning opening 37, the second A specific area 38A and a non-specific area 38B located on the lower side of the large winning opening 37, a displacement member 39 that opens and closes the specific area 38A, a plurality of general winning openings 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D, an out opening 41, and an upper movable effect member. It includes 101A, a lower movable effect member 101B, a cover member 43, a liquid crystal display device 4, and an LED unit 5. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first starting port 32, the second starting port 33, the passing gate 35, the first large winning opening 36, the second large winning opening 37, the specific area 38A, and the general winning opening 40A , 40B, 40C, 40D form a winning area. Note that FIG. 4 shows a state in which the cover member 43 is removed.

On the surface of the game board 1, the guide rail 30, the stage 31, the first starting port 32, the second starting port 33, the second starting port 33, the passing gate 35, the general winning openings 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D, and the out opening 41 Is provided. In addition to the out port 41 provided below the game board 1, an out port is provided in the game area 1p near the first large winning opening shutter 36A, the second large winning opening shutter 37A, or the first starting opening 32. You may.

The lower movable effect member 101B is provided behind the game board 1 and can be visually recognized by the player from the front. An opening 1B (see FIG. 22) is formed in the game board 1. The upper movable effect member 101A is arranged between the game board 1 and the rear cover 1A (see FIG. 23) at the upper part of the game board 1, and the front surface of the upper movable effect member 101A is covered with the decorative member 99. There is.

That is, the upper movable effect member 101A is arranged behind the decorative member 99. The decorative member 99 is composed of a member capable of transmitting light, and characters such as alphabets, numbers, kanji, hiragana, katakana, and symbols may be formed on the decorative member 99, and a picture constituting the character may be formed on the decorative member 99. It may be formed. The decorative member 99 of the present embodiment constitutes the decorative member of the present invention.

An opening (not shown) is formed in the lower right of the game board 1, and the opening has a first large winning opening shutter 36A, a second large winning opening 37, a second large winning opening shutter 37A, and a specific area 38A. , A winning opening unit in which the non-specific area 38B and the displacement member 39 are unitized is attached.

The guide rail 30 is composed of an outer rail 30A and an inner rail 30B. The outer rail 30A is provided on the main body frame 2 and is arranged so as to surround the entire game area 1p. The inner rail 30B is for guiding the game ball to the upper part of the game board 1 together with the outer rail 30A, and is arranged inside the outer rail 30A on the left side of the game board 1. The game board 1 is attached to the main body frame 2 from the back side thereof.

The stage 31 distributes the flow-down area of the game ball in the game area 1p, and is arranged along the lower edge portion of the liquid crystal display device 4.

The game ball launched by the launching device 26 heads downward of the game board 1 while changing its traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail (not shown), a stage 31 or the like driven into the game area 1p of the game board 1. And flow down. In this process, the game ball wins one of the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, the first big winning opening 36, the second big winning opening 37, and the general winning opening 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D. It is collected by being discharged from the out port 41 when the prize is not won or when the prize is not won after passing through the passing gate 35.

The winning means that the game ball passes through the winning area or enters the winning area. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the winning area or enters the winning area, a situation advantageous to the player (for example, opening of the second starting port 33 described later, a symbol lottery, a prize ball, etc.) is given. Means to do. At this time, the passage of the winning area by the game ball means a mere passage, and the entry of the winning area by the game ball means that the game ball is collected separately from the out opening 41. Since the winning is detected when the game ball passes by the sensor switch, passing and entering the ball are substantially synonymous. Therefore, both passing the game ball to the winning area and winning the ball lead to winning, so in the following explanation, unless otherwise specified, "winning" is unified. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 38A, it may be referred to as "V winning".

When the rotation angle of the launch handle 26b is relatively small, the launching force applied to the game ball is generally small, so that the game ball mainly flows down the left side of the stage 31. Further, when the rotation angle of the launch handle 26b is relatively large, the launching force applied to the game ball is generally large, so that the game ball mainly flows down the right side of the stage 31. In general, the method of hitting the game ball to the left side of the stage 31 is called "left-handed", and the method of hitting the game ball to the right side of the stage 31 is called "right-handed".

The first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 give an opportunity for a lottery on condition that the game ball wins a prize, and also give an opportunity to display the result of the lottery on the display area 4A of the LED unit 5 or the liquid crystal display device 4. It is something to give. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 realize the first starting area and the second starting area.

The first starting port 32 is provided at a substantially lower position in the center of the game board 1. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 32, a preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 via the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 32 is detected by the first starting port switch 320 (see FIG. 6).

The second starting port 33 is provided directly below the passing gate 35. When a game ball wins in the second starting port 33, a preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 via the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The difficulty of winning the second starting port 33 is determined by the blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 is detected by the second starting port switch 330 (see FIG. 6).

The blade member 34 opens and closes so as to form a protruding posture and a retracting posture in the front-rear direction of the game board 1. It is a so-called ordinary electric accessory that switches between a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball in the mouth 33. The blade member 34 is driven by the blade member solenoid 340 (see FIG. 6).

The ordinary electric accessory is not limited to the one that operates the blade member 34 so as to open and close in the front-rear direction. For example, a so-called electric tulip type that expands the starting port by rotating the game board 1 in the left-right direction. It may be a tongue-shaped member or a tongue-shaped member that opens and closes the starting port by horizontally moving in the front-rear direction of the game board 1.

The passage gate 35 provides an opportunity to open the second starting port 33. The winning of the game ball to the passing gate 35 is detected by the passing gate switch 350 (see FIG. 6). Even if a game ball wins a prize at the passing gate 35, no prize ball is generated.

The first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 are opened in the hit game state (big hit game state) which is a game state advantageous to the player. The first large winning opening 36 is provided on the substantially right side of the first starting opening 32 and directly below the passing gate 35. The second large winning opening 37 is provided on the substantially right side of the first starting opening 32 and directly below the first large winning opening 36. The positions where the first prize opening 36 and the second prize opening 37 are arranged are not limited to the above-mentioned positions, and can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the gaming machine and the like.

The first large winning opening 36 is formed in the game board 1 as an opening having a relatively large horizontal dimension so that a plurality of game balls can win at the same time. A first large winning opening shutter 36A for opening and closing the first large winning opening 36 is provided in the vicinity of the first large winning opening 36. The winning of the game ball to the first winning opening 36 is detected by the first winning opening count switch 360 (see FIG. 6).

The second large winning opening 37 is formed in a part of the upper end surface of the cover member 43 as an opening having a relatively small vertical and horizontal dimensions so that the game balls can win one by one. A second large winning opening shutter 37A for opening and closing the second large winning opening 37 is provided in the vicinity of the second large winning opening 37. The winning of the game ball to the second big winning opening 37 is detected by the second big winning opening count switch 370 (see FIG. 6).

The first big winning opening shutter 36A switches the first big winning opening 36 to an open state or a closed state by opening and closing the game board 1 so as to form a forward leaning posture and a backward posture in the front-rear direction. It is arranged so as to cover the first large winning opening 36 in the closed state. That is, the first special winning opening shutter 36A changes between an open state in which a game ball can be won in the first large winning opening 36 and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. It is driven by the large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A (see FIG. 6).

The second big winning opening shutter 37A switches the second big winning opening 37 to an open state or a closed state by horizontally moving in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and the second big winning opening 37 is opened in the closed state. It is arranged so as to cover it. That is, the second special winning opening shutter 37A changes between an open state in which a game ball can be won in the second large winning opening 37 and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. It is driven by the large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A (see FIG. 6).

The specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B are areas through which the game ball winning in the second large winning opening 37 can pass thereafter, and are covered with the cover member 43. The ball passage of the game ball from the second large winning opening 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B is formed by a partition wall (not shown) provided on the inner surface of the cover member 43. The game ball that has won the second large winning opening 37 passes through either the specific area 38A or the non-specific area 38B, and then is guided to the back surface of the game board 1 and collected. A second big winning opening count switch 370 is arranged at a position in the middle of the ball passage from the second big winning opening 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B. A specific area switch 380A is arranged in the specific area 38A, and the V prize of the game ball to the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area switch 380A. A non-specific area switch 380B is arranged in the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of the game ball through the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area switch 380B. Further, a displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific region 38A is provided in the vicinity of the specific region 38A.

The displacement member 39 switches the specific area 38A between the open state and the closed state by horizontally moving in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is positioned so as to cover the specific area 38A in the closed state. That is, the displacement member 39 changes from an open state (first state) in which the V-winning of the game ball to the specific region 38A is easy and a closed state (second state) in which the V-winning is impossible or difficult. It is driven by the displacement member solenoid 390 (see FIG. 6). When the specific area 38A is in the closed state, the game ball for which V winning is impossible will pass through the non-specific area 38B.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first large winning opening 36, the first large winning opening shutter 36A, the first large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A, and the first large winning opening count switch 360 are the first variable winning devices. It has been realized. The second big winning opening 37, the second big winning opening shutter 37A, the second big winning opening shutter solenoid 370A, and the second big winning opening count switch 370 realize the second variable winning opening device.

The general winning openings 40A, 40B, and 40C are provided on the left side of the first large winning opening 36, and the general winning opening 40D is provided on the upper right side of the second large winning opening 37. When a game ball wins in the general winning openings 40A, 40B, 40C, and 40D, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out by the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6), although the lottery is not performed. The winning of the game ball to the general winning openings 40A, 40B, 40C, and 40D is detected by the general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B.

<Structure and operation of lower movable effect member 101B>
7 to 19 are views showing a game board 1 showing a state in which the lower movable effect member 101B and the lower movable effect member 101B are movable. In FIGS. 7 to 19, the vertical and horizontal directions are from the player. It is the vertical and horizontal directions of the lower movable effect member 101B as seen. The lower movable effect member 101B of the present embodiment constitutes the movable accessory of the present invention.

In FIGS. 7, 8 and 9, the lower movable effect member 101B includes fixed bodies 104, 105, movable bodies 106, 107, 108 and movable member 109.

The fixed body 104 is fixed to the rear cover 1A (see FIG. 23) behind the game board 1. In FIG. 8, shaft portions 104A to 104D are provided on the fixed body 104, and gears 113A to 113D are rotatably supported on the shaft portions 104A to 104D, respectively.

In FIGS. 8 and 9, a motor mounting plate 110 is mounted on the front surface of the fixed body 104, and the gears 113A to 113D are housed between the motor mounting plate 110 and the fixed body 104.

The motor 110A is fixed to the motor mounting plate 110. A gear 113A is attached to a rotating shaft (not shown) of the motor 110A. The gear 113D is formed to have a diameter larger than that of the gears 113A to 113C, and the rotation of the motor 110A is reduced by being transmitted from the gear 113A to the gears 113D having a large diameter via the gears 113B and 113C.

The fixed body 105 is fixed to the fixed body 104, and the movable bodies 106 and 107 are accommodated between the fixed body 104 and the fixed body 105, and are provided so as to be movable in the vertical direction with respect to the fixed bodies 104 and 105. Has been done.

Rack teeth 106A extending in the vertical direction are formed on the side surface of the movable body 106, and the rack teeth 106A mesh with the gear 113D. As a result, when the motor 110A is driven, the movable body 106 moves in the vertical direction with respect to the fixed bodies 104 and 105 by the gear 113D.

A pair of guide holes 106B and 106C extending in the vertical direction are formed in the movable body 106, and guide protrusions 104E and 104F provided in the fixed body 104 are slidably fitted in the guide holes 106B and 106C, respectively. It fits.

A long guide hole 104G extending in the vertical direction is formed in the fixed body 104, and a guide protrusion 106E provided on the back surface of the movable body 106 is slidably fitted in the guide hole 104G. ..

As a result, when the movable body 106 moves in the vertical direction with respect to the fixed body 104, the movable body 106 moves along the guide protrusions 104E, 104F and the guide hole 104G, and does not swing in the horizontal direction with respect to the fixed body 104. ..

A guide hole 107A extending in the vertical direction is formed in the movable body 107, and a guide protrusion 106F provided in the movable body 106 is slidably fitted in the guide hole 107A. As a result, the movable body 107 is supported by the guide protrusion 106F and moves in the vertical direction with respect to the movable body 106, and does not swing in the horizontal direction with respect to the movable body 106.

A rack tooth 107B having an uneven portion extending in the vertical direction is formed on the side surface of the movable body 107, and the rack tooth 107B meshes with the gear 111.

The fixed body 105 is formed with rack teeth 105A having uneven portions extending in the vertical direction facing the game board 1 in the left-right direction, and the rack teeth 105A mesh with the gear 111. The gear 111 is rotatably attached to a shaft portion 106G provided on the movable body 106. As a result, when the movable body 106 moves in the vertical direction, the gear 111 that moves up and down integrally with the movable body 106 rotates, so that the movable body 107 moves up and down integrally with the movable body 106.

A shaft portion 106H is provided on the movable body 106, and an arm member 112 is swingably attached to the shaft portion 106H. A pressing portion 107C extending in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction (vertical direction) of the movable body 107 (horizontal direction) is provided on the upper portion of the movable body 107, and the pressing portion 107C is provided above the arm member 112. positioned.

When the movable body 107 moves downward, the arm member 112 swings downward with the shaft portion 106H as a fulcrum by the pressing portion 107C.

A pair of guide holes 108A and 108B extending in the vertical direction are formed at both ends of the movable body 108, and guide protrusions 105B and 105C provided at both ends of the fixed body 105 slide in the guide holes 108A and 108B. It fits freely. As a result, the movable body 108 is supported by the guide protrusions 105B and 105C and moves in the vertical direction relative to the fixed body 105, and does not swing in the horizontal direction with respect to the fixed body 105.

A guide groove 108C extending in the vertical direction is formed on the back surface of the movable body 108. A guide protrusion 107D is formed at the upper end of the movable body 107, and the guide protrusion 107D is slidably fitted in the guide groove 108C.

As a result, when the movable body 107 moves upward, the guide protrusion 107D of the movable body 107 moves upward along the guide groove 108C, and the movable body 108 moves upward by abutting on the upper end of the inner circumference of the guide groove 108C. do.

A curved hole 108D is formed in the movable body 108. The curved hole 108D extends in the circumferential direction of the movable body 108 with a predetermined length. The movable member 109 is attached to the movable body 108 and can move in the vertical direction together with the movable body 108.

In FIGS. 10 and 11, the movable member 109 includes a rotating body 114, a plurality of slider members 115, a circular member 116, and a plurality of outer ring members 117.

The rotating body 114 is rotatably supported by a shaft portion 116i provided on the circular member 116, and the shaft portion 116i is fixed to the movable body 108. A fitting protrusion 114A is provided on the back surface of the rotating body 114. The fitting projection 114A is slidably fitted into the curved hole 108D of the movable body 108 and the guide hole 112A (see FIG. 8) of the arm member 112.

When the arm member 112 swings with the shaft portion 106H as the fulcrum, the rotating body 114 slides along the curved hole 108D so that the fitting projection 114A slides along the curved hole 108D with respect to the movable body 108 with the shaft portion 116i as the fulcrum. It is rotatable.

A plurality of slits 114B are formed in the rotating body 114. In FIG. 15, the slit 114B bends linearly from the first straight line portion 114n extending linearly inward in the radial direction of the rotating body 114 and from the first straight line portion 114n outside the radial direction of the rotating body 114. It is composed of a second straight line portion 114w extending in a dogleg shape.

In FIGS. 10 and 11, a fitting protrusion 115A is formed on the back surface of the slider member 115. The fitting protrusion 115A is slidably fitted in the slit 114B of the rotating body 114.

The circular member 116 is provided with a plurality of protrusions 116A protruding toward the movable body 108. The protrusion 116A is engaged with an engaging hole 108F formed so as to be separated in the circumferential direction of the movable body 108 by a screw or the like (not shown). As a result, the circular member 116 is fixed to the movable body 108 and does not rotate relative to the movable body 108. Engagement in the present embodiment may include engagement or fixation of an object by screws, screws, or the like (components, fixing portions, engaging portions, etc.), and such a state is fastened. It is also possible to express that there is. Further, the slit of the present embodiment includes a notch, a groove, an elongated hole and the like.

A plurality of fitting grooves 116B are formed in the circular member 116. In FIG. 15, the fitting groove 116B is bent from the first straight line portion 116n extending linearly inward in the radial direction of the circular member 116 and the first straight line portion 116n outward in the radial direction of the circular member 116. It is composed of a second straight line portion 116w extending linearly.

In FIGS. 10 and 11, a plurality of fitting protrusions 115B are formed on the surface of the slider member 115, and the fitting protrusions 115B are slidably fitted in the fitting groove 116B.

The outer ring member 117 is provided so as to be divided in the circumferential direction of the circular member 116. The outer ring member 117 is attached to the outer peripheral portion in the radial direction of the slider member 115, and is provided around the outer peripheral portion of the circular member 116 so as to abut on the outer peripheral surface in the radial direction of the circular member 116.

In the slider member 115, the fitting protrusion 115A fits into the slit 114B of the rotating body 114, and the fitting protrusion 115B fits into the fitting groove 116B of the circular member 116. As a result, when the rotating body 114 rotates in one direction, the slider member 115 moves outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 114 along the slit 114B and the fitting groove 116B, and then swings in the circumferential direction of the rotating body 114. Move. Therefore, the outer ring member 117 moves outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 114, and then moves in the circumferential direction of the circular member 116 so as to form a gap in the circumferential direction of the rotating body 114.

A torsion spring 118 is wound around the shaft portion 116i of the circular member 116. One end of the torsion spring 118 is attached to the movable body 108, and the other end is attached to the rotating body 114 to urge the rotating body 114 to the standby position.

In FIGS. 8 and 9, the fixed body 105 and the movable body 106 are connected by a coil spring 119. Specifically, in FIG. 9, an engaging portion 105D is provided on the back surface of the fixed body 105, and one end of the coil spring 119 is attached to the engaging portion 105D. An engaging portion 106I is provided at the lower portion of the side surface of the movable body 106, and the other end portion of the coil spring 119 is attached to the engaging portion 106I.

The coil spring 119 is provided with the fixed body 105 and the movable body 106 so that the fixed body 105 and the movable body 106 are relatively contracted, that is, the vertical distance between the engaging portion 105D and the engaging portion 106I is shortened. Is urging. In other words, the fixed body 105 and the movable body 106 are urged by the coil spring 119 so that the vertical distance between the engaging portion 105D and the engaging portion 106I is shortened.

The movable body 106 and the fixed body 104 are connected by a coil spring 120. Specifically, an engaging portion 106J is provided at the lower portion of the movable body 106, and one end of the coil spring 120 is attached to the engaging portion 106J. An engaging portion 104H is provided on the upper portion of the fixed body 104, and the other end portion of the coil spring 120 is attached to the engaging portion 104H.

The coil spring 120 has the fixed body 104 and the movable body 106 so that the fixed body 104 and the movable body 106 are relatively contracted, that is, the vertical distance between the engaging portion 104H and the engaging portion 106J is shortened. Is urging. In other words, the fixed body 104 and the movable body 106 are urged by the coil spring 120 so that the vertical distance between the engaging portion 104H and the engaging portion 106J is shortened. Relative extension means that when one part and the other part move relatively, a specific part of one part and a specific part of the other part (for example, the lower end of one part and the other part). The distance from the lower end) becomes longer, and the relative contraction means that when one part and the other part move relatively, a specific part of one part and a specific part of the other part (the specific part of the other part) For example, it means that the distance between the lower end of one component and the lower end of the other component) becomes shorter. 8 and 9 show a state in which the coil springs 119 and 120 are maximally contracted.

In FIG. 8, the lower movable effect member 101B includes a flexible cable 130. The other end of the flexible cable 130 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78 (see FIG. 6).

The flexible cable 130 extends from the other end to the movable member 109 through a slit 108E (see FIG. 9) formed in the movable body 108. The movable member 109 has a built-in illuminated board (not shown) having an LED (not shown), and the flexible cable 130 lights the LED by transmitting a control signal from the lamp control circuit 78 to the illuminated board.

The flexible cable 130 is bent and installed between the fixed body 104, the movable body 106, the fixed body 105, and the movable body 108, and when the movable body 106 and the movable body 108 move relative to the fixed body 105. It is designed to expand and contract. As a result, the flexible cable 130 can be smoothly expanded and contracted while allowing the movable body 106 and the movable body 108 to move with respect to the fixed body 105.

Here, the motor 110A of the present embodiment constitutes the driving member of the present invention, and the movable body 106 constitutes the first movable body of the present invention. The movable body 107 constitutes the second movable body of the present invention, and the movable body 108 constitutes the third movable body of the present invention. The rotating body 114 constitutes the rotating member of the present invention. The fitting projection 114A constitutes the first fitting portion of the present invention, and the slit 114B constitutes the slit of the present invention. The fitting projection 115A constitutes the second fitting portion of the present invention. The movable member 109 constitutes the movable member of the present invention, and the slider member 115 and the outer ring member 117 constitute the movable portion of the present invention. The arm member 112 constitutes the interlocking portion of the present invention.

Next, the operation of the lower movable effect member 101B will be described.
The lower movable effect member 101B is installed behind the game board 1. The standby position is a state in which the movable bodies 106 to 108 have not moved upward (in front of the central portion of the display area 4A) with respect to the fixed bodies 104 and 105. That is, the position shown in FIG. 3 is the standby position of the lower movable effect member 101B. Further, at the position shown in FIG. 3, the movable bodies 106 and 107 move downward with respect to the fixed bodies 104 and 105 (see FIG. 13), and the lower movable effect member 101B expands in the radial direction (FIG. 18). The state shown in) is also included in the standby position.

When the lower movable effect member 101B is in the standby position, the movable bodies 106 to 108 are in a relatively contracted state as shown in FIG. 12, and the fitting projection 114A of the rotating body 114 is the curved hole 108D. It is fitted to the upper end of the inner circumference in the extending direction. Further, the gear 113D meshes downward from the upper portion of the rack teeth 106A of the movable body 106.

When the motor 110A is driven in one direction (forward rotation) from the initial position in the state where the lower movable effect member 101B is located in the standby position, the rotation of the gear 113A causes the gears 113B and 113C as shown in FIG. The movable body 106 is moved downward by the rotation of the gear 113D which is transmitted to the gear 113D via the gear 113D and meshes with the rack teeth 106A.

When the movable body 106 moves downward, the gear 111 integrally provided with the movable body 106 moves downward while rotating. Since the fixed body 105 is fixed to the fixed body 104 fixed to the rear cover 1A and does not move together with the fixed body 104, when the gear 111 rotates, the rotation of the gear 111 is transmitted to the rack teeth 107B, and the movable body 107 moves downward. Move to. That is, the movable bodies 106 and 107 move downward in one direction with respect to the game board 1.

When the movable body 107 moves downward, the pressing portion 107C presses the arm member 112 downward, so that the arm member 112 swings downward with the shaft portion 106H as a fulcrum. At this time, the fitting projection 114A of the rotating body 114 that fits into the guide hole 112A of the arm member 112 and the curved hole 108D of the movable body 108 moves downward along the curved hole 108D.

As a result, the rotating body 114 rotates in the counterclockwise rotation direction (clockwise rotation direction when viewed from the game board 1 side) in FIG.

In the state where the lower movable effect member 101B is located in the standby position, the rotating body 114 is urged by the torsion spring 118 to be urged to the standby position. In a state where the rotating body 114 is urged to the standby position, as shown in FIG. 15, the fitting projection 115A of the slider member 115 is the inner peripheral end in the radial direction of the first straight line portion 114n of the slit 114B of the rotating body 114. Of the two fitting protrusions 115B, the fitting protrusion 115B located inward in the radial direction is engaged with the inner peripheral end in the radial direction of the first straight line portion 116n of the fitting groove 116B of the circular member 116. It fits.

When the rotating body 114 rotates in the counterclockwise rotation direction in FIG. 15, as shown in FIG. 16, the fitting projection 115A moves outward in the radial direction from the inner peripheral end in the radial direction of the first straight line portion 114n and is fitted. The joint protrusion 115B moves outward in the radial direction from the inner peripheral end in the radial direction of the first straight line portion 116n.

As a result, the slider member 115 moves from the inside of the radial member 116 to the outside of the radial direction, and the outer ring member 117 moves from the inside of the circular member 116 to the outside of the radial direction in the standby position. It expands in the radial direction (see FIG. 18).

When the motor 110A is reversely driven to the initial position from this state, the rotation of the gear 113A is transmitted to the gear 113D via the gears 113B and 113C, and the movable body 106 moves upward along the rack teeth 106A (see FIG. 12). ..

When the movable body 106 moves upward, the gear 111 integrally provided with the movable body 106 moves upward while rotating. Along with this, the gear 111 moves upward while rotating along the rack teeth 105A of the fixed body 105, so that the movable body 107 in which the rack teeth 107B mesh with the gear 111 moves upward with the rotation of the gear 111. (See FIG. 14).

When the movable body 107 moves upward, the pressing portion 107C does not press the arm member 112 downward. At this time, the rotating body 114 rotates with respect to the movable body 108 in the clockwise rotation direction (counterclockwise rotation direction when viewed from the game board 1 side) due to the urging force of the torsion spring 118, and the arm member 112 It swings upward with the shaft portion 106H as a fulcrum.

At this time, the fitting projection 114A of the rotating body 114 that fits into the guide hole 112A of the arm member 112 and the curved hole 108D of the movable body 108 moves upward along the curved hole 108D. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 16 to 15, the fitting protrusion 115A moves from the outer side of the first straight line portion 114n to the inner peripheral end in the radial direction, and the fitting protrusion 115B moves to the inner peripheral end in the radial direction. It moves from the outside of the radial direction of 116n to the inner peripheral end of the radial direction. Therefore, the slider member 115 moves inward in the radial direction of the circular member 116, and the outer ring member 117 moves inwardly in the radial direction of the circular member 116.

In this way, the motor 110A is driven in the forward rotation from the initial position to move the movable body 107 downward, and then the movable body 107 is reversely driven so as to return to the initial position from the driven position. With the 101B located in the standby position, the outer ring member 117 can be moved into a state in which the rotating body 114 is located inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 3) and a state in which the outer ring member 117 is located outside in the radial direction (see FIG. 18). I do. As a result, the lower movable effect member 101B can be expanded and contracted at the standby position.

On the other hand, when the lower movable effect member 101B is to move upward from the standby position, the motor 110A is reversed from the initial position in a state where the movable bodies 106 to 108 are relatively contracted as shown in FIG. Driven by rotation.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 14, the rotation of the gear 113A is transmitted to the gear 113D via the gears 113B and 113C, and the movable body 106 in which the rack teeth 106A mesh with the gear 113D moves upward.

When the movable body 106 moves upward, the gear 111 integrally provided with the movable body 106 rotates and moves upward along the rack teeth 105A of the fixed body 105. Along with this, the movable body 107 having the rack teeth 107B meshing with the gear 111 moves upward with a movement amount larger than the movement amount of the movable body 106. That is, the movable bodies 106 and 107 move upward with respect to the game board 1.

The motor 110A drives forward rotation (one direction) and reverse rotation (other direction), and the lower movable effect member 101B and the movable bodies 106 and 107 move downward (one direction) and upward (other direction). It can be expressed as moving, and such an expression is one direction in expressing the rotation direction such as forward rotation and reverse rotation, and the movement direction such as downward, upward, and horizontal directions. It is possible to use an expression in the other direction.

When the movable body 107 moves upward, the guide protrusion 107D of the movable body 107 moves upward along the guide groove 108C of the movable body 108 and abuts on the upper end of the inner circumference of the guide groove 108C. As a result, the movable body 108 is pressed by the movable body 107 and moves upward. ..

When the movable body 108 moves upward, the fitting projection 114A of the rotating body 114 moves downward along the curved hole 108D of the movable body 108, and the arm member 112 swings upward with the shaft portion 106H as a fulcrum. As a result, the rotating body 114 rotates in the counterclockwise rotation direction (clockwise rotation direction when viewed from the game board 1 side) in FIG.

In the state where the lower movable effect member 101B is in the standby position, the rotating body 114 is urged by the torsion spring 118 to be urged to the standby position. In a state where the rotating body 114 is urged to the standby position, as shown in FIG. 15, the fitting projection 115A of the slider member 115 is the inner peripheral end in the radial direction of the first straight line portion 114n of the slit 114B of the rotating body 114. The fitting protrusion 115B, which is engaged with and is located inward in the radial direction among the plurality of fitting protrusions 115B, is engaged with the inner peripheral end in the radial direction of the first straight line portion 116n of the fitting groove 116B of the circular member 116. It fits.

When the rotating body 114 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 15 by the arm member 112, the fitting projection 115A moves outward in the radial direction from the inner peripheral end in the radial direction of the first straight line portion 114n and is fitted. The protrusion 115B moves outward in the radial direction from the inner peripheral end in the radial direction of the first straight line portion 116n.

As a result, the slider member 115 moves from the inside of the rotating body 114 in the radial direction to the outside in the radial direction, and the outer ring member 117 moves from the inside of the rotating body 114 in the radial direction to the outside in the radial direction.

When the rotating body 114 further rotates in the counterclockwise rotation direction in FIG. 16 as the movable body 107 further rises, the fitting projection 115A starts from the first straight line portion 114n as shown in FIGS. 16 to 17. After moving to the second straight line portion 114w, the second straight line portion 114w moves outward in the radial direction. At the same time, the fitting projection 115B moves from the first straight line portion 116n to the second straight line portion 116w, and then moves outward in the radial direction of the second straight line portion 116w.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17, the slider member 115 swings in the circumferential direction of the circular member 116 in a state of being movable outward in the radial direction of the circular member 116, and the outer ring member 117 radiates the rotating body 114. It can move in the circumferential direction of the rotating body 114 from the state where it can move outward. That is, the movable bodies 106 to 108 move the outer ring member 117 outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 114 until they move to a state of being relatively extended from the standby position, and then move in the circumferential direction of the rotating body 114. Perform a movable production. The state in which the movable bodies 106 to 108 are relatively extended most (the state shown in FIG. 14) corresponds to the movable position of the present invention.

When the motor 110A is reversely driven so as to return to the initial position from this state, the rotation of the gear 113A is transmitted to the gear 113D via the gears 113B and 113C, and the movable body 106 in which the rack teeth 106A mesh with the gear 113D moves downward. do.

When the movable body 106 moves downward, the gear 111 integrally provided with the movable body 106 moves downward while rotating, and the gear 111 rotates downward along the rack teeth 105A of the fixed body 105. Move to. Along with this, as shown in FIGS. 14 to 12, the movable body 107 having the rack teeth 107B meshing with the gear 111 moves downward.

The fixed body 105 and the movable body 106 of the present embodiment are connected by a coil spring 119, and the fixed body 105 and the movable body 106 are urged by the coil spring 119 in a direction of relative contraction. Further, the movable body 106 and the fixed body 104 are connected by a coil spring 120, and the fixed body 105 and the movable body 106 are urged by the coil spring 120 in a direction of relative contraction.

Therefore, due to the urging force of the coil springs 119 and 120 in addition to the rotation of the motor 110A, the movable body 106 moves downward at a speed faster than when moving upward from the standby position.

When the movable body 106 moves downward, the movable body 107 moves downward together with the movable body 106 by a movement amount larger than the movement amount of the movable body 106. When the movable body 107 moves downward, the guide protrusion 107D of the movable body 107 moves downward along the guide groove 108C of the movable body 108 and abuts on the lower end of the inner peripheral circumference of the guide groove 108C in the radial direction. As a result, the movable body 108 is pressed by the movable body 107 and moves downward.

When the movable body 108 moves downward, the curved hole 108D moves downward along the fitting protrusion 114A of the rotating body 114, and when the fitting protrusion 114A abuts on the upper end of the inner circumference of the curved hole 108D in the radial direction, The arm member 112 swings downward with the shaft portion 106H as a fulcrum. As a result, the rotating body 114 rotates in the clockwise rotation direction (counterclockwise rotation direction when viewed from the game board 1 side) as shown in FIGS. 17 to 16.

As shown in FIGS. 17 to 16, when the rotating body 114 rotates in the clockwise rotation direction, the rotating body 114 is urged by the torsion spring 118, and the fitting projection 115A of the slider member 115 is inserted into the slit 114B of the rotating body 114. The second straight line portion 114w moves to the first straight line portion 114n, and the fitting projection 115B moves from the second straight line portion 116w of the fitting groove 116B of the circular member 116 to the first straight line portion 116n. As a result, the slider member 115 moves in the circumferential direction of the circular member 116.

When the rotating body 114 further rotates in the clockwise rotation direction in FIG. 16 from this state, the fitting projection 115A of the slider member 115 moves to the inner peripheral end in the radial direction of the first straight line portion 114n of the slit 114B of the rotating body 114. , The fitting protrusion 115B moves to the lower end of the inner circumference of the first straight line portion 116n of the fitting groove 116B of the circular member 116 in the radial direction. As a result, the outer ring member 117 moves from the outside in the radial direction to the inward in the radial direction of the circular member 116.

By driving the motor 110A from the initial position in the other direction (reverse rotation) in this way, the lower movable effect member 101B is moved upward, and the outer ring member 117 is movable in the radial direction outward and the circumferential direction of the rotating body 114. It is possible to perform an effect such that the lower movable effect member 101B is enlarged when the lower movable effect member 101B is moved to the movable position (see FIG. 19).

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the lower movable effect member 101B has a movable body 106 that can move upward and downward with respect to the game board 1 by the rotation of the motor 110A, and a pressing portion 107C. A movable body 107 that is held and movably provided on the movable body 106 and can move upward and downward with respect to the game board 1 together with the movable body 106, and upward and downward with respect to the game board 1 together with the movable body 107. It includes a movable body 108 that can be moved.

Further, the lower movable effect member 101B has a guide hole 112A and is provided swingably on the movable body 106, and the arm member 112 that can be pressed by the pressing portion 107C and the fitting projection 114A that fits into the arm member 112. And a rotating body 114 having a plurality of slits 114B and rotatably provided on the movable body 108, and a fitting protrusion 115A that fits into the slit 114B, and the radial direction of the rotating body 114 and the radial direction of the rotating body 114 due to the rotation of the rotating body 114. It includes a slider member 115 that can move in the circumferential direction and a movable member 109 having an outer ring member 117.

Further, the lower movable effect member 101B moves the movable bodies 106 and 107 downward by rotating the motor 110A in the forward direction from the initial position in the state where the lower movable effect member 101B is located in the standby position, and causes the arm member 112 to swing. By converting to rotation of 114 in one direction, the outer ring member 117 is moved in the radial direction while allowing only rotation of the rotating body 114, and by rotating the motor 110A in the reverse direction from the initial position, the movable body 106 is moved upward. While moving and converting the swing of the arm member 112 into one-way rotation of the rotating body 114, the movable body 108 is moved upward to move the lower movable effect member 101B to the movable position and rotate the outer ring member 117. The body 114 is moved in the radial direction and the circumferential direction.

As a result, two different effects, such as an effect of moving the lower movable effect member 101B in the standby position and an effect of moving the lower movable effect member 101B while moving from the standby position to the movable position, can be easily performed by simply switching the rotation direction of the single motor 110A. The effect of the lower movable effect member 101B can be further enhanced.

<Composition of winning openings>
The configuration of the winning opening will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 26. The game board 1 includes a winning opening unit 201 shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, and the winning opening unit 201 has a first starting opening member 202. The first starting port member 202 is attached to the game board 1 (see FIG. 3), and an opening constituting the first starting port 32 is formed at the upper end of the first starting port member 202.

Inside the first starting port member 202, a ball passage 203 is formed to discharge the game ball won in the first starting port 32 downstream. A cylindrical portion 202A (see FIGS. 21 and 22) is formed in the lower portion of the first starting port member 202, and the cylindrical portion 202A extends rearward from the first starting port member 202.

In FIGS. 20 and 21, a ball passage 204 is formed inside the cylindrical portion 202A, and the ball passage 204 communicates with the ball passage 203.

In FIGS. 21 and 22, a ball passage unit 205 is provided behind the first starting port member 202. In FIG. 21, the ball passage unit 205 is formed with a ball passage 206 communicating with the ball passage 204, and the ball passage 206 faces the ball passage 204 in the front-rear direction.

A discharge port 206A that opens downward is formed on the bottom surface of the ball passage 206, and the discharge port 206A communicates with the ball passage 206. As a result, the game ball winning the prize in the first starting port 32 is discharged from the ball passage 203 to the ball passage 206 after passing through the ball passage 204, and falls downward through the discharge port 206A.

As shown in FIG. 24, when the lower movable effect member 101B is in the standby position, the outer ring member 117 is in contact with the outer peripheral portion of the circular member 116 and is expanded in the radial direction (lower movable effect member). In the state where the 101B is movable), the ball passages 203, 204, and 206 (the ball passage 206 is not shown) pass from the front of the lower movable effect member 101B to the lower side of the lower movable effect member 101B. It is provided.

As a result, in the ball passages 203, 204, and 206 of the present embodiment, the outer ring in which the game ball winning the first starting port 32 is installed from the front of the lower movable effect member 101B to the lower side of the lower movable effect member 101B. It is discharged to the back surface (or the back side, the lower side, etc.) of the game board 1 through the lower part of the member 117.

In FIGS. 20 to 22, the winning opening unit 201 includes a general winning opening member 207. The general winning opening member 207 is attached to the game board 1, and an opening constituting the general winning opening 40A to 40C is formed at the upper end of the general winning opening member 207.

Ball passages 208 to 210 are provided inside the general winning opening member 207. The ball passage 208 communicates with the general winning opening 40A, extends to the right from below (downstream) of the general winning opening 40A, and discharges the game ball that has won the general winning opening 40A downstream.

The ball passage 209 communicates with the general winning opening 40B and the ball passage 208 downstream of the general winning opening 40B and the ball passage 208. The ball passage 209 extends from the lower side (downstream) of the general winning opening 40B to the right, and discharges the game ball that has won the general winning opening 40B and the game ball that passes through the ball passage 208 to the downstream.

The ball passage 210 communicates with the general winning opening 40C and the ball passage 209 downstream of the general winning opening 40C and the ball passage 209. The ball passage 210 extends downward from the general winning opening 40C, and discharges the game ball that has won the general winning opening 40C and the game ball that passes through the ball passage 209.

The ball passage 209 joins the ball passage 208 at the general winning opening 40B, and the passage area, which is the area of the cross section in the vertical direction orthogonal to the direction (horizontal direction) through which the game ball passes, is the passage area of the ball passage 208. Is formed larger than. That is, the vertical width of the ball passage 209 is formed to be larger than the vertical width of the ball passage 208. For example, when the vertical width of the ball passage 208 is large enough for one game ball to pass through, the vertical width of the ball passage 209 is large enough for the game ball to pass at least two balls. It is desirable to have.

In the present embodiment, it is described that the vertical passage area of the ball passage 209 is formed larger than the passage area of the ball passage 208, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the passage area in the front-rear direction is large. It may be formed. Further, even when the passage area is formed large in both the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, the effect of facilitating the discharge is desired.

In FIGS. 20 and 21, a discharge port 211 is formed below the ball passage 210. As a result, the game balls that have won the general prize opening 40A are discharged to the discharge port 211 through the ball passages 208 to 210. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 40B is discharged to the discharge port 211 through the ball passages 209 and 210, and the game ball that has won the general winning opening 40C is discharged to the discharge port 211 through the ball passage 210.

The ball passage unit 205 is formed with a ball passage 212 communicating with the discharge port 211, and the ball passage 212 extends rearward from the discharge port 211 and then extends to the right. A discharge port 212A is formed at the downstream end of the ball passage 212, and the game ball introduced into the ball passage 212 from the discharge port 211 is discharged downward from the discharge port 212A. The ball passages 208 to 210 and 212 of the present embodiment discharge the game balls that have won the general winning openings 40A to 40C to the back surface of the game board 1 through the lower part of the lower movable effect member 101B.

In FIGS. 20 and 21, the ball passage 206 and the ball passage 212 communicate with the confluence portion 213 through the discharge port 206A and the discharge port 212A, and the game ball winning the first starting port 32 and the general winning port 40A to The game balls that have won the 40C merge at the confluence portion 213 (confluence area) and are discharged to the back surface of the game board 1.

In FIGS. 20 and 21, the ball passage 212 is provided with a general winning opening left switch 400A, and the general winning opening left switch 400A has a detection surface 400a in the vertical direction. As a result, the general winning opening left switch 400A detects a game ball flowing in the right direction (first direction) in the horizontal direction in the ball passage 212.

The ball passage 206 is provided with a first start port switch 320, and the first start port switch 320 has a detection surface 320a in the left-right direction different from the detection surface 400a of the general winning port left switch 400A. As a result, the first start port switch 320 detects a game ball flowing in the vertical direction (a second direction different from the first direction) in the ball passage 206.

In FIG. 21, the first start port switch 320 is installed in front of the general winning opening left switch 400A. In FIGS. 20 and 21, a magnetic sensor 214 is provided in the ball passage unit 205 below the lower movable effect member 101B, and the magnetic sensor 214 is provided between the ball passage 206 and the ball passage 212. , Is located below the first starting port 32.

The magnetic sensor 214 is connected to the main control circuit 60 (see FIG. 6), detects that a magnet or the like is intentionally brought close to the first starting port 32 by the player, and sends a magnetic signal to the main control circuit 60. Output. The main control circuit 60 transmits an abnormal signal to the hall computer 100 when a magnetic signal is input. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally performing an illegal act such as acquiring a gaming ball against the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment.

Here, the first start port switch 320 constitutes the first sensor and the game medium detection member of the present invention. The general winning opening left switch 400A constitutes the second sensor of the present invention, and the magnetic sensor 214 constitutes the magnetic detection sensor of the present invention.

In FIG. 20, the first starting port member 202 is provided with an illuminated substrate 215, and the illuminated substrate 215 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 215a. The light emission of the LED 215a is controlled by the illumination substrate 215. Here, the first starting port 32 of the present embodiment constitutes the winning opening of the present invention, and the ball passages 203 and 204 constitute the upstream game medium passage of the present invention. Further, the illuminated substrate 215 constitutes the illuminated substrate of the present invention.

Further, the first starting port member 202 of the present embodiment includes a first starting port 32 in which a game ball can win a prize, ball passages 203 and 204 for discharging the game ball winning in the first starting port 32 downstream, and light emitting. The winning opening unit of the present invention having the illuminating substrate 215 is configured.

Further, the ball passage 206 of the present embodiment constitutes a downstream game medium passage of the present invention, and the ball passage unit 205 lowers the game balls discharged to the ball passages 203 and 204 of the first starting port member 202. It constitutes the game medium passage portion of the present invention in which a ball passage 206 is formed to be discharged to the back surface of the game board 1 through the lower side of the side movable effect member 101B.

In FIG. 22, one end of the cable 216 is connected to the illuminated substrate 215. The other end of the cable 216 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78 (see FIG. 6). The illumination board 215 controls the lighting of the LED 215a based on the control signal transmitted from the lamp control circuit 78. The cable 216 of the present embodiment constitutes the wiring of the present invention. Here, the LED 215a is included in the LED group 28 (see FIG. 6) controlled by the lamp control circuit 78.

The LED 215a may be capable of emitting light when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320, or may be capable of emitting light according to the effect. At this time, as the light emitting mode of the LED 215a, one LED 215a may be made to emit light and then the other LED 215a may be made to emit light, or any LED 215a may be made to emit light.

In the present embodiment, it is described that the other end of the cable 216 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the relay board that relays the lamp control circuit 78 and the illumination board 215 is not limited to this. It may be connected to. In this case, the relay board may be provided with an LED driver for controlling the LED 215a. In this case, it is also possible to recognize the relay board as an LED drive circuit.

In FIGS. 22 and 23, a U-shaped protrusion 217 is provided on the upper surface of the ball passage unit 205, and the protrusion 217 is located above the first start port switch 320 (see FIG. 21) and is a ball passage. It protrudes upward from the upper surface of the unit 205.

In FIG. 22, the cable 216 extends downward from the illuminated substrate 215 and extends along the ball passage unit 205 to the rear of the ball passage unit 205. The cable 216 extending to the rear of the ball passage unit 205 is fastened to the protrusion 217 by a binding member such as a band (not shown), and is wired from the protrusion 217 to the lower side of the game board 1 through the slit 218 of the rear cover 1A.

Cables (not shown) are connected to the first start port switch 320, the general winning port left switch 400A, and the magnetic sensor 214, respectively, and these cables are also bundled and fastened to the protrusion 217 by a band or the like.

In FIGS. 22 and 23, a semi-cylindrical member 219 is provided on the upper part of the ball passage unit 205, and the semi-cylindrical member 219 has a lower movable effect member 101B and a ball passage so as to cover the upper part of the protrusion 217. It is provided between the unit 205 and the unit 205 (see FIG. 23). The protrusion 217 of the present embodiment constitutes a support portion that supports the wiring of the present invention, and the semi-cylindrical member 219 constitutes the covering member of the present invention.
Here, supporting (guided, guiding) the wiring includes the case where the wiring is fixed to the protrusion 217 with a band or the like, and may include the case where the wiring is inserted into the opening formed by the protrusion 217.

Further, the first starting port 32 of the present embodiment constitutes the first winning opening of the present invention, and the general winning openings 40A to 40C constitute the second winning opening of the present invention. The ball passages 204 and 206 form the first passage of the present invention, and the ball passage 212 constitutes the second passage of the present invention.

The ball passages 203, 204, and 206 constitute the game medium passage of the present invention. The ball passage 208 constitutes the first game medium passage of the present invention, and the ball passages 209 and 210 constitute the second game medium passage of the present invention. The general winning opening 40A constitutes the first gaming medium winning opening of the present invention, and the general winning openings 40B and 40C constitute the second gaming medium winning opening of the present invention.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment, the game board 1 having the game area 1p on which the game ball rolls and the lower part provided on the game board 1 and movable so as to execute a predetermined movable effect. A game ball provided on the game board 1 so as to be located in front of the side movable effect member 101B and the lower movable effect member 101B, and the game ball has passed through the first start port 32 and the first start port 32 where the game ball can win a prize. The lower movable effect member 101B is provided with ball passages 203, 204, and 206 that discharge the ball passages 203, 204, and 206 from the front of the lower movable effect member 101B to the back surface of the game board 1 through the lower part of the lower movable effect member 101B. It is possible to execute a movable effect that is movable in the directions of the ball passages 203, 204, and 206 below the lower movable effect member 101B, and the ball passages 203, 204 are in a state where the lower movable effect member 101B is movable in the standby position. , 206 are provided so as to pass from the front of the lower movable effect member 101B to the lower side of the lower movable effect member 101B.

As a result, it is possible to secure a space in which the lower movable effect member 101B can move in the standby position. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effectability of the lower movable effect member 101B while sufficiently securing the installation space of the lower movable effect member 101B.

Further, since a large installation space for the lower movable effect member 101B can be secured, it is possible to increase the size of the lower movable effect member 101B and expand the movable range of the outer ring member 117 of the lower movable effect member 101B at the standby position. , The effectability of the lower movable effect member 101B can be enhanced more effectively.

Further, by installing the first starting port 32 in front of the lower movable effect member 101B, the lower side existing behind the first starting port 32 is seen by the player who visually recognizes the first starting port 32 during the game. It becomes possible to visually recognize the movable effect member 101B. Therefore, the effect of the lower movable effect member 101B can be more effectively improved for the player.
In particular, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the lower movable effect member 101B executes a movable effect that is movable so as to expand in the radial direction at the standby position, so that the movable range of the lower movable effect member 101B is expanded. The effect of the lower movable effect member 101B can be improved more effectively.
Further, in a state where the lower movable effect member 101B is movable in the standby position, the ball passages 203, 204, and 206 are provided so as to pass from the front of the lower movable effect member 101B to the lower side of the lower movable effect member 101B. Therefore, since it is possible to secure a wide space in which the movable accessory can move in the standby position, the lower movable effect member 101B can be moved so as to expand in a wider range in the radial direction. As a result, the lower movable effect member 101B can be dynamically moved, and the effectability of the lower movable effect member 101B can be enhanced more effectively.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the general winning openings 40A to 40C on which the gaming balls can be won and the gaming balls that have passed through the first starting opening 32 are passed under the lower movable effect member 101B to pass the gaming board 1 The ball passages 204 and 206 discharged to the back surface of the game board 1, and the ball passage 212 and the ball passage 206 ejecting the game balls winning in the general winning openings 40A to 40C to the back surface of the game board 1 through the lower part of the lower movable effect member 101B. The first start port switch 320, which has a detection surface 320a for detecting the game ball discharged to the ball passage 206, and detects the game ball rolling in the first direction, and the ball passage 212. , A detection surface 400a in a direction different from the detection surface 320a, a general winning opening left switch 400A for detecting a gaming ball rolling in a second direction different from the first direction, and a first starting opening switch 320. Is installed in front of the general winning opening left switch 400A.

Further, a magnetic sensor 214 is provided below the lower movable effect member 101B so as to be located between the ball passage 206 and the ball passage 212. Further, the ball passage 206 and the ball passage 212 are merged by the merging portion 213 (merging area) downstream of the discharge direction of the game ball.

As a result, the ball passage 206 and the ball passage 212 can be installed in different directions in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, and the ball passage 206 and the ball passage 212 can be merged by the merging portion 213.

In addition to this, the first start port switch 320 is installed in front of the general winning opening left switch 400A, and a magnetic sensor 214 is provided between the ball passage 206 and the ball passage 212 below the lower movable effect member 101B. Therefore, three sensors including the first start port switch 320, the general winning port left switch 400A, and the magnetic sensor 214 can be installed in a small space below the lower movable effect member 101B.

Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effectability of the lower movable effect member 101B while sufficiently securing the installation space of the lower movable effect member 101B.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the general winning opening 40A provided in the game board 1 and capable of winning a game ball, and the general winning opening 40B provided in the game board 1 in which a game ball can be won. 40C, a ball passage 208 provided in the game board 1 to discharge the game ball winning in the general winning opening 40A downstream, and a game ball provided in the game board 1 and winning the general winning openings 40B and 40C downstream. The ball passages 209 and 210 are provided, and the ball passage 209 joins the ball passage 208 downstream of the general winning opening 40B, and is an area of a cross section in the vertical direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball passes. The area is formed to be larger than the passage area of the spherical passage 208.

As a result, even if the number of game media passing through the ball passages 208 to 210 per unit time is increased in order to shorten the game speed, the game balls won from the general winning openings 40A and 40B are in the ball passage. It is possible to prevent clogging downstream of 209. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly discharged to the downstream discharge port 211, and the game playability can be improved.

In particular, since the vertical width of the ball passage 209 is formed larger than the vertical width of the ball passage 208, it is possible to prevent the area occupied by the ball passage 209 from becoming large in the front-rear direction of the game board 1. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the game balls won from the general winning openings 40A and 40B from being clogged downstream of the ball passage 209.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the vertical width of the ball passage 209 is formed to be larger than the vertical width of the ball passage 208, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the width of the ball passage 209 in the front-rear direction is not limited to this. The width may be formed larger than the width in the front-rear direction of the ball passage 208. By doing so, while preventing the area occupied by the ball passage 209 from increasing in the vertical direction of the game board 1, the game balls won from the general winning openings 40A and 40B are clogged downstream of the ball passage 209. Can be prevented.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment has a first starting port 32 in which a game ball can win a prize, ball passages 203 and 204 for discharging the game ball winning in the first starting port 32 downstream, and an illuminated substrate capable of emitting light. The ball passage for discharging the game balls discharged to the first starting port member 202 having 215 and the ball passages 203 and 204 of the first starting port member 202 to the back surface of the game board 1 through the lower part of the lower movable effect member 101B. The ball passage unit 205 on which the 206 is formed, the first start port switch 320 provided in the ball passage 206 for detecting a game ball passing through the ball passage 206, and the cable 216 connected to the illuminated board 215 are provided. ing.

In addition to this, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided on the upper surface of the ball passage unit 205 so as to be located above the ball passage unit 205, and has a protrusion 217 that supports a cable 216 extending from the illuminated substrate 215. A semi-cylindrical member 219 provided between the lower movable effect member 101B and the ball passage unit 205 so as to cover the upper part of the protrusion 217 is provided.

As a result, the ball passages 203, 204, and 206 can be passed from the front of the lower movable effect member 101B to the lower side of the lower movable effect member 101B, and a space for the lower movable effect member 101B to move is secured. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effectability of the lower movable effect member 101B while sufficiently securing the installation space of the lower movable effect member 101B.

Further, since a large installation space for the lower movable effect member 101B can be secured, the size of the lower movable effect member 101B can be increased, and the effectability of the lower movable effect member 101B can be more effectively enhanced. ..

Further, the cable 216 extending from the illuminated board 215 can be supported by the protrusion 217, and the cable 216 extending from the illuminated board 215 can be prevented from fluttering below the lower movable effect member 101B. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cable 216 from interfering with the outer ring member 117 when the outer ring member 117 of the lower movable effect member 101B is movable, the outer ring member 117 can be smoothly moved, and the cable 216 can be moved to the outer ring member 117. Can be protected from.

Further, the cable 216 extending from the illuminated board 215 is inserted into the protrusion 217A (see FIG. 22) provided in the vicinity of the illuminated board 215 in front of the protrusion 217, and is bent downward with respect to the protrusion 217A. .. As a result, the cable 216 is guided by the protrusion 217A, so that the connection portion between the illuminated board 215 and the cable 216 is not burdened. In this way, the cable 216 is supported by the protrusion 217A.

The support (guide, guide) of the wiring (cable 216) by the protrusion 217A includes the case where the wiring is fixed to the protrusion 217A with a band or the like, and the wiring is inserted into the opening formed by the protrusion 217A. May include doing.

Further, by providing the semi-cylindrical member 219 between the lower movable effect member 101B and the ball passage unit 205 so as to cover the upper part of the protrusion 217, the cable 216 and the lower movable effect member 101B are semi-cylindrical members. It can be shielded by 219, and the cable 216 can be more effectively prevented from interfering with the outer ring member 117 when the outer ring member 117 is movable. Further, by colliding the game ball with the semi-cylindrical member 219 when the game ball flows down from the lower movable effect member 101B side, it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the cable 216, and the cable 216 can be moved from the game ball. Can be protected.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the protrusion 217 is formed in a U shape protruding from the upper part of the ball passage unit 205, and the cable 216 is supported by the protrusion 217. Therefore, the cable 216 is bound by a binding band. It can be firmly fastened to the protrusion 217 by the above means, and the cable 216 can be more effectively prevented from fluttering under the lower movable effect member 101B.

Further, the protrusion 217 may be formed in a substantially U shape, and the cable 216 may be configured to be accommodated in the space inside the U shape of the protrusion 217. In this case, the protrusion 217 may be made of a rigid or flexible body, and one end of the U-shaped side (left or right portion of the U-shape) is a sphere for inserting the cable 216 from the side. It can also be configured to provide a space with the passage unit 205. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to more effectively prevent the cable 216 from fluttering.

In the lower movable effect member 101B of the present embodiment, the outer ring member 117 is arranged without a gap in the circumferential direction at the standby position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 25, the outer ring member 117 is a circle. The outer ring member 117 is configured to be located at the first position separated by the gap 121 in the circumferential direction in the state of being in contact with the outer peripheral portion of the shaped member 116 (see FIG. 15), and in the standby state, The outer ring member 117 may be movable to this first position (position shown in FIG. 25) and the second position outside the radial direction of the rotating body 114 (position shown in FIG. 26).

In this case, the ball passages 204 and 206 may be provided so as to pass through any one of the four gaps 121, for example, the lower gap 121. That is, the ball passages 204 and 206 may be provided so as to pass through the gap 121 in a state where the outer ring member 117 is located at the first position and the second position. The outer ring member 117 constitutes the movable portion of the present invention, and the gap 121 constitutes the gap of the present invention.

By doing so, in addition to being able to secure an installation space for the lower movable effect member 101B as described above, it is possible to install the ball passage 204 in front of the lower movable effect member 101B while avoiding the outer ring member 117. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball passages 204 and 206 from being formed so as to be separated downward from the lower movable effect member 101B, and the installation space of the game board 1 can be reduced.

<Structure and operation of the upper movable effect member 101A>
27 to 48 are views showing the game board 1 in a state where the upper movable effect member 101A and the upper movable effect member 101A are movable. In FIGS. 27 to 48, the vertical and horizontal directions are the upper side as seen from the player. This is the vertical and horizontal directions of the movable effect member 101A. The upper movable effect member 101A of the present embodiment constitutes the movable accessory of the present invention.

In FIG. 27, the upper movable effect member 101A includes a front decoration 160 provided at the front portion, a case 161 provided at the rearmost portion, a fixed base 162, a rear movable base 163, and a front movable base 164. It is equipped with a blade movable rack 165 (see FIGS. 28 and 29), and the case 161 is installed behind the game board 1.

In FIG. 28, the case 161 includes a motor 166, a plurality of gears 167A, 167B, and an arm member 168.

The motor 166 is fixed to the case 161 and rotatably supports the motor gear 166A. The gear 167A meshes with the motor gear 166A and the gear 167B, and the rotation of the motor gear 166A is transmitted to the gear 167B via the gear 167A.

In FIGS. 34 and 35, the gear 167B includes a protrusion 167b that rotates integrally with the gear 167B, and the protrusion 167b moves in the rotation direction of the gear 167B as the gear 167B rotates.

In FIGS. 28 and 30, the arm member 168 is attached to the swing shaft 168A provided in the case 161. In FIGS. 34 and 35, a slit 168B is formed in the arm member 168, and a protrusion 167b is slidably fitted in the slit 168B.

The arm member 168 swings in the vertical direction with the swing shaft 168A as a fulcrum because the protrusion 167b slides along the slit 168B as the gear 167B rotates. In FIGS. 28 and 30, the case 161 is provided with a torsion spring 196, and the torsion spring 196 urges the arm member 168 to swing upward.

A slit 168C is formed in the arm member 168, and a fitting projection 163A of the rear movable base 163 is fitted in the slit 168C. The case 161 is provided with a curved guide rail 161A, and the fitting projection 163A is slidably fitted to the guide rail 161A.

As a result, the arm member 168 is urged by the torsion spring 196 at the standby position, so that the arm member 168 is stopped in a state of swinging upward along the guide rail 161A.

The fixed base 162 is attached to the case 161 and is fixed to the rear of the game board 1 integrally with the case 161. A rack 162A is provided at a substantially central portion in the width direction of the fixed base 162 (a central portion in the left-right direction of the game board 1). The rack 162A extends in the extending direction (vertical direction) of the fixed base 162, and the rack 162A is formed with rack teeth 162a having continuous uneven portions in the vertical direction.

The fixed base 162 is formed with a slit 162B located on the right side of the rack 162A and extending in the vertical direction, and the fitting projection 163A of the rear movable base 163 passes through the slit 162B to the slit 168C of the arm member 168. It is fitted.

The rear movable base 163 is movably provided with respect to the fixed base 162 so as to be located in front of the fixed base 162. As a result, the rear movable base 163 can be moved with respect to the game board 1.

In FIGS. 30 and 31, a guide rail 163B is provided at the center of the rear movable base 163 in the width direction on the back surface of the rear movable base 163, and the upper end of the guide rail 163B is open.

In FIG. 30, a slit 163C is formed on the front surface of the rear movable base 163, and the slit 163C communicates with the guide rail 163B. An engaging protrusion 163D is formed in the lower portion of the rear movable base 163, and the engaging protrusion 163D projects forward from the rear movable base 163.

The guide rail 163B slidably holds the rack 162A so as to sandwich the rack 162A from both sides, and the rack teeth 162a project to the front of the rear movable base 163 through the slit 163C. A plurality of gears 169A to 169E are rotatably provided on the front surface of the rear movable base 163 along the vertical direction.

The uppermost gear 169A meshes with the rack teeth 162a of the rack 162A. When the arm member 168 swings in the vertical direction, the arm member 168 presses the fitting projection 163A in the vertical direction.

As a result, the rear movable base 163 moves in the vertical direction with respect to the fixed base 162, and the gear 169A rotates along the rack teeth 162a. When the gear 169A rotates, the rotation of the gear 169A is transmitted to the gear 169E via the gears 169B to 169D.

In FIGS. 29 and 33, a protrusion 164A is provided at the right end of the front movable base 164 on the back surface of the front movable base 164, and the protrusion 164A extends in the vertical direction and is the back surface of the front movable base 164. It protrudes backward from.

The protruding portion 164A is formed with rack teeth 164a having continuous uneven portions in the vertical direction, and the rack teeth 164a are meshed with gears 169E. A central blade member 170 is integrally provided on the front movable base 164, and the central blade member 170 projects outward from the front movable base 164 to the left and right.

In FIG. 32, a guide member 164B is provided on the front surface of the front movable base 164 so as to face each other in the left-right direction, and the blade movable rack 165 is supported by the guide member 164B. Racks 165A and 165B are provided in the upper left and right directions of the blade movable rack 165, and the racks 165A and 165B are formed of uneven portions continuous in the vertical direction, and rack teeth 165a and 165b facing each other are formed.

In FIG. 33, a rack 165C is provided at the lower part of the central portion in the width direction of the blade movable rack 165, and the rack 165C is composed of uneven portions continuous in the vertical direction, and the rack teeth 165c and 165d facing in opposite directions. Is formed.

In FIG. 32, a pair of slits 165D are formed in the blade movable rack 165, and a fitting projection 164C formed on the front surface of the front movable base 164 is slidably fitted in the slit 165D.

As a result, the blade movable rack 165 can move vertically with respect to the front movable base 164 along the fitting projection 164C.

The front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165 are connected by a coil spring 171. An engaging portion 165F is provided on the upper portion of the blade movable rack 165, and one end of a coil spring 171 is attached to the engaging portion 165F. An engaging portion 164E is provided at the lower portion of the front movable base 164, and the other end portion of the coil spring 171 is attached to the engaging portion 164E. In FIG. 32, the coil spring 171 shows a state of being fully contracted.

The coil spring 171 urges the front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165 so that the engaging portion 165F and the engaging portion 164E are close to each other.

On the front surface of the front movable base 164, an upper left blade member 172, an upper right blade member 173, a lower left blade member 174, and a lower right blade member 175, which are long in the longitudinal direction, are attached. The upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 are located behind the decorative member 99 in the standby position and extend in the left-right direction in which the longitudinal direction is the first direction. Exists (see, for example, FIGS. 36 and 38).

Here, the state in which the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 are oriented in the first direction corresponds to the first position. Further, the longitudinal direction and the extending direction refer to the same direction, and the long extending direction in each member is the longitudinal direction and the extending direction.

As shown in FIG. 32, a tooth portion 172A is formed at the right end portion of the upper left blade member 172, and the tooth portion 172A is rotatably supported by a shaft portion 164G formed on the front surface of the front movable base 164. At the same time, it meshes with the rack teeth 165b of the blade movable rack 165.

A tooth portion 173A is formed at the left end portion of the upper right blade member 173, and the tooth portion 173A is rotatably supported by a shaft portion 164H formed on the front surface of the front movable base 164 and is supported by a blade movable rack. It meshes with the rack teeth 165a of 165.

A tooth portion 174A is formed at the right end portion of the lower left blade member 174, and the tooth portion 174A is rotatably supported by a shaft portion 164I formed on the front surface of the front movable base 164, and the blade movable rack. It meshes with 165 rack teeth 165d (see FIG. 33).

A tooth portion 175A is formed at the left end portion of the lower right blade member 175, and the tooth portion 175A is rotatably supported by a shaft portion 164J formed on the front surface of the front movable base 164, and the blade movable rack. It meshes with the rack teeth 165c of 165 (see FIG. 33).

In FIG. 33, an opening 164F is formed in the front movable base 164. An engaging protrusion 165G is formed on the back surface of the blade movable rack 165. As shown in FIG. 40, the engaging projection 165G projects rearward through the opening 164F and overlaps the engaging projection 163D in the vertical direction.

In the upper movable effect member 101A of the present embodiment, when the front movable base 164 moves downward relative to the rear movable base 163, the engaging projection 165G of the blade movable rack 165 of the rear movable base 163 Engage with the engagement projection 163D (see FIG. 47 (b)).

As a result, the blade movable rack 165 is restricted from moving further downward, and the front movable base 164 moves downward with respect to the blade movable rack 165 against the urging force of the coil spring 171 (FIG. 47 (FIG. 47). c) See).

When the front movable base 164 moves downward with respect to the blade movable rack 165, the tooth portions 172A and 173A that mesh with the rack teeth 165a and 165b rotate, respectively, as shown in FIG. 37. As a result, the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 swing and coalesce from the first horizontal direction to the vertical direction (second direction) orthogonal to the horizontal direction.

At the same time, as shown in FIG. 37, the tooth portions 174A and 175A that mesh with the rack teeth 165c and 165d rotate. As a result, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 swing and coalesce from the first horizontal direction to the vertical direction (second direction) orthogonal to the first direction. ..

In FIG. 37, magnets 197A and 197B are provided on the mating surfaces of the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175. Specifically, when the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are movable so as to face in the vertical direction, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are provided so as to face each other in the left-right direction. Magnets 197A and 197B are attracted to each other. As a result, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are brought close to each other by the magnets 197A and 197B and are attracted to each other to be united. The lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 may be close to each other without being united.

In the upper movable effect member 101A of the present embodiment, the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 are united so as to face in the vertical direction, and the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 face in the vertical direction. The position movable so as to be combined with the above corresponds to the movable position of the present invention (see FIG. 48). In the movable position, the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are in a relatively extended state from a relatively contracted state (standby state).
Here, the relatively contracted state means, in other words, the overlap between the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 becomes large, and the relatively extended state. This means that the overlap between the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 becomes small.

In FIGS. 27, 28 and 32, the front decoration 160 is fixed to the front movable base 164. In FIGS. 38 and 39, the front decoration 160 includes an illuminated substrate 160A having a plurality of LEDs 160a, and the illuminated substrate 160A controls light emission of the LEDs 160a. Further, the front surface of the front decoration 160 is composed of a lens, and the LED 160a emits light through the lens.

Illuminations substrates 181 to 184 are built in each of the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175. The illuminated substrates 181 to 184 each include a plurality of LEDs 181a to 184a, and the illuminated substrates 181 to 184 control the light emission of the LEDs 181a to 184a.

An illumination substrate 195 is built in the central blade member 170. The illumination substrate 195 includes a plurality of LEDs 195a, and controls light emission of these LEDs 195a.

The LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, and 195a are composed of, for example, RGB full-color LEDs and the like. The RGB full-color LED contains LEDs of the three primary colors of red, green, and blue in one package, and by appropriately combining these three primary colors, it is possible to light different colors. Here, the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, and 195a are included in the LED group 28 (see FIG. 6) controlled by the lamp control circuit 78.

In FIG. 31, a relay board 185 is attached to the back surface of the case 161. The relay board 185 transmits control signals to the illuminated boards 160A, 181 to 184, and 195 via the flexible cable 186. The relay board 185 relays the control signal transmitted from the lamp control circuit 78 (see FIG. 6) and transmits it to the illuminated boards 160A, 181 to 184, 195, and controls the light emission of the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, and 195a.

The front surface of the front decoration 160, the center blade member 170, the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 of the present embodiment is composed of a lens, and the LEDs 160a and 181a. When ~ 184a and 195a emit light, the front is clearly illuminated through the lens.

One end 186a of the flexible cable 186 is connected to the relay board 185. The other end 186b of the flexible cable 186 is attached to the front movable base 164 by being locked to the slit 164K described later of the front movable base 164.

In FIGS. 45 and 46, slits 162C, 162D, and 162E are formed vertically side by side on the fixed base 162. The flexible cable 186 extending forward from the case 161 is wired to the front surface of the fixed base 162 through the slit 162C and then to the back surface of the fixed base 162 through the slit 162D.

The flexible cable 186 wired on the back surface of the fixed base 162 is wired in front of the front movable base 164 through the slit 162E.

In FIG. 31, an opening 163a is formed in the upper part of the back surface of the rear movable base 163, and in FIG. 30, an opening 163b is formed in the lower part of the surface of the rear movable base 163.

When the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 are relatively contracted, the flexible cable 186 wired forward from the fixed base 162 is rearward through the opening 163a of the rear movable base 163. It is housed in the movable base 163, extends from the rear movable base 163 through the opening 163b to the front movable base 164, and is bent between the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164.

In FIG. 45, a slit 164K is formed in the front movable base 164, and the other end portion 186b of the flexible cable 186 bent between the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 is the rear movable base 163. It extends from below to above between the front movable bases 164 and is connected to the illuminated substrate 195 through the slit 164K.

In FIGS. 33, 45, and 46, a clip 199 is attached to the back surface of the front movable base 164, and the flexible cable 186 is locked to the slit 164K by the clip 199. The clip 199 is fixed to the front movable base 164 by a screw 199A (see FIG. 33) so as to cover the slit 164K. The clip 199 has a rib 199a projecting forward, and the rib 199a positions the flexible cable 186 by pressing the flexible cable 186 toward the illuminated substrate 195 side (see FIGS. 45 and 46).

The flexible cable 186 is configured to be locked to the slit 164K by the clip 199, but as a result of the locking, the part of the flexible cable 186 in contact with the clip 199 does not move at all, or the flexible cable 186 can move to some extent. And can be included.

Since positioning can be performed as an effect, if a crease or the like is formed on the flexible cable 186 so that the flexible cable 186 is in contact with the clip 199, even if the flexible cable 186 is moved, the crease will be in contact with the clip 199 and returned to the original position. A configuration that helps to return is also envisioned.

In FIGS. 45 and 46, the slits 162D and 162E arranged vertically in the fixed base 162 are formed with a short vertical interval, and the flexible cable 186 is locked to the slits 162D and 162E to form a fixed base. It is firmly locked to 162 and prevented from coming out of the fixed base 162. Here, the illuminated board 195 is connected to the illuminated boards 160A, 181 to 184 via a cable (not shown), and a control signal is transmitted to the illuminated boards 160A, 181 to 184 via the illuminated board 195. Illuminations.

In FIGS. 30, 45 and 46, a protruding portion 198 is provided on the front surface of the fixed base 162, and the protruding portion 198 extends from the surface of the fixed base 162 toward the rear movable base 163. ..

As shown in FIG. 45, in a state where the upper movable effect member 101A moves to the standby position and the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 are relatively contracted, the flexible cable 186 is the fixed base 162. It is bent and accommodated between the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164, and is bent by being pressed against the projecting portion 198.

That is, the flexible cable 186 is further bent by the projecting portion 198 in a state of being bent and accommodated between the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164.

In this way, the flexible cable 186 is locked to the fixed base 162 and the front movable base 164, is bent from the fixed base 162 by the rear movable base 163, and extends to the front movable base 164 for wiring. ..

When the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position and the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 are relatively extended, the flexible cable 186 has a slit at one end 186a of the fixed base 162. It is locked to 162D and 162E, and the other end 186b extends in a state of being locked to the slit 164K of the front movable base 164 by the clip 199.

In this way, the flexible cable 186 changes into an extended state and a bent state starting from the slits 162D and 162E of the fixed base 162 and the slit 164K of the front movable base 164.

In FIGS. 30, 31, and 46, the slits 162C, 162D, 162E of the fixed base 162 and the openings 163a and 163b of the rear movable base 163 are the rack 162A provided in the central portion in the width direction of the rear movable base 163. Is formed on the opposite side of the gears 169A to 169E.

That is, in the rear movable base 163, the gears 169A to 169E are installed on the right side of the rack 162A at the center of the rear movable base 163 in the width direction, and the flexible cable 186 is movable on the rear side. It is wired to the left side of the base 163 with the central portion in the width direction in between.

In FIG. 31, guide grooves 187 and 188 are formed on the back surface of the case 161, and the guide grooves 188 extend in a direction (vertical direction) orthogonal to the extending direction (horizontal direction) of the guide groove 187. is doing. A flexible cable 186 is fitted in the guide grooves 187 and 188, and the flexible cable 186 is wired from the relay board 185 along the guide grooves 187 and 188 and extends forward from the case 161.

The guide groove 187 has a bottom surface 187c that inclines downward from one end 187a in the extending direction located at the connection position between the relay board 185 and the flexible cable 186 toward the other end 187b in the extending direction communicating with the guide groove 188. Have.

The flexible cable 186 is folded back and extends vertically to fit the guide groove 188 at a position where the other end 187b in the extending direction of the guide groove 187 and the one end 188a in the extending direction of the guide groove 188 communicate with each other. Will be done. The flexible cable 186 is fastened to the case 161 by a fastening member 189 at a position where the other end 187b in the extending direction of the guide groove 187 and the one end 188a in the extending direction of the guide groove 188 communicate with each other.

The guide groove 188 has a bottom surface 188c that is inclined from one end 188a in the extending direction toward the other end 188b in the extending direction.

In FIG. 33, a protrusion 164M is provided on the left side portion of the front movable base 164 on the back surface of the front movable base 164. The protrusion 164M extends in the vertical direction of the front movable base 164 facing the protrusion 164A in the left-right direction of the game board 1, and protrudes rearward from the front movable base 164.

Rack teeth 164a are formed on the inner surface of the protrusion 164A facing the protrusion 164M. Ribs 164s and 164t are formed on the protrusions 164M and 164A, respectively. The ribs 164s and 164t are bent left and right outward from the rear ends of the protrusions 164M and 164A, respectively.

In FIGS. 30, 31, 41, and 43, guide grooves 163F and 163G are provided on both left and right sides of the rear movable base 163, and the guide grooves 163F and 163G are provided in the longitudinal direction of the rear movable base 163. It is extended to. The ribs 164s and 164t (see FIG. 33) of the protrusions 164A and 164M are slidably fitted to the guide grooves 163F and 163G, and the front movable base 164 is movable rearward along the guide grooves 163F and 163G. It moves up and down with respect to the base 163.

In FIG. 30, a guide surface 163v is formed on the front surface of the left side portion of the rear movable base 163. In FIGS. 32 and 33, a guide surface 164v is formed on the back surface of the front movable base 164 on the left outer side of the protrusion 164M of the front movable base 164.

In FIG. 41, the guide surface 163v faces the guide surface 164v in the front-rear direction, and the protrusion 164M moves vertically with respect to the rear movable base 163 along the guide groove 163F and the guide surface 163v. ..

In FIG. 30, a guide surface 163w is formed on the front surface of the right side portion of the rear movable base 163. In FIGS. 32 and 33, a guide surface 164w is formed on the back surface of the front movable base 164 on the right outer side of the protruding portion 164A of the front movable base 164.

In FIGS. 43 and 44, the guide surface 163w faces the guide surface 164w in the front-rear direction, and the protrusion 164A is vertically oriented with respect to the rear movable base 163 along the guide groove 163G and the guide surface 163w. Move relative to each other.

That is, the upper movable effect member 101A of the present embodiment has guide grooves 163F, 163G and guide surfaces 163v, 163w extending along the longitudinal direction in the side portion of the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 has. , Extends along the longitudinal direction and includes protrusions 164A, 164M having ribs 164s, 164t and guide surfaces 164v, 164w that movably support the guide grooves 163F, 163G and the guide surfaces 163v, 163w.

In FIGS. 41 and 43, guide protrusions 190 and 191 are provided on the guide surfaces 164v and 164w on the back surface of the front movable base 164, respectively. The guide protrusions 190 and 191 are provided on the upper end side of the front movable base 164 with respect to the central portion in the vertical direction, and project from the guide surfaces 164v and 164w toward the rear movable base 163.

The guide protrusions 190 and 191 have inclined surfaces 190a and 191a and vertical surfaces 190b and 191b extending above the inclined surfaces 190a and 191a and extending in the vertical direction. The inclined surfaces 190a and 191a are sloped uphill from the central portion in the extending direction of the front movable base 164 toward the upper end portion (corresponding to the end portion of the present invention).

As a result, the amount of protrusion of the guide protrusions 190 and 191 from the guide surfaces 164v and 164w increases toward the upper end portion of the front movable base 164 in the extending direction on the inclined surfaces 190a and 191a. Therefore, the amount of protrusion of the vertical planes 190b and 191b is the same as the maximum amount of protrusion of the inclined surfaces 190a and 191a, and the amount of protrusion is the same up to the upper end.

Lower stoppers 163x and 163y are provided at the ends of the guide surfaces 163v and 163w on both left and right sides of the rear movable base 163, respectively. The lower stoppers 163x and 163y are provided at the lower end of the rear movable base 163 and project from the guide surfaces 163v and 163w toward the front movable base 164.

As a result, in a state where the upper movable effect member 101A moves to the movable position and the end portion of the rear movable base 163 and the end portion of the front movable base 164 overlap, the vertical surfaces 190b and 191b of the guide protrusions 190 and 191 When the lower stoppers 163x and 163y face each other, the gap between the vertical faces 190b and 191b and the lower stoppers 163x and 163y is the rear movable base 163 excluding the vertical faces 190b and 191b and the lower stoppers 163x and 163y. It is smaller than the gap between the guide surfaces 163v and 163w and the guide surfaces 164v and 164w of the front movable base 164.

That is, as the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position on the guide surfaces 164v and 164w facing the lower stoppers 163x and 163y of the present embodiment, the distance between the guide surfaces 164v and 164w. The inclined surfaces 190a and 191a are provided so that the separation distance is gradually narrowed.

The guide surfaces 163v and 163w of the present embodiment constitute the first guide portion of the present invention. The guide surfaces 164v and 164w constitute the second guide portion of the present invention, and the inclined surfaces 190a and 191a of the present invention are formed on the guide surfaces 164w and 164v. Further, the lower stoppers 163x and 163y constitute the protruding portion of the present invention.

Here, the guide portion is, in the present embodiment, a rail (passage, gutter, etc.) for guiding the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164, but is not limited to this, and is in contact with or close to the guide portion. If there is an effect of limiting the moving direction of the member, it can be expressed as a guide. Further, it is possible to prevent the tilt caused by the gears 169A to 169E, which are drive systems, being biased to one side in the left-right direction by the guide portion.

Upper stoppers 190z and 191z are provided at the upper ends of the guide surfaces 164v and 164w. The upper stoppers 190z and 191z project from the guide surface 164v and 164w to the rear movable base 163.

The upper stoppers 190z and 191z engage with the lower stoppers 163x and 163y when the front movable base 164 moves downward with respect to the rear movable base 163, whereby the front movable base 164 becomes the rear movable base 163. Prevents excessive movement.

Here, the case 161 of the present embodiment constitutes the main body member of the present invention, and the fixed base 162 constitutes the main body member and the fixed base of the present invention. The rear movable base 163 constitutes the main body member of the present invention and the first movable base. The rack teeth 162a of the fixed base 162 constitute the first uneven portion of the present invention, and the rack 162A constitutes the first rack of the present invention. The gear 169A constitutes the first gear of the present invention, and the gears 169B to 169E constitute the second gear of the present invention. Further, the rack 162A, the gears 169A to 169E, and the protrusion 164A constitute the moving mechanism of the present invention.

The front movable base 164 constitutes the main body member and the second movable base of the present invention, and the engaging protrusion 163D constitutes the first engaging portion of the present invention. The rack teeth 164a constitute the second uneven portion of the present invention, and the protruding portion 164A constitutes the second rack of the present invention.

The blade movable rack 165 constitutes the third movable base of the present invention, and the engaging protrusion 165G constitutes the second engaging portion of the present invention. The upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 constitute the movable member of the present invention.

The flexible cable 186 constitutes the wiring of the present invention, and the LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, 195a constitute the light emitting member of the present invention. The coil spring 171 constitutes the urging member of the present invention. The relay board 185 constitutes the wiring board of the present invention, and the magnets 197A and 197B constitute the suction member of the present invention.

Next, the operation of the upper movable effect member 101A will be described.
When the upper movable effect member 101A is in the standby position, as shown in FIGS. 34 and 47 (a), the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 are in a relatively contracted state. It has become. In this state, the upper movable effect member 101A is located behind the decorative member 99 (see FIGS. 3 and 48).

When the upper movable effect member 101A is in the standby position, a control signal is transmitted from the lamp control circuit 78 to the relay board 185 (see FIG. 31). The relay board 185 is an illuminated board 160A, 181 to 184, 195 via a flexible cable 186 based on this control signal.
A control signal is transmitted to (see FIG. 39).

The illuminated boards 160A, 181 to 184, 195 have LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, 195a based on the control signal transmitted from the relay board 185 in a state where the upper movable effect member 101A is located at the standby position. By controlling the light emission, the color of the decorative member 99 visually recognized from the front is changed, and when the upper movable effect member 101A is positioned from the standby position to the movable position, the decorative member 99 is visually recognized from the front of the decorative member 99. As the color changes, the emission color of the upper movable effect member 101A becomes easy to see.

The LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, and 195a emit light in the same color as the front decoration 160, for example, if the front decoration 160 is blue, it emits blue light. As a result, the decorative member 99 emits light in blue.

When the front decoration 160 is colored, the color of the front decoration 160 is from the front of the gaming machine (from the player side) even if the LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, and 195a emit white light. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the emission color of the upper movable effect member 101A.

If the upper movable effect member 101A moves downward in such a state, the player's line of sight follows the upper movable effect member 101A, and the player's interest is gathered in the upper movable effect member 101A and the liquid crystal display behind. ..

On the other hand, the front decoration 160 becomes darker (or returns to the original color by losing the light emitter) due to the disappearance of the light emitter of the upper movable effect member 101A at the rear, and the color change and brightness. By creating the change of the above, even the interests that were in the front decoration 160 will be gathered in the upper movable production member 101A.

By providing such an effect mode, it is possible to perform an effective effect by the upper movable effect member 101A and the front decoration 160. In particular, when the front decoration 160 is, for example, blue, the upper movable effect member 101A emits light in red, for example, to make the front decoration 160 look purple, or the blue color of the front decoration 160 is the material. If it only looks blue depending on the thickness, if the upper movable effect member 101A emits red light, the front decoration 160 is also visually recognized in red.

In any case, when the upper movable effect member 101A is movable, the front decoration 160 loses the light emitting body, so that the visibility is changed, while the light emitting mode of the upper movable effect member 101A becomes easy to see. It is thought that the interest of the person will improve.

When the LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, and 195a are not emitting light, the LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, and 195a emit white light even if the color for visually recognizing the front decoration 160 is blue. By doing so, the front decoration 160 may be made to appear white.

In order to move the upper movable effect member 101A from the standby position to the movable position, first, as shown in FIG. 34, the motor 166 is rotated in one direction (forward rotation) from the standby position. When the motor 166 rotates in one direction, the rotation is transmitted from the motor gear 166A to the gears 167A and 167B, and the protrusion 167b provided on the gear 167B moves along the extending direction of the slit 168B of the arm member 168.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 35, the arm member 168 swings downward along the guide rail 161A of the case 161 with the swing shaft 168A as a fulcrum. At this time, the fitting projection 163A of the rear movable base 163 fitted to the slit 168C of the arm member 168 is pressed downward, the rear movable base 163 moves downward with respect to the fixed base 162, and the fixed base 162 And the rear movable base 163 are relatively extended.

When the rear movable base 163 moves downward, the gear 169A meshing with the rack teeth 162a rotates but moves downward together with the rear movable base 163. As a result, the rotation of the gear 169A is transmitted to the gear 169E via the gears 169B, 169C, and 169D, and the gear 169E moves downward together with the rear movable base 163 while rotating.

Since the gear 169E meshes with the rack teeth 164a of the front movable base 164, when the gear 169E moves downward together with the rear movable base 163 while rotating, the front movable base 164 moves downward with respect to the rear movable base 163. Move to. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 46, the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are in a relatively extended state.

FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the movement of the front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165 in an easy-to-understand manner, and the movement of the front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165 with the rear movable base 163 fixed. Is drawn.

When the front movable base 164 moves downward as the rear movable base 163 moves downward, the front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165 move downward as a unit, and move downward to the lower part of the rear movable base 163. The engaging projection 165G of the blade movable rack 165 engages with the formed engaging projection 163D (see FIG. 47 (b)).

When the engaging projection 165G of the blade movable rack 165 engages with the engaging projection 163D, the blade movable rack 165 is restricted from moving downward, and only the front movable base 164 is downward with respect to the rear movable base 163. Move (see FIG. 47 (c)).

When the front movable base 164 moves downward with respect to the rear movable base 163, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 37, the tooth portions 172A and 173A that mesh with the rack teeth 165a and 165b rotate, respectively, and the upper left blade member. The 172 and the upper right blade member 173 swing and unite so as to face in the vertical direction from the state in which the blade member 173 faces in the horizontal direction.

At the same time, the tooth portions 174A and 175A that mesh with the rack teeth 165c and 165d rotate, and the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 swing from the horizontally oriented state to the vertically oriented state. And unite.

Since magnets 197A and 197B are provided on the mating surfaces of the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175, when the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are united in the vertical direction, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are combined. The blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are attracted by magnets 197A and 197B.

When the front movable base 164 moves downward with respect to the blade movable rack 165 from the state shown in FIG. 47 (b), the upper end of the inner circumference of the opening 164F of the front movable base 164 hits the engaging projection 165G of the blade movable rack 165. By contacting, the front movable base 164 is restricted from moving downward with respect to the blade movable rack 165. At this time, a gap is formed between the lower end of the inner circumference of the opening 164F of the front movable base 164 and the engaging protrusion 165G.

When the front movable base 164 moves downward with respect to the blade movable rack 165 in this way, the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 and the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are oriented in the horizontal direction. Simultaneously swing from the state so as to face up and down to unite.

Further, when the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 are moved to a relatively extended state, as shown in FIG. 46, the slits 162D and 162E of the fixed base 162 and the slits 164K of the front movable base 164K. The flexible cable 186 extends from the starting point. As a result, the control signal is stably transmitted from the flexible cable 186 to the illuminated boards 160A, 181 to 184, and 195.

In this way, the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are movable from a relatively contracted state to a relatively extended state, and the upper movable effect member 101A is moved from the standby position to the movable position (FIG. 48). The operation to move to (see) is completed.

Further, when the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 are relatively extended, and the front movable base 164 is shown in FIGS. 42 and 44. As such, the ribs 164s, 164t and the guide surfaces 164v, 164w of the protrusions 164A and 164M are supported by the guide grooves 163F, 163G and the guide surfaces 163v, 163w of the rear movable base 163 and move downward.

In the process of moving the front movable base 164 downward with respect to the rear movable base 163, that is, in the process of moving from the standby state shown in FIGS. 41 and 43 to the movable position shown in FIGS. 42 and 44, the front movable base 164 After the inclined surfaces 190a and 191a of the guide protrusions 190 and 191 pass through the lower stoppers 163x and 163y of the rear movable base 163, the vertical faces 190b and 191b are in a state of facing the lower stoppers 163x and 163y.

Therefore, in a state where the upper movable effect member 101A moves to the movable position and the end of the rear movable base 163 and the end of the front movable base 164 overlap, the vertical faces 190b and 191b of the guide protrusions 190 and 191 The lower stoppers 163x and 163y face each other, and the gap between the vertical faces 190b and 191b and the lower stoppers 163x and 163y is a guide for the rear movable base 163 excluding the vertical faces 190b and 191b and the lower stoppers 163x and 163y. It is smaller than the gap between the surfaces 163v and 163w and the guide surfaces 164v and 164w of the front movable base 164.

When the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position in this way, a control signal is transmitted from the relay board 185 to the illuminated boards 160A, 181 to 184, 195 via the flexible cable 186. The illuminated boards 160A, 181 to 184, 195 have LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, which are different in color from the color when the decorative member 99 emits light when the decorative member 99 is located at the standby position based on this control signal. It emits light of 195.

When the LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, and 195a are controlled to emit light, the upper movable effect member 101A may continuously emit light in any color until it moves from the standby position to the movable position. , When the upper movable effect member 101A moves to the movable position, it may emit light in any color. However, it is preferable to emit light in different colors in the standby position and the movable position.

Next, when the upper movable effect member 101A is moved from the movable position shown in FIGS. 37 and 39 to the standby position, the motor 166 is rotated in the other direction (reverse rotation) in FIGS. 30 and 35. When the motor 166 rotates in the other direction, the rotation is transmitted from the motor gear 166A to the gears 167A and 167B, and the protrusion 167b moves along the extending direction of the slit 168B of the arm member 168.

As a result, the arm member 168 is guided upward by the guide rail 161A of the case 161 with the swing shaft 168A as a fulcrum. At this time, the fitting projection 163A of the rear movable base 163 fitted in the slit 168C of the arm member 168 is pressed upward, so that the rear movable base 163 moves upward with respect to the fixed base 162.

When the rear movable base 163 moves upward, the gear 169A meshing with the rack teeth 162a rotates but moves upward together with the rear movable base 163. As a result, the rotation of the gear 169A is transmitted to the gear 169E via the gears 169B, 169C, and 169D, and the gear 169E moves upward together with the rear movable base 163 while rotating.

Since the gear 169E meshes with the rack teeth 164a of the front movable base 164, when the gear 169E moves upward together with the rear movable base 163 while rotating, the front movable base 164 moves upward with respect to the rear movable base 163. Move to. When the front movable base 164 moves upward with respect to the rear movable base 163, the front movable base 164 and the rear movable base 163 move upward so as to be relatively contracted.

When the front movable base 164 moves upward from the state shown in FIG. 47 (c), the front movable base 164 moves upward by the gap between the lower end of the inner circumference of the opening 164F and the engaging protrusion 165G. As a result, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), the front movable base 164 moves upward with respect to the blade movable rack 165.

Further, the front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165 are connected by a coil spring 171. The coil spring 171 is connected to the front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165 so that the engaging portion 165F and the engaging portion 164E are close to each other. Is urging.

As a result, when the front movable base 164 moves upward by the amount of the gap between the inner peripheral lower end of the opening 164F and the engaging protrusion 165G, the front movable base 164 is assisted by the urging force of the coil spring 171 and the front movable base 164 is a blade. Moves quickly upwards with respect to the movable rack 165.

When the front movable base 164 moves upward with respect to the blade movable rack 165, the tooth portions 172A and 173A that mesh with the rack teeth 165a and 165b rotate, respectively, as shown in FIG. 36. As a result, as shown in FIG. 36, the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 swing from the vertically oriented state to the horizontal direction to release the union.

At the same time, the tooth portions 174A and 175A that mesh with the rack teeth 165c and 165d rotate. As a result, as shown in FIG. 36, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 swing from the vertically oriented state to the horizontal direction to release the union.

That is, when the blade movable rack 165 moves upward, the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 and the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are simultaneously oriented horizontally from the vertically oriented state. It swings to release the union.

When the front movable base 164 moves further upward together with the rear movable base 163 while the gear 169E rotates, the front movable base 164 moves relatively upward with respect to the rear movable base 163.

At this time, the front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165 are integrally moved upward with respect to the rear movable base 163, and as shown in FIG. 47 (a), the engaging projection 165G of the blade movable rack 165 is rearward. Separated upward from the engaging projection 163D of the side movable base 163.

When the motor 166 is driven to the initial position and the arm member 168 swings to the upper end of the guide rail 161A of the case 161, the driving of the motor 166 is stopped. At this time, FIG. 47
As shown in (a), the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are in a relatively contracted state.

Further, when the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are in a relatively contracted state, as shown in FIG. 45, the flexible cable 186 has the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 163. It is bent and accommodated between the bases 164, and is pressed against the projecting portion 198 to be in a bent state.

An opening 163a is formed in the upper part of the back surface of the rear movable base 163 of the present embodiment, and an opening 163b is formed in the lower part of the front surface of the rear movable base 163. It is housed in the rear movable base 163 through the opening 163a of the rear movable base 163, and extends from the rear movable base 163 to the front movable base 164 through the opening 163b.

This makes it possible to easily wire the flexible cable 186 from the fixed base 162 to the front movable base 164 through the rear movable base 163.

In this way, the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are movable from a relatively extended state to a relatively contracted state, so that the upper movable effect member 101A is moved from the movable position to the standby position. Complete the move operation (see Figure 3).

In the process of moving the front movable base 164 upward with respect to the rear movable base 163, that is, in the process of moving from the deployed state shown in FIGS. 42 and 44 to the standby position shown in FIGS. 41 and 43, the rear movable base The lower stoppers 163x and 163y of 163 face the guide surfaces 164v and 164w after passing through the inclined surfaces 190a and 191 from the vertical surfaces 190b and 191b of the guide protrusions 190 and 191 of the front movable base 164.

Since the gap between the guide surface 164v and 164w and the lower stoppers 163x and 163y is larger than the gap between the lower stoppers 163x and 163y and the guide protrusions 190 and 191, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 are relative to each other. The rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 can be smoothly moved when moving so as to contract.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment, the upper movable effect member 101A moves relative to the rear movable base 163 provided so as to be movable with respect to the game board 1 and the rear movable base 163. It is freely provided on the front movable base 164 and the rear movable base 163 that swingably support the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175. The engagement protrusion 163D and the front movable base 164 are slidably provided, and by moving with respect to the front movable base 164, the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right A blade movable rack 165 that swings the blade member 175 to a first position extending in the first horizontal direction and a second position extending in the second direction facing the vertical direction, and a blade movable It is provided with an engaging projection 165G provided on the rack 165 and capable of engaging with the engaging projection 163D, and a coil spring 171 having one end attached to the front movable base 164 and the other end attached to the blade movable rack 165. ing.

When the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 move so as to be relatively extended, and the engaging projection 165G has the engaging projection 163D. By engaging with, the blade movable rack 165 is slid to move the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 from the first position to the second position. When swinging and moving from the movable position to the standby position, the coil spring 171 causes the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 to move from the second position to the second position. The blade movable rack 165 is urged so as to swing to the position of 1.

As a result, when the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 are moved so as to be relatively extended, and the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right. The lower blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 can be swung from the first position to the second position. As a result, the effectability of the upper movable effect member 101A can be enhanced.

When the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the movable position to the standby position, the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 are seconded by the coil spring 171. Since the blade movable rack 165 is urged so as to swing from the position of 1 to the first position, the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 are seconded. It is possible to quickly return from the position to the first position. This makes it possible to more effectively improve the color rendering of the upper movable effect member 101A.

In particular, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the upper movable effect member 101A is fixed to the rear cover 1A, and the case 161 has the rack 162A on which the rack teeth 162a continuous in the longitudinal direction are formed, and the case 161. Rear movable base 163 having gears 169A movably provided and meshing with rack teeth 162a, gears 169B to 169E to which power is transmitted from gears 169A, and engaging protrusions 163D, and rear movable base 163 are relatively movable. A front movable base 164 having a protrusion 164A formed with rack teeth 164a that are freely provided and continuously mesh with the gear 169E in the longitudinal direction, and a front movable base 164 that are movably provided and are engaged with an engaging protrusion 163D. The first position and the longitudinal direction, which are provided on the blade movable rack 165 on which the adjustable engaging protrusion 165G is formed and the front movable base 164 and whose longitudinal direction is horizontally oriented with the movement of the blade movable rack 165, are It includes an upper left blade member 172, an upper right blade member 173, a lower left blade member 174, and a lower right blade member 175 that can swing to a second position facing in the vertical direction.

In addition to this, the upper movable effect member 101A has a fixed base 162, a rear movable base 163, and a front movable base 164, and the guide surfaces 163v and 163w of the rear movable base 163 have the upper movable effect member 101A. Lower stoppers 163x and 163y are provided, and inclined surfaces 190a and 191a are formed on the guide surfaces 164v and 164w of the front movable base 164. The inclined surfaces 190a and 191a are between the lower stoppers 163x and 163y and the guide surfaces 164v and 164w facing the lower stoppers 163x and 163y as the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position. It is inclined so that the separation distance, which is the distance, gradually narrows.

When the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, the upper movable base member 101A and the end portion of the rear movable base 163 in the extending direction so that the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 extend relatively to each other. The blade movable rack 165 has the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, and the lower left by engaging the engaging projection 165G with the engaging projection 163D while overlapping with the end portion of the front movable base 164 in the extending direction. The part blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are swung from the first position to the second position.

As a result, when the upper movable effect member 101A moves to the movable position, the separation distance between the lower stoppers 163x and 163y and the guide surfaces 164v and 164w facing the lower stoppers 163x and 163y is the narrowest. By moving the movable effect member 101A from the standby position to the movable position, the overlap between the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 is small (the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are formed. (Relatively extended state), when the ends of the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 overlap in a short length, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 should be firmly connected. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent rattling when the upper movable effect member 101A is moved to the movable position.

Further, when the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, the lower stoppers 163x and 163y of the rear movable base 163 can be moved along the guide surfaces 164v and 164w of the front movable base 164. .. As a result, the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 have a small overlap and a large overlap (fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are relatively contracted). As a result, the upper movable effect member 101A can be smoothly moved.

In addition to the narrowest separation distance between the lower stoppers 163x, 163y and the guide surfaces 164v, 164w facing the lower stoppers 163x, 163y, the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, and the lower left blade member Since the 174 and the lower right blade member 175 swing from the first position to the second position, the effectability of the movable accessory can be improved more effectively.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 are provided with lower stoppers 163x and 163y and upper stoppers 190z and 191z, which face the lower stoppers 163x and 163y. The guide surface 164v, 164w of the front movable base 164 is configured to be provided, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, one of the movable bases (or guides, etc.) is provided with a protrusion (projection, etc.), and there is an inclined surface facing the protrusion, and the inclined surface reduces the distance between the protrusion and the inclined surface according to the movement of the movable base. It is possible to change it, and even if the movable base moves, it is sufficient if the movement of the movable base can be stabilized by the protrusion and the inclined surface. Each configuration is not limited, such as the number and arrangement of the above.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a decorative member 99 provided on the game board 1 so as to be located in front of the upper movable effect member 101A, and the upper movable effect member 101A has a long upper left in the longitudinal direction. It is provided on the lower blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175, and the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175. It is equipped with LEDs 181 to 184.

In addition to this, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 are located behind the decorative member 99 in the standby position. The longitudinal direction extends in the horizontal direction and extends in the first direction, and the LEDs 181a to 184a are configured to emit light toward the decorative member 99, and the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position. When moved, they move and coalesce in a second direction whose longitudinal direction is orthogonal to the first direction. This makes it possible to more effectively enhance the effectability of the upper movable effect member 101A.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 have magnets 197A and 197B, and the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are in the second direction. When it is movable, it faces in the left-right direction and is attracted by magnets 197A and 197B.

As a result, the state in which the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are united can be stably maintained. Therefore, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175, and the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 that move integrally with the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175, and the like occur. This can be prevented and the effect of the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 can be more effectively enhanced.

The magnets 197A and 197B may be attached to the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 instead of the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175, and the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 172. It may be attached to 173, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is attached to the gaming board 1 so as to be located in front of the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a provided on the upper movable effect member 101A and the upper movable effect member 101A located at the standby position. The LED 160a, 181a to 184a, and 195a are provided from a full-color LED capable of emitting different colors when the upper movable effect member 101A is located at the standby position and the movable position. It is configured.

As a result, it is not necessary to provide the decorative member 99 with a light emitting member such as an LED, and the decorative member 99 can be made to emit light by the upper movable effect member 101A. Therefore, the configuration of the decorative member 99 can be simplified and the manufacturing cost of the decorative member 99 can be reduced. In addition to this, the upper movable effect member 101A can produce various colors, and the upper movable effect member 101A can improve the effect.

Further, when the upper movable effect member 101A during light emission moves from the standby position to the movable position, the decorative member 99 does not emit light as the upper movable effect member 101A moves. At this time, by moving the upper movable effect member 101A downward while emitting light, it is possible to draw attention to the upper movable effect member 101A that moves downward while emitting light from the player's line of sight. As a result, the effect of the upper movable effect member 101A can be emphasized.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, and 195a emit light in the same color as the decorative member 99 while the upper movable effect member 101A is on standby, so that the color of the decorative member 99 is emitted. Can be emphasized, and the effectability of the upper movable effect member 101A can be improved more effectively.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a flexible cable 186 connected to the illuminated boards 160A, 181 to 184, and 195 of the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, and 195a, and the flexible cable 186 is movable on the front side with the fixed base 162. By being locked to the base 164, it is bent from the fixed base 162 by the rear movable base 163 and extended to the front movable base 164 for wiring.

As a result, when the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 move to the relatively extended position and the relatively contracted position, the flexible cable 186 is relative to the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164. The flexible cable 186 can be smoothly moved while preventing it from floating.

In addition to this, gears 169A-169E are installed on the left side of the rear movable base 163 with the width direction center axis on one side, and the flexible cable 186 is installed on the width direction center axis of the rear movable base 163. It is located on the right side of the other side.

This makes it possible to move the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 to a relatively extended position and a relatively contracted position while preventing the flexible cable 186 from interfering with the gears 169A to 169E. can. As a result, the flexible cable 186 can be moved more effectively and smoothly.

In particular, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the fixed base 162 is provided with a protruding portion 198, and when the upper movable effect member 101A is in the standby position, the flexible cable 186 is attached to the fixed base 162 and the rear side. It is bent and accommodated between the movable base 163 and between the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164, and is bent by being pressed against the protruding portion 198.

As a result, the flexible cable 186 bent and accommodated in the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 can be further bent by the protruding portion 198.

Therefore, the length of the flexible cable 186 accommodated in the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 is increased to increase the length of the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 and the flexible cable 186. The flexible cable 186 can be prevented from fluttering inside the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164, and the flexible cable 186 can be made of the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base. It can be stably accommodated in the base 164.

Further, by further bending the flexible cable 186 by the protruding portion 198, it is possible to generate a restoring force that tries to return the flexible cable 186 from the bent state. Therefore, the frictional force generated between the flexible cable 186 and the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 can be increased. This can more effectively prevent the flexible cable 186 from fluttering inside the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164, and the flexible cable 186 can be more effectively prevented from fluttering inside the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164. The base 164 allows for more stable accommodation.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the upper movable effect member 101A includes a case 161, a flexible cable 186 provided in the case 161 and a relay board 185 connected to the flexible cable 186.
The case 161 includes a guide groove 187 into which the flexible cable 186 is fitted, and a guide groove 188 extending in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the guide groove 187 and into which the flexible cable 186 is fitted. There is. The guide groove 187 and the guide groove 188 are formed in an L shape and communicate with each other.

The guide groove 187 has a bottom surface 187c that inclines downward from one end 187a in the extending direction located at the connection position between the relay board 185 and the flexible cable 186 toward the other end 187b in the extending direction communicating with the guide groove 188. The flexible cable 186 is fastened to the case 161 by a fastening member 189 at a position where the other end portion 187b in the extending direction of the guide groove 187 and the one end portion 188a in the extending direction of the guide groove 188 communicate with each other. ..

As a result, the flexible cable 186 fitted in the guide groove 187 can be extended to the guide groove 188 along the inclined bottom surface 187c of the guide groove 187. Therefore, it is more flexible than the case where the one end portion 187a in the extending direction of the guide groove 187 located at the connection position between the flexible cable 186 and the relay board 185 is steeply inclined (for example, a step having an inclination of 90 °). It is possible to prevent the cable 186 from bending. Therefore, it is possible to protect the flexible cable 186 by preventing a load from being applied to the connection position between the flexible cable 186 and the relay board 185.

Further, the flexible cable 186 is fastened to the case 161 by the fastening member 189 at a position where the other end portion 187b in the extending direction of the guide groove 187 and the one end portion 188a in the extending direction of the guide groove 188 communicate with each other. It is possible to prevent the flexible cable 186 from fluttering at a bent position where the guide groove 187 and the guide groove 188 communicate with each other.

The bottom surface 187c of the guide groove 187 is upward from one end 187a in the extending direction located at the connection position between the relay board 185 and the flexible cable 186 toward the other end 187b in the extending direction communicating with the guide groove 188. May be tilted to.

Here, the combination can mean the completion, appearance, driving of a gimmick, etc. for the player by forming a specific design by contacting, approaching, and interlocking the game members. It indicates that the production etc. is executed.

In particular, when an effect involving such coalescence is performed, it may indicate that a big hit is notified or that the expectation of the big hit (probability or reliability of a big hit when the corresponding effect is executed) is high. It is conceivable that the appearance of a specific design will have the effect of improving the player's interest in the gaming machine and the expectation of the game itself.

The usage is not limited to this, but pseudo-ren, reach, special role, small hit, BB, RB, reel lock, pseudo-bonus, RT (replay time), AT (assist time), ART (assist time). It is expected to be used for various notifications such as replay time), CT (chance time), and CZ (chance zone).

In addition, this embodiment can be used in a pachislot machine, a pachinko machine, an enclosed game machine, etc., and as a game medium, in addition to a ball and a medal, the number of game media on the data (ball possession, ball ejection, ball rental) , Number of balls stored, credits, number of throws, number of shots, number of payouts, number of foul balls, etc.) and various game media are assumed. It can also be applied to a gaming machine in which the number of gaming media on the data increases or decreases. It should be noted that the possessed ball, the thrown ball, the rented ball, and the stored ball can be applied to various game media such as a ball and a medal. Further, the number of outs of the gaming machine may be counted by using an outbox or other peripheral devices.

<Structure and operation of left movable effect member 271 and right side movable effect member 272>
As shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a left movable effect member 271 and a right side movable effect member 272. The left movable effect member 271 and the right side movable effect member 272 are provided on both the left and right sides of the game board 1 with the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 interposed therebetween.

As shown in FIG. 121, the left movable effect member 271 includes an upper cover 273 fixed to the rear of the game board 1, and the left sword member 274 can swing freely on the swing shaft 273A of the upper cover 273. It is installed.

The left sword member 274 is a member that imitates a sword extending in the vertical direction. An arm portion 275 is integrally provided on the upper portion of the left sword member 274, and a slit 275A extending in the left-right direction is formed in the arm portion 275.

A motor 276 is attached to the upper cover 273, and a motor gear 276A is provided on the shaft of the motor 276. Gears 277A, 277B, and 277C are rotatably provided on the upper cover 273, and the gear 277A meshes with the motor gear 276A. The motor gear 277C is integrally provided with a fitting protrusion 277c, and the fitting protrusion 277c is slidably fitted to the slit 275A.

The right side movable effect member 272 includes a lower cover 278 fixed behind the game board 1, and a right sword member 279 is swingably attached to the swing shaft 278A of the lower cover 278.

The right sword member 279 is a member that imitates a sword extending in the vertical direction. An arm portion 280 is integrally provided at the lower portion of the right sword member 279, and a slit 280A extending in the left-right direction is formed in the arm portion 280.

A motor 281 is attached to the lower cover 278, and a motor gear 281A is provided on the shaft of the motor 281. Gears 282A and 282B are rotatably provided on the lower cover 278, and the gear 282A meshes with the motor gear 281A.
The motor gear 282B is integrally provided with a fitting protrusion 282b, and the fitting protrusion 282b is slidably fitted to the slit 280A.

Next, the operation of the left movable effect member 271 and the right side movable effect member 272 will be described.
In the state where the left movable effect member 271 is located in the standby position (the state shown in FIG. 3), the left sword member 274 is extended in the vertical direction. When the motor 276 rotates forward in the clockwise rotation direction from the state where the left movable effect member 271 is in the standby position, the rotation of the motor gear 276A is transmitted to the gear 277C via the gears 277A and 277B, and the gear 277C rotates in the counterclockwise rotation direction. Rotate to. When the gear 277C rotates in the counterclockwise rotation direction, the fitting projection 277c moves in the circumferential direction of the gear 277C along the slit 275A.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 122, the left sword member 274 swings in the counterclockwise rotation direction from the standby position and moves to the obliquely inclined deployment position in the display area 4A.

On the other hand, in the state where the right movable effect member 272 is located in the standby position (the state shown in FIG. 3), the right sword member 279 is extended in the vertical direction. When the motor 281 rotates forward in the counterclockwise rotation direction from the state where the right side movable effect member 272 is located in the standby position, the rotation of the motor gear 281A is transmitted to the gear 282B via the gear 282A, and the gear 282B rotates in the counterclockwise rotation direction. Rotate. When the gear 282B rotates in the counterclockwise rotation direction, the fitting projection 282b moves in the circumferential direction of the gear 282B along the slit 280A.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 122, the right sword member 279 swings in the counterclockwise rotation direction from the standby position and moves to the obliquely inclined deployment position in the display area 4A. The left movable effect member 271 and the right side movable effect member 272 move from the standby position to the unfolded position at the same time, and are connected in an oblique direction at the unfolded position.

On the other hand, when the motor 276 rotates counterclockwise from the deployed state of the left sword member 274, the rotation of the motor gear 276A is transmitted to the gear 277C via the gears 277A and 277B, and the gear 277C rotates in the clockwise rotation direction. do. When the gear 277C rotates in the clockwise direction, the fitting protrusion 277c moves along the slit 275A in the circumferential direction of the gear 277C. As a result, the left sword member 274 swings in the clockwise rotation direction from the deployed position, retracts from the display area 4A, and returns to the state of extending in the vertical direction at the standby position.

When the motor 281 rotates in the reverse direction of the clockwise rotation of the right sword member 272 from the deployed state, the rotation of the motor gear 281A is transmitted to the gear 282B via the gear 282A, and the gear 282B rotates in the clockwise rotation direction. When the gear 282B rotates in the clockwise rotation direction, the fitting protrusion 282b moves in the circumferential direction of the gear 282B along the slit 280A. As a result, the right sword member 279 swings in the clockwise rotation direction from the deployed position, retracts from the display area 4A, and returns to the state of extending in the vertical direction at the standby position.

[Examples of other embodiments]
Next, examples of other embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 127.

123 to 127 are diagrams showing other embodiments of the game board 1. In FIG. 123, on the right side of the game area 1p of the game board 1, the passage gate 251, the second starting port 252, the blade member 253, the first large winning opening 254, the second large winning opening 255, and the first large winning opening 254 The first big winning opening shutter 254A for opening and closing, the second big winning opening shutter 255A for opening and closing the second big winning opening 255, and the general winning opening 40D are provided.

The passage gate 251 provides an opportunity to open the second starting port 252. The winning of the game ball to the passing gate 251 is detected by the passing gate switch 350 (see FIG. 6). Even if a game ball wins a prize at this passing gate 251 but no prize ball is generated.

The first big winning opening shutter 254A switches the first big winning opening 254 into an open state or a closed state by opening and closing the game board 1 so as to make a forward leaning posture and a backward posture in the front-rear direction. It is arranged so as to cover the first prize opening 254 in the closed state.

The second big winning opening shutter 255A switches the second big winning opening 255 to an open state or a closed state by opening and closing the game board 1 so as to make a forward leaning posture and a backward posture in the front-rear direction. It is arranged so as to cover the second large winning opening 255 in the closed state.

These 1st prize opening shutter 254A and 2nd prize opening shutter 255A are the 1st prize opening shutter solenoid 360A and the 2nd prize opening shutter solenoid 370A, respectively.
Driven by (see FIG. 6).

The game board 1 is provided with the ball passage unit 256 shown in FIGS. 124 and 125. The ball passage unit 256 is located below the passage gate 251 (indicated by a virtual line in FIG. 125), and is an outlet 257 in which the game ball winning in the second starting port 252 (indicated by the virtual line in FIG. 125) is discharged. And a ball passage 258 that communicates with the discharge port 257 and extends downward from the discharge port 257 and discharges the game ball discharged from the discharge port 257 to the downstream.

An opening 259 that opens to the side of the game board 1 is formed in the upper right of the discharge port 257, and the opening 259 communicates with the game area 1p.

The difficulty of winning the second starting port 252 is determined by the blade member 253 as an ordinary electric accessory, and the winning of the game ball of the second starting port 252 is the second starting port switch 330 (FIG. FIG. 6) is detected.

The blade member 253 moves in the front-rear direction so as to form a protruding posture and a retracting posture in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is in an open state that enables the game ball to win a prize in the second starting port 252. 2 It is a so-called ordinary electric accessory that switches between a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball in the starting port 252. The blade member 253 is driven by the blade member solenoid 340 (see FIG. 6).

When the blade member 253 is in the open state, the game ball passing through the passage gate 251 wins the second starting port 252, and when the blade member 253 is in the closed state, the game ball passing through the passage gate 251 is the first. 2 After contacting the blade member 253 without winning the starting port 252, it is discharged to the game area 1p through the opening 259.

The ball passage unit 256 is provided with a discharge port 260, and the game ball that has won a prize in the general winning port 40D is discharged to the ball passage 258 through the discharge port 260.

A ball passage 259 communicates with the lower end of the ball passage 258, and the ball passage 259 extends from the lower end of the ball passage 258 in the left-right direction of the game board 1. The ball passage 258 and the ball passage 259 are formed so that the passage area, which is the area of the cross section in the front-rear direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball passes, is the passage area of about two or more of the game balls. As a result, in the ball passages 258 and 259, the game balls can pass side by side in the front-rear direction of the game board 1.

Below the discharge port 260, the ball passage 258 is provided with a general winning port right switch 400B, and the general winning port right switch 400B detects a game ball that has been won by the general winning port 40D and discharged to the discharge port 260. do.

The ball passage unit 256 includes a ball passage 262. The ball passage 262 is located below the first large winning opening 254, and the game ball that has won the first large winning opening 254 is discharged to the ball passage 262.

In FIG. 126, the ball passage 263 communicates with the lower part (downstream) of the ball passage 262. In FIGS. 124 to 126, the ball passage 263 is located above the ball passage 259 and extends in the left-right direction of the game board 1 together with the ball passage 259.

As a result, the game ball winning from the first large winning opening 254 is discharged to the ball passage 263 through the ball passage 262, and is discharged toward the left side (downstream) of the game board 1 along the ball passage 263.

In FIGS. 125 and 126, the ball passage unit 256 includes a ball passage 264. The ball passage 264 is located below the second large winning opening 255, and the game ball won in the second large winning opening 255 is discharged to the ball passage 264.

In FIG. 127, the ball passage 249 communicates with the ball passage 259 and the ball passage 263. Therefore, the game ball that has won the first prize opening 254 is discharged toward the left (downstream) of the game board 1 through the ball passage 263, and the ball passage 264 is inserted in the middle of the ball passage 263. It is divided into those discharged to the ball passage 259 through the ball passage 259.

In FIGS. 124 and 125, the downstream end of the ball passage 259 and the downstream end of the ball passage 263 are merged by the confluence portion 265, and the game ball discharged downstream along the ball passage 259 or the ball passage 263 is , Are merged at the merging portion 265 and discharged to the back surface of the game board 1. That is, the ball passage 259 and the ball passage 263 discharge the game balls that have won in the first large winning opening 254 and the second large winning opening 255 to the back surface of the game board 1.

Further, since the ball passage 259 communicates with the ball passage 258, the game balls that have won the second starting port 252 and the general winning opening 40D are discharged from the ball passage 258 to the confluence portion 265 through the ball passage 259. That is, the game ball discharged to the ball passage 258 and the ball passage 263 can be discharged to the ball passage 259.

Here, the first large winning opening 254 of the present embodiment constitutes the first winning opening of the present invention, and the second large winning opening 255 constitutes the second winning opening of the present invention. The ball passage 263 constitutes the first game medium passage of the present invention, and the ball passage 259 constitutes the second game medium passage of the present invention.

In the ball passage 259 of the present embodiment, the passage area which is the area of the cross section orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball passes (the left-right direction of the game board 1) (the front-back direction of the game board 1) is larger than the passage area of the ball passage 263. It is formed large.

Further, the ball passage 263 communicates with the ball passage 264 separately from the confluence portion 265. As a result, the game ball that has won the first large winning opening 254 can be discharged to the ball passage 259 via the ball passage 264.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the ball passage 259 joins the ball passage 263 downstream of the second large winning opening 255, and is the area of the cross section orthogonal to the direction in which the gaming ball passes. The passage area is formed to be larger than the passage area of the ball passage 263, and the ball passage 264 is provided as a communication portion communicating with the ball passage 263 separately from the merging portion 265 which is a merging portion with the ball passage 263. Further, since the game ball that has won the first big winning opening 254 can also be discharged to the ball passage 259 via the ball passage 264, the game ball that has won the first big winning opening 254 is clogged downstream thereof. Can be prevented. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly discharged toward the downstream, and the game playability can be improved.

In this embodiment, two large winning openings 254 and 255 are provided, but three or more large winning openings may be provided. Further, although two ball passages 259 and 263 are provided, three or more ball passages may be provided according to the number of large winning openings. The game medium passage may be provided on a game board, a spacer, or the like as long as it is possible to guide or discharge the game medium from the winning opening.

[Examples of other embodiments]
Next, an example of another embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 128.

As shown in FIG. 128, an upper movable effect member 101A is installed behind the decorative member 99 (see FIG. 3), and a lens 289 is installed to the right of the upper movable effect member 101A. An illumination substrate 290 is installed behind the lens 289. The illuminated substrate 290 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 291 that emit light in a single color (for example, white). The LED 291 emits light toward the decorative member 99 through the lens 289. Here, the LED 291 is included in the LED group 28 (see FIG. 6) controlled by the lamp control circuit 78.

The full-color light emitters LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a of the present invention constitute the first light emitting unit of the present invention, and the monochromatic light emitting body LED 291 constitutes the second light emitting unit. Further, the front decoration 160 including the blue lens member constitutes the lens member of the present invention.

Next, the action will be described.
When the upper movable effect member 101A is located at the standby position, it emits light so as to match the light emitting mode with the monochromatic LED 291. Specifically, since the front decoration 160 is blue, light is emitted in green so that the color transmitted from the front decoration 160 is white.

As a result, the color emitted from the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, and 195a becomes a color similar to that of the LED 291 and the decorative member 99 emits white light. Here, it is conceivable that the decorative member 99 emits light in dark white by superimposing green light on the blue front decoration 160. In this case, the lens of the decorative member 99 or the lens of the decorative member 99. By providing a diffusion sheet or the like in the vicinity, the light from the upper movable effect member 101A and the light from the LED 219 can be diffused to the decorative member 99 to adjust the light emitting mode of the decorative member 99.

Further, when the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, the decorative member 99 emits light by the LED 291 and the upper movable effect member 101A emits light in a color different from that of the LED 291. The effect of this can be improved more effectively.

Further, when the upper movable effect member 101A is controlled to emit light according to the expectation of the effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 4, and the LED 291 is emitting white light according to the expectation of the effect, the standby position is set. The LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, and 195a may be controlled to emit light so that the upper movable effect member 101A looks the same color at the movable position.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a emit light in a state where the upper movable effect member 101A is located at the standby position, so that the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a are visually recognized from the front. Since the color of 195a can be changed to a color similar to the emission color of the LED 291, it is not necessary to provide a light emitting portion such as an LED on the decorative member 99, and the decorative member 99 emits light by the upper movable effect member 101A. can.

In addition to this, the mounting amount of the full-color LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, and 195a can be reduced so that the decorative member 99 can emit light in the same color (white). As a result, the configuration of the decorative member 99 can be simplified and the manufacturing cost of the decorative member 99 can be reduced.

Further, when the upper movable effect member 101A is in the movable position from the standby position, the color of the decorative member 99 visually recognized from the front of the decorative member 99 can be changed, so that various colors by the upper movable effect member 101A can be changed. It is possible to carry out the effect of the above, and it is possible to improve the effect of the upper movable effect member 101A.

Further, for example, if the effect of moving the upper movable effect member 101A from the standby position to the movable position while emitting light is performed, the upper movable effect member 101A that moves while emitting light from the player's line of sight can be focused on. As a result, the effect of the upper movable effect member 101A can be emphasized.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, the non-probability / non-time saving gaming state and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery are non-probability as the normal gaming state controlled by the main control circuit 60 described later. There is a probabilistic game state (special game state) in which the probability is higher than the probabilistic / non-time-saving game state, and a time-saving game state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is higher than the non-probability / non-time-saving game state. If the special symbol lottery is won, the game shifts to the jackpot game state (specific game state).

In the time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is high, so that the support of the blade member 34 as a normal electric throwing facilitates the winning of the second starting port 33. This state is a so-called "electric support" state, in which the reserved balls of the special symbol game described later can be easily accumulated, and the reduction of the game balls can be suppressed by winning the second starting port 33. Specifically, the time-saving game state is a state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is relatively high (time-saving game state 1), and a state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the normal symbol is relatively short (time-saving game state 2). ), It means a state of at least one of the states in which the opening time of the blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory is relatively long (time-saving gaming state 3). For example, the time-saving game state includes a state in which the time-saving game state 1, the time-saving game state 2, and the time-saving game state 3 proceed simultaneously with any combination. In such a time-saving gaming state, the possibility of shifting to the jackpot gaming state is improved.

After the end of the jackpot gaming state in which the V prize in the specific area 38A is successfully completed in the jackpot gaming state, the game always shifts to the probabilistic / shortened gaming state (the probabilistic changing gaming state and the normal gaming state which is the time-saving gaming state), and is not. It does not shift to the probabilistic / non-time-saving gaming state (the non-probability-changing gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, which is the normal gaming state). On the other hand, if the jackpot gaming state ends with the non-V winning without succeeding in V winning in the specific area 38A, the normal gaming state which is the non-probable variable gaming state and the time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. It is designed to move to.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the end of the big hit game state, for example, 180 times of special symbol lottery (180 times of variable display or stop display of special symbol) is performed in the probabilistic / short-time game state. It is designed to shift to a probabilistic / non-time saving game state. Furthermore, after the end of the big hit game state, for example, 100 times or 4 times of special symbol lottery (100 times or 4 times of special symbol change display or stop display) was performed in the non-probability change / time saving game state. , It is designed to shift to a non-probability / non-time saving game state. After the end of the big hit game state, the probability change / time saving game state may be maintained until the next big hit game state is entered. In the following description, the probabilistic gaming state that ends by performing a predetermined number of special symbol lottery as in the present embodiment is also described as an ST (Specia1 Time) gaming state.

The upper movable effect member 101A and the lower movable effect member 101B are installed in a state of being retracted from the central portion of the display area 4A behind the game board 1 when not operating (see FIG. 3). The upper movable effect member 101A appears at a movable position (see FIGS. 19 and 48) in front of the central portion of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 appear. , The lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are movable and emit light. The lower movable effect member 101B appears at a movable position in front of the lower part of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and causes the outer ring member 117 to move in the circumferential direction in the radial direction and emit light. Further, the lower movable effect member 101B moves and emits light in the radial direction of the outer ring member 117 at the standby position at the lower part of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed.

The cover member 43 is provided to form the second special winning opening 37, and is attached below the first large winning opening 36. The cover member 43 forms a second large winning opening 37 by opening a part of the upper end surface thereof. In the state where the cover member 43 is attached to the game board 1, the displacement member 39 is located in the opening corresponding to the second special winning opening 37. Further, a guide piece 43a for guiding the game ball toward the second special winning opening 37 is provided on the front side edge portion of the upper end surface of the cover member 43. Inside the cover member 43, a ball passage is formed from the opening corresponding to the second special winning opening 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B via the second special winning opening count switch 370. Such a cover member 43 is arranged so as to cover the second special winning opening count switch 370, the specific area switch 380A, and the non-specific area switch 380B.

The LED unit 5 notifies the player of each game state and lottery result, and as shown in FIG. 5, the normal symbol display unit 51, the ordinary symbol hold display unit 52, the first special symbol display unit 53, and the first 2 It has a special symbol display unit 54, a first special symbol reservation display unit 55, a second special symbol reservation display unit 56, and a round display unit 59. Although not shown in particular, the lamps and LEDs 27 (see FIG. 6) arranged on the game board 1 and the like include those corresponding to the character appearance notification lamps, and the transition to the big hit game state is confirmed. Lights (or blinks) when a special character (hereinafter, also referred to as "SP character") appears in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 during a part of the special symbol change in the game state or during the big hit game state. It has become like.

The ordinary symbol display unit 51 drives the blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory when the game ball wins a prize in the passing gate 35, and determines whether or not to open the second starting port 33. The lottery result for "game" is displayed. The normal symbol display unit 51 includes one LED lamp 511. The LED lamp 511 can be lit in red and blue, for example, and is lit in red in the case of winning in the normal symbol game, while it is lit in blue in the case of loss in the normal symbol game. When the LED lamp 511 in the normal symbol display unit 51 is lit, for example, in red, the blade member 34 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to allow the game ball to win the second starting port 33. It should be noted that the lighting mode according to the winning and losing of the normal symbol game may be another lighting mode, for example, in the case of winning, the lighting state or the blinking state is set, and in the case of losing, the lighting mode is turned off. You may do it.

In the normal symbol hold display unit 52, a new game ball wins a prize in the passing gate 35 while the normal symbol display unit 51 is performing variable display by turning on or off the four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524. If this is the case, the number of times that the variation display of the normal symbol that is reserved for the variation display by the normal symbol display unit 51 from the next time onward can be performed is displayed. The four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524 are located on the left side of the normal symbol display unit 51, and are arranged side by side in a row together with the LED lamps 511. In the hold display by the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524, for example, when the number of holds is "1", the LED lamp 521 is turned on and the LED lamps 522, 523, 524 are turned off. When the number of hold is "2", the LED lamps 521 and 522 are turned on and the LED lamps 523 and 524 are turned off. When the number of hold is "3", the LED lamps 521, 522, 523 are turned on and the LED lamp 524 is turned off. When the number of holdings is "4", all of the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524 are turned on.

The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 show the result of a winning lottery for the "special symbol game", and include, for example, a 7-segment LED. The first special symbol display unit 53 displays a variation of a symbol (hereinafter referred to as “first special symbol”) as identification information when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 32, and also displays the first. The result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the starting port 32 is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol related to the first special symbol. The second special symbol display unit 54 performs variable display of a symbol (hereinafter referred to as “second special symbol”) as identification information when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 33, and also displays the second. The result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the starting port 33 is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol related to the second special symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 realize the identification information display unit.

The fluctuation display of the symbol by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is performed by, for example, using a 7-segment LED or the like and repeatedly turning on / off each segment individually. The result of the winning lottery is displayed by a segment pattern (symbol) formed by turning on / off each segment of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54. At this time, the plurality of hit symbols displayed by the first special symbol and the plurality of hit symbols displayed by the second special symbol have different modes. The hit symbol of the first special symbol is a symbol that triggers the transition to the jackpot gaming state, such as "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6" indicating that the probability variation gaming state can be transitioned after the end of the jackpot gaming state. There is a nominal jackpot symbol and a nominal jackpot symbol such as "time reduction 1" to "time reduction 5" indicating that the game state shifts to the non-probable and time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see FIG. 50). The winning symbol of the second special symbol is a symbol that triggers the transition to the jackpot gaming state, and is a nominal jackpot symbol such as "probability variation 1" indicating that the transition to the probabilistic gaming state can be achieved after the end of the jackpot gaming state. There is (see FIG. 50). That is, the hit symbol of the first special symbol has a jackpot symbol indicating that the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, while the hit symbol of the second special symbol has the time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. There is no jackpot symbol to indicate that it will shift to. The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 are not limited to the 7-segment LED and the like, and may be, for example, a combination of lighting and extinguishing of two or more LED lamps.

The first special symbol holding display unit 55 includes four LED lamps 551,552,553,554, and the first special symbol display unit 53 is turned on or off by turning on or off these LED lamps 551,552,553,554. Or, for the variable display of the first special symbol for the next and subsequent special symbol games when a new game ball is won in the first starting port 32 while the second special symbol display unit 54 is displaying the variation of the symbol for the special symbol game. Displays the number of times (number of holdes) that the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 that has been put on hold can be executed. The second special symbol holding display unit 56 includes four LED lamps 561,562,563,564, and the first special symbol display unit 53 is turned on or off by turning on or off these LED lamps 561,562,563,564. Alternatively, when the second special symbol display unit 54 wins a new game ball in the second starting port 33 during the variable display of the symbol for the special symbol game, it is reserved for the variable display of the symbol for the next and subsequent special symbol games. The number of times (number of holds) that the variable display of the second special symbol display unit 54 can be executed is displayed. Each of the first special symbol reservation display unit 55 and the second special symbol reservation display unit 56 is arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and is located above the normal symbol reservation display unit 52. The display mode of the number of reservations on the first special symbol reservation display unit 55 and the second special symbol reservation display unit 56 is the same as the display mode of the number of reservations by the normal symbol reservation display unit 52.

The first special symbol holding display unit 55 and the second special symbol holding display unit 56 move to the first starting port 32 when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variablely displaying. The game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the ball passage or the second start port switch 330 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the second start port 33. If so, the execution (start) of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended. When the symbol that has been variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is stopped and displayed, the reserved first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is displayed. The variable display of the symbol is started.

Here, an upper limit is set for the number of times that the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended, and in the present embodiment, the first starting port 32 and the second 2. The maximum number of pending variable displays of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 due to the winning of the game ball to the starting port 33 is set to four. When the first special symbol game for the first special symbol display unit 53 is held for four times, the information of the first special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 53 is the main RAM 63 (FIG. The information of the first special symbol game for four times stored as the start storage (starting storage information) in the first special symbol start storage area (0) of 6) is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (see 6). 1) -It is stored as a start memory in the first special symbol start storage area (4). Similarly, when the second special symbol game is reserved for four times, the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63). The information of the second special symbol game for four times stored as the start storage (start storage information) in 0) is the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). ) Is stored as a start memory. Therefore, the total number of winnings reserved for both the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, that is, the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33, is eight.

In addition, in place of the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, or in addition to the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, the liquid crystal display device 4 , The hold of winning in the first starting port 32 and the holding of winning in the second starting port 33 may be displayed.

The round display unit 59 lights up while the hit symbol is stopped, and indicates the number of rounds as the number of times related to the round game described later when the big hit game state is executed. The round display unit 59 includes three LED lamps 591,592,593, and indicates the number of rounds when the jackpot game state is executed by turning on or off these LED lamps 591,592,593. In the present embodiment, when the number of rounds is 16 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "16R"), the LED lamp 591 is turned on and the LED lamps 592 and 593 are turned off. Further, for example, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot game state having a number of rounds different from the above number of rounds is set, the LED lamp 592 or 593 is turned on and the other LED lamps are turned off. Can be done. The number of rounds (number of times) may mean the entire number of times the round game (round game) is executed, or may mean the number of orders indicating the order when the round games are sequentially executed. Regarding the number of rounds, when the former is meant, for example, "16 rounds" or "16R" is described, and when the latter is meant, for example, "16Rth" is described. Further, in the following description, the "round game" may be simply referred to as a "round".

As shown in FIG. 3, the liquid crystal display device 4 is arranged behind the game board 1, and a display area 4A is arranged substantially in the center thereof so that the player can see the first start. In addition to the result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 32 and the second starting mouth 33, various images related to the game, such as an identification symbol for production, a production image in a normal game state, and a production during a big hit game state. It displays an image, a production image for demo display, and the like. That is, the liquid crystal display device 4 is adapted to display the identification information in a variable manner on condition that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 32 or the second starting port 33. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 4 constitutes a display means, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, and the lamp / LED 27 constitute the effect executing means. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, these effect executing means are also used as notification means.

[Electrical configuration of gaming machines]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 6, the “switch” is abbreviated as “SW” and the “solenoid” is abbreviated as “SOL”.

As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko gaming machine includes a main control circuit 60 as a main control means for controlling a game and a sub control circuit 70 as a sub control means for controlling an effect according to the progress of the game. Have.

The main control circuit 60 includes a main CPU 61, a main ROM 62 as a read-only memory, a main RAM 63 as a read / write memory, an initial reset circuit 64, an I / O port 65, a command output port 66 as a command transmission means, and a backup capacitor 67. It is equipped with. The main control circuit 60 is connected to various devices (devices, switches, etc.) including the LED unit 5.

The main CPU 61 is connected to the main ROM 62 and the main RAM 63, and has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 62. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 is a specific game state transition determination means (first specific game state transition determination means and second specific game state transition determination means), specific game state control means, special game state control means. , And round game execution means (first round game execution means and second round game execution means) are realized.

A first start port switch 320 arranged behind the first start port 32 is connected to the main control circuit 60. When the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320, a winning lottery is performed.

A second start port switch 330 arranged behind the second start port 33 is connected to the main control circuit 60. When the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 330, a winning lottery is performed.

These first start port switch 320 and second start port switch 330 are regarded as winning when it is detected that a game ball has entered the first start port 32 and the second start port 33, and a predetermined detection signal is transmitted. It is supplied to the main control circuit 60.

A passing gate switch 350 arranged behind the passing gate 35 is connected to the main control circuit 60. When the game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 350, it is assumed that the game ball has won a prize in the passing gate 35, and a normal symbol lottery is performed. The result of this ordinary symbol lottery is displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 51. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 51, an effect image for the player to understand that the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is won is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. You may do so.

The passing gate switch 350 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60, assuming that it has won a prize when it detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 35. As a result, the passing gate switch 350 provides an opportunity to open the second starting port 33.

The main control circuit 60 has a general winning opening left switch 400A arranged behind the general winning opening 40A, 40B, 40C located on the left side and the right side of the game board 1, and a general winning opening arranged behind the general winning opening 40D. The right mouth switch 400B is connected. When a game ball is detected by the general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B, a preset number of prize balls are played by the payout device 83.

The first special winning opening count switch 360 arranged behind the first special winning opening 36 is connected to the main control circuit 60. The first large winning opening count switch 360 is for counting the number of winnings of the game ball to the first large winning opening 36. When the winning of the game ball is detected by the first large winning opening count switch 360, the payout device 83 uses a preset number of game balls as prize balls and passes through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21 to the upper plate 17 or the lower side. Pay out to the plate 18.

The second major winning opening count switch 370 arranged behind the second winning opening 37 is connected to the main control circuit 60. The second big winning opening count switch 370 is for counting the number of winnings of the game ball to the second big winning opening 37. When the winning of the game ball is detected by the second large winning opening count switch 370, the payout device 83 uses a preset number of game balls as prize balls and passes through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21 to the upper plate 17. Alternatively, pay out to the lower plate 18.

These 1st big winning opening count switch 360 and 2nd big winning opening count switch 370 mainly control a predetermined detection signal when the game ball passes through the 1st big winning opening 36 and the 2nd big winning opening 37. Supply to the circuit 60.

A specific area switch 380A and a non-specific area switch 380B arranged in the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B are connected to the main control circuit 60. The specific area switch 380A supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60, assuming that a V prize is won when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the specific area 38A in the big hit game state. The non-specific area switch 380B supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60, assuming that it has won a non-V prize when it detects that the game ball has passed through the non-specific area 38B in the big hit gaming state.

The main control circuit 60 includes a first large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A for driving the first large winning opening shutter 36A that opens and closes the first special winning opening 36, and a second large winning opening shutter that opens and closes the second special winning opening 37. It exclusively controls the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A that drives 37A. As a result, the first large winning opening shutter 36A is driven so as to change between an open state in which the game ball can be won in the first large winning opening 36 and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. In a situation where the first prize opening 36 is at least closed, the second prize opening shutter 37A is in an open state in which the game ball can be won in the second prize opening 37, and the game ball is won. Is driven to change into an impossible or difficult closed state. The opening drive of the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37 by the first large winning opening shutter 36A and the second large winning opening shutter 37A is the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display. This is performed when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the part 54 and the game state is changed to the big hit game state.

The main control circuit 60 controls the blade member solenoid 340 that opens and closes the blade member 34. As a result, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display unit 51 in a predetermined light emitting mode, the blade member 34 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and the game ball enters the second starting port 33. It will be easier.

For example, in the normal symbol game of the present embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the game state (“non-probability / non-time saving game state” in the present embodiment) that is not the time-saving game state is 0 (for example, lottery). The non-winning is decided), and the blade member 34 is not opened. On the other hand, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the high probability state (time saving game state) is, for example, 1/1 (for example, the winning is determined without being drawn), and when this is won, the blade member 34 is 1. . Open 3 times for 3 seconds.

The main control circuit 60 controls the displacement member solenoid 390 that operates to open and close the displacement member 39 in the specific region 38A. As a result, when the round game described later is being executed in the big hit game state, the displacement member 39 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and the game ball easily passes through the specific area 38A. On the other hand, when the displacement member 39 is closed even in the big hit game state, the game ball cannot or is difficult to pass through the specific area 38A, and the game ball easily passes through the non-specific area 38B.

The first special symbol holding display unit 55 is the first when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 while the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variable display. 1 The first based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 32 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The number of times the execution (start) of the variable display of the special symbol is suspended, that is, the number of reservations related to the first special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been held as the number of reserved symbols related to the first special symbol is started.

The second special symbol holding display unit 56 is the second when the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 330 while the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variable display. 1 The second based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The number of times the execution (start) of the variable display of the special symbol is suspended, that is, the number of reservations related to the second special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been held as the number of reserved symbols related to the second special symbol is started.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the priority of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set so that the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol. However, the corresponding first special symbol and the second special symbol may be varied and displayed in the order of winning in the order of winning the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33.

Further, as described above, an upper limit is set for the number of pending executions of the variable display of the special symbol, and in the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 is set in the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33. When the game ball wins a prize and the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 and the second start port switch 330, the maximum number of hold numbers for the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is four, respectively. (That is, the number of detections is 4), and the 5th and subsequent ones are not stored as the reserved number. At this time, when the number of holdings decreases due to the end of the variable display of the special symbol, the number of holdings is added again up to 4 pieces.

When the number of reserved first special symbol games in the first special symbol display unit 53 is, for example, up to four, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 53 is the information of the main RAM 63. 1 The special symbol game information is stored in the special symbol start storage area (0) as start storage, and thereafter, the information of the special symbol game for which the number of reservations is four is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to (4) of the main RAM 63. It is sequentially stored as a start memory.

Similarly, for the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display unit 54, when the number of holdings of the second special symbol game is, for example, up to four, the second special symbol display unit 54 corresponding to the changing second special symbol display unit 54. The information of the 2 special symbol game is stored as the start storage in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 63, and thereafter, the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the number of holdings of 4 is the second special symbol game of the main RAM 63. 2 The special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) are sequentially stored as start storage.

Therefore, the total number of game balls held for the special symbol game associated with winning the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 is a maximum of eight, and the first special symbol holding display unit 54 and the second special symbol are held. The number of hold displays by LEDs 551 to 554 and LEDs 561 to 564 of the hold display unit 55 is also four, respectively.

In the open state of the first big winning opening 36 by the first big winning opening shutter 36A, the count value (the number of winnings of the game ball) by the first big winning opening count switch 360 becomes a predetermined number (for example, the number of winnings is 9). Or, it is maintained until one of the conditions such as the elapse of the opening time described later described in advance is satisfied. When the number of winnings of the game ball reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the first big winning opening shutter 36A has elapsed, the first big winning opening shutter 36A is driven to close the first big winning opening 36. Will be done.

Similarly, in the open state of the 2nd big winning opening 37 by the 2nd big winning opening shutter 37A, the count value (the number of winnings of the game ball) by the 2nd big winning opening count switch 370 is a predetermined number (for example, 9 winning numbers). Or, it is maintained until one of the conditions such as the elapse of the opening time described later described in advance is satisfied. When the number of winnings of the game ball reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the second big winning opening shutter 37A has elapsed, the second big winning opening shutter 37A is driven to close the second big winning opening 37. Will be done.

In the big hit game state, the open state and the closed state of the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 are repeated based on the preset big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. In the big hit game state, each of the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 is opened and closed for a predetermined number of times including a plurality of times based on the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. Is called a "round game". A round game (round game) may be simply called a round. After the 1st big winning opening 36 or the 2nd big winning opening 37 is closed by one round game, the 1st big winning opening 36 or the 2nd big winning opening 37 will be opened as the next round game. The state up to is also referred to as "inter-round game" or "inter-round interval" or simply "interval". In one round game, each of the first prize opening 36 and the second prize opening 37 may be opened and closed a plurality of times. Further, in one round game, the open / closed state of the first prize opening 36 and the second prize opening 37 is exclusively controlled. That is, in one round game, while one big winning opening is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times, the other big winning opening is continuously closed.

Although the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is not provided with a so-called small hit gaming state as a gaming state having a property different from that of the big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state may be provided. Unlike the big hit game state, the small hit game state is not defined by the concept of a round game, and for example, the second big winning opening 37 is defined to be open only once. However, when the small hit game state is provided, the arbitrary or specific large winning opening may be controlled so as to be repeatedly opened a plurality of times. Further, the gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state may be shifted to a gaming state different from the gaming state before shifting to the small hit gaming state, and the gaming state before shifting to the small hit gaming state may be performed. It may be returned to.

Round games are counted as the number of rounds (number of times) such as 1 round and 2 rounds. For example, the first round game may be referred to as a first round, and the second round game may be referred to as a second round. In the following description (including drawings referred to in the description), the "round" with numbers such as the first round or the first round is simply "R" such as 1R, 2R, 4R, 16R, etc. ] May be omitted. In addition, in one round game, the maximum number of winnings per round is reached before the first major winning opening 36 or the second major winning opening 37 is opened a predetermined number of times. When it reaches, the 1st prize opening 36 and the 2nd prize opening 37 will be closed, and the 1st prize opening 36 and the 2nd prize opening 37 will not be opened for the remaining number of openings. , The round game is terminated.

Further, in a specific round game in which the second big winning opening 37 is opened in the big hit game state, the displacement member 39 is controlled based on a preset operation pattern (displacement member operation pattern) described later. As a result, the specific area 38A becomes an open state and a closed state in a specific round game in the jackpot gaming state. That is, in a specific round game, the game ball may pass through the specific area 38A and win a V prize, while in a round game other than the specific round game, the game ball tentatively wins in the second large winning opening 37. Even if this is done, the game ball cannot or is difficult to pass through the specific area 38A. That is, the types of the big hit game state (specific game state) include the big hit game state including the specific round game (first specific game state) and the big hit game state not including the specific round game (second specific game state). There is.

In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an effect image related to the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is displayed. For example, in the variable display of the special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is composed of numbers except in a specific case. Designs (decorative symbols), for example, numbers such as "0", "1", "2" ... "7" are displayed in three columns.

On the other hand, when the special symbol that has been variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

Further, in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, when the changed or stopped special symbol has a specific stop display mode, the player is made to understand that it is a "big hit". The effect image is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

Specifically, in either the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54, the special symbol is, for example, in a specific display mode corresponding to a "big hit" in which many balls can be obtained. When the display is stopped, the combination of decorative symbols for effect displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is a specific display mode (for example, a state in which all the same symbols are aligned in each of a plurality of symbol rows). In addition, the effect image for a big hit is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

The main CPU 61 included in such a main control circuit 60 is put into a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player on condition that the gaming medium has passed through the first starting region (first starting port 32). It functions as a first specific game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition. Further, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, on condition that the gaming medium has passed through the second starting region (second starting port 33). It functions as a second specific game state transition determination means.

Further, the main CPU 61 is a specific game state control means for controlling the game state to the specific game state on condition that the determination result of shifting to the specific game state is obtained by the first or second specific game state transition determination means. Functions as.

Further, the determination result that the main CPU 61 shifts to the specific gaming state by the specific gaming state transition determination means after the specific gaming state ends, on condition that the gaming medium has passed through the specific area 38A in the specific gaming state. Functions as a special game state control means for controlling a special game state (probability variation game state) in which is relatively easy to obtain.

Further, in the specific game state, the main CPU 61 changes the first variable winning device (first large winning opening shutter 36A) into the first mode (open state) and the second mode (closed state) in the first round game (round). It functions as a first round game execution means for executing the game) a predetermined number of times. The main CPU 61, which functions as the first round game execution means, can control the first variable winning device to be changed to the first mode and the second mode during at least one first round game execution.

Further, in the specific game state, the main CPU 61 changes the second variable winning device (second large winning opening shutter 37A) into the first mode (open state) and the second mode (closed state) in the second round game (round). It functions as a second round game execution means for executing the game) a predetermined number of times. The main CPU 61, which functions as a second round game execution means, has a specific round game mode in which it is relatively easy for the game medium to pass through the second variable winning device to the specific area 38A during at least one second round game execution. It is possible to perform a specific second round game in which control is performed to change to the first aspect and the second aspect. Further, during the execution of at least one other round game, the second variable winning device is changed to the first mode and the second mode in a predetermined round game mode in which it is relatively difficult for the game medium to pass through the specific area 38A. It is also possible to control.

In the jackpot game state, the first round game execution means executes the first round game a specific number of times, and then the second round game execution means executes at least one specific second round game. 1 specific game state, and a second specific game state in which the first round game is executed by the first round game execution means and then the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game execution means. After the first round game execution means executes the first round game of the second specific number of times more than the first specific number of times, the second round game execution means executes at least one specific second round game. 3 Specific game states, and a 4th specific game state in which the 2nd round game execution means does not execute the specific 2nd round game after the 1st round game is executed the 2nd specific number of times by the 1st round game execution means. A specific game state including is realized.

A specific example of control of the main CPU 61 that realizes each of the above means will be described later.

The main ROM 62 stores a program for causing the main CPU 61 to execute various processes described later, including a function as each means of the main CPU 61 described above, and various tables.

The main RAM 63 has a function of storing various data (flags, counters, timers, values of variables, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 61. As the temporary storage area of the main CPU 61, another literate storage medium may be used instead of the main RAM 63.

The initial reset circuit 64 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 61.

The I / O port 65 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 61 and output signals from the main CPU 61 to various devices.

The command output port 66 transmits various commands from the main CPU 61 to the sub-control circuit 70.

The backup capacitor 67 is for holding various data stored in the main RAM 63 by promptly supplying power to the main RAM 63 at the time of power failure.

Various devices connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first prize opening shutter solenoid 360A, a second prize opening shutter solenoid 370A, a blade member solenoid 340, a displacement member solenoid 390, and an external terminal board 80. ..

The external terminal board 80 is located between a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk and displaying the number of big hits, or an external device such as a hall computer 100 that manages a plurality of pachinko gaming machines installed in the hall. It is for data communication with.

Various switches connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first start port switch 320, a second start port switch 330, a passing gate switch 350, a first special winning opening count switch 360, and a second major winning opening count switch 370. , Specified area switch 380A, non-specific area switch 380B, general winning opening left switch 400A, general winning opening right switch 400B, and backup clear switch 81.

The backup clear switch 81 clears the backup data of the main control circuit 60 and the payout / launch control circuit 82, which will be described later, in response to an operation by the hall manager.

Further, the launching device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84 are connected to the main control circuit 60 via the payout / launch control circuit 82.

The main control circuit 60 transmits a prize ball control command to the payout / launch control circuit 82. The payout / launch control circuit 82 mainly controls the launch device 26 and the payout device 83, and the launch device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84 are connected to the payout / launch control circuit 82. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the payout / launch control circuit 82 and the payout device 83 realize the game value adding means.

The card unit 84 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 85 that outputs a signal requesting the lending of a game ball according to the operation of the player, and can transmit and receive signals to and from the ball lending operation panel 85. ..

The payout / launch control circuit 82 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 60 and the rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 84, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 83. Allows the payout device 83 to pay out the game ball. For example, the payout device 83 pays out three game balls as the number of prize balls for each prize to the first starting port 32, and one game ball as the number of prize balls for each prize to the second starting port 33. And pay out 10 game balls as the number of prize balls per prize to the general prize openings 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D, and per prize to the first prize opening 36 or the second prize opening 37. As the number of prize balls, 14 game balls are paid out.

The payout / launch control circuit 82 is a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the amount of rotation when the launch handle 26b of the launch device 26 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction. Is supplied with electric power to control the game ball to be launched toward the game area 1p.

The main CPU 61 interrupts the main process and executes the timer interrupt process as the interrupt process even during the execution of the main process described later. The timer interrupt process is executed triggered by an interrupt condition that occurs every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).

The sub control circuit 70 is connected to the main control circuit 60, and is configured to supply commands from the main control circuit 60.

The sub control circuit 70 performs various controls in response to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60, and is a sub CPU 71, a program ROM 72, a work RAM 73, a command input port 74, a backup capacitor 75, and display control. It has a circuit 76, a voice control circuit 77, a lamp control circuit 78, and a movable effect device control circuit 79. A liquid crystal display device 4 is connected to the display control circuit 76. Speakers 10a, 10b, 10c are connected to the voice control circuit 77. A lamp / LED 27 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78. The movable effect device control circuit 79 is a motor (motor 276) that drives the upper movable effect member 101A and the lower movable effect member 101B (motor 110A, motor 166), the left side movable effect member 271 and the right side movable effect member 272. , A movable effect device 42 equipped with a motor 281), a mechanism, and the like is connected.

Further, in the sub-control circuit 70, a push-button switch 90A provided on the push-button 9A is connected, and a jog dial switch 90B provided on the jog dial 9B is connected to the sub-control circuit 70. The push-button switch 90A detects the operation of the push-button 9A, and the jog dial switch 90B identifies the rotation direction and rotation angle of the jog dial 9B. A push-button switch 90A supplies a push-button to the sub-control circuit 70, and a rotation operation signal is supplied from the jog dial switch 90B.

The sub CPU 71 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 72. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display means, and the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c function as music output means. In particular, the sub CPU 71 controls the entire sub control circuit 70 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the sub CPU 71 realizes a display control means, a prior notification means, a scheduled grant quantity determination means, a notification quantity changing means, and an effect pattern selection means. The program ROM 72 and the war RAM 73 realize the storage means. The effect pattern selection means includes the music pattern selection means.

The liquid crystal display device 4 displays a round number notification image (for example, an icon indicating the number of rounds) for at least a part of the number of times the round game is executed by the first round game execution means and the second round game execution means in the specific game state. ) Functions as a display means that can be displayed. The sub CPU 71 and the program ROM 72 function as display control means for controlling the display means (liquid crystal display device 4).

The sub CPU 71 executes a predetermined specific gaming state (a round game that changes the first special winning opening 36 into an open mode and a closed mode a plurality of times by the specific game state transition determination means, and opens the second major winning opening 37. The specific second round game is executed by the second round game executing means on condition that it is decided to shift to the jackpot game state in which the round game changed to the mode and the closed mode is executed at least once). Previously, it functions as an advance notification means capable of executing advance notification to notify that the specific second round game is executed. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display means capable of displaying a round number notification image based on the execution time of the advance notification by the advance notification means.

The sub CPU 71 is the number of actual round games (round games that facilitate the winning of the first major winning opening 36) executed by the first round game executing means (main CPU 61) in the specific game state, and the actual round. The maximum number of game media that can be accepted into the first variable winning device (first large winning opening 36) (maximum number of winnings) specified for each game, and the number of game media that can be accepted into the first variable winning device. It is executed by the number (number of prize balls) of the game value (game ball) given by the game value giving means (payout device 83) for each number (number of prizes) and the second round game execution means (main CPU 61). The number of real round games (a round game that makes it easy to win the second big winning opening 37) and the second variable winning device (the second big winning opening) specified for the number of times of the real round game. Based on the maximum number of game media accepted to 37) (maximum number of prizes) and the number of game values granted by the game value granting means for each number of game media accepted to the second variable winning device. It functions as a means for determining the planned grant quantity for determining the planned grant quantity for the game value.

Further, the liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a notification means capable of notifying a part of the planned grant quantity determined by the scheduled grant quantity determining means, and the sub CPU 71 schedules the quantity notified by the notification means. It functions as a notification quantity changing means that can be changed within the range of the planned grant quantity determined by the grant quantity determining means.

The sub CPU 71 functions as an effect pattern selection means capable of selecting an effect pattern according to the type of the specific game state (big hit game state), and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, and the lamp / LED 27 produce the effect. It functions as an effect executing means capable of executing an effect in a specific gaming state based on the effect pattern selected by the pattern selection means.

The sub CPU 71 has a plurality of music patterns (for example, music pattern A (success), music pattern A (reversal), music pattern A (failure), music pattern B (success), music pattern in a specific game state (big hit game state). It functions as a music pattern selection means for selecting a music pattern from B (reversal), music pattern B (failure), and music pattern C (confirmation)), and the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c are selected by the music pattern selection means. It functions as a music output means for outputting music according to the music pattern in a special gaming state.

The sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute the item look-ahead effect (item effect) described later, determines the effect content in the item look-ahead effect (item effect), and controls the progress of the item look-ahead effect (item effect). The effect control means functions as an item advance notification determination means for determining whether or not to perform the advance notification effect described later, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, and the lamp / LED 27 are item look-ahead effects (item effect). ) And the item effect execution means for executing the advance notification effect.

The sub CPU 71 functions as a story effect control means for controlling the progress of a series of story effects and related story effects described later, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, and the lamp / LED 27 are used for a series of story effects and It functions as a story production execution means for executing a related story production.

A specific example of control of the sub CPU 71 that realizes each of the above means will be described later.

The program ROM 72 mainly stores programs and various tables for the sub CPU 71 to control various effects.

The work RAM 73 stores various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 71.

The command input port 74 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 and transmits them to the sub CPU 71.

The backup capacitor 75 is for holding various data stored in the work RAM 73 by promptly supplying power to the work RAM 73 at the time of power failure.

The display control circuit 76 is for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 4 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 71, for example, for generating various image data with an image data processor (VDP). It is composed of an image data ROM for storing data, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, and a D / A converter for converting image data as an image signal. The configuration of the display control circuit 76 is merely an example, and is not limited thereto.

The display control circuit 76 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 71. The image data includes, for example, decorative pattern image data, background image data, various effect image data, various fraudulent notification image data, and the like.

Further, the display control circuit 76 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 4 at a predetermined timing. An image is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 based on the image signal from the D / A converter.

The voice control circuit 77 is for controlling the sound (sound, music, etc.) output from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, for example, a sound source IC that controls the sound, and sound data that stores various sound data. It includes a ROM and an amplifier (AMP) for amplifying sound signals. The configuration of the voice control circuit 77 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, and is one of a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 71. Sound data can be selected.

Further, the sound source IC reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a predetermined sound signal, and supplies the sound signal to the amplifier. This amplifier amplifies the sound signal and outputs the sound from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c.

The lamp control circuit 78 is for controlling a lamp / LED 27 including a decorative lamp, a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decorative data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like. It is composed of. The configuration of the lamp control circuit 78 is merely an example, and is not limited thereto.

In the jackpot gaming state, for example, the movable effect device control circuit 79 puts the upper movable effect member 101A and the lower movable effect member 101B into standby positions by operating the press operation button 9A or the like during the valid period of the operation for the operation unit 9. (See FIG. 3) and the movable position (see FIGS. 19 and 48) are controlled to control the effect operation such as moving to the movable position (see FIGS. 19 and 48).

[Game state and production mode of the gaming machine]
Next, the gaming state and the effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 49. The gaming state is controlled by the main CPU 61, and the effect mode is controlled by the sub CPU 71.

As shown in FIG. 49, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is equipped with a normal mode, a time saving mode, and an ST mode as effect modes in the normal gaming state. In the time saving mode, as an effect, there are a relatively large number of short modes and a short mode that impresses that the number of games in which the time saving mode is relatively small (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, that is, the number of games of the special symbol game). There is a long mode that impresses the number of games. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as a production mode in the big hit game state, a live bonus, a story bonus, and a battle bonus, and a SP bonus being hit by the second special symbol are being hit. Is implemented.

The normal mode is a non-probable and non-time-saving gaming state production mode. The normal mode is an effect mode in which the user stays when the time saving mode, the ST mode, the first special symbol hitting, or the second special symbol hitting is not performed. For example, in the time saving mode, when the special symbol game of 4 times (short mode) or 100 times (long mode) is digested, the time saving mode is changed to the normal mode. Further, in the ST mode, when the special symbol game 180 times (prescribed number of times) is digested, the ST mode shifts to the normal mode. Further, in the normal mode, when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start storage information of the first special symbol described above, the live bonus and the story bonus are being hit by the first special symbol. , Or shift to a battle bonus. In the normal mode, when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start storage information of the second special symbol described above, the SP bonus is being applied to the second special symbol. May migrate.

Further, as the combination mode of the decorative symbols in the normal mode, any combination mode of "1" to "7" is stopped and displayed, but when the combination mode of "7" is stopped and displayed. , When it is confirmed that the jackpot symbol corresponds to the "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6" of the first special symbol, and the stop display is displayed as the combination mode of "3", the "probability variation 1" of the first special symbol is displayed. If the jackpot symbol corresponding to "Probability 6" is highly expected and stopped and displayed as a combination of "2", "4", or "6", the first special symbol "Probability 1" The expectation that it is a jackpot symbol corresponding to "Probability change 6" is low. Further, when the stop display is displayed as a combination mode of "1" or "5", the expectation degree of the jackpot symbol corresponding to the "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6" of the first special symbol is "2". , "4", or higher than the case where the stop display is displayed as the combination mode of "6", and lower than the case where the stop display is displayed as the combination mode of "3". However, as the combination mode of the decorative symbols in the normal mode, the combination mode other than the combination mode of "7" may be stopped and displayed. As described above, when shifting from the normal mode to the SP bonus, which is the second special symbol, the combination mode of "7" is stopped and displayed as the combination mode of the decorative symbols, and the second special symbol is displayed. It is confirmed that the jackpot symbol corresponds to "probability change 1".

The normal stage and the special stage in the normal mode are the production stages that are the elements that determine the production mode in the non-probability and non-time saving gaming state, and the result of the jackpot determination is a predetermined result, and the special symbol game has a predetermined number of times. Mutual transition when the transition conditions such as digestion or the passage of a predetermined predetermined time are satisfied. The decorative pattern image data, the background image data, the frequency of the effect, the appearance rate of the specific effect, and the like can be different between the normal stage and the special stage. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a player who is playing a game in the normal mode from losing the interest in the game.

The time-saving mode is a non-probable and time-saving gaming state production mode. The time reduction mode corresponds to the jackpot symbols of "time reduction 1" to "time reduction 5" when the jackpot symbols corresponding to the first special symbols "time reduction 1" to "time reduction 5" are stopped and displayed in the normal game state. It is executed after the end of the jackpot game state. For example, after the end of the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot symbols of "time reduction 1" and "time reduction 5", 100 times are given as the number of games until the special symbol game of 100 times is basically digested. Will be continued. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot symbols of "time reduction 2" to "time reduction 4", the game is given four times, basically until the four special symbol games are digested. Will be continued. In addition, even if the jackpot symbol corresponding to the "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6" of the first special symbol or the "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the final non-V prize is awarded. If it becomes, the mode shifts to the time saving mode of 100 times in the same manner as in "time saving 1" and "time saving 5". As described above, the time saving mode is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state when the non-V prize is finally obtained in the big hit gaming state.

In the time saving mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as the combination mode of "7", the effect mode shifts to the SP bonus, which is the second special symbol. In the time saving mode, the combination mode in which the decorative symbol is "7" is a jackpot symbol corresponding to the "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol. However, in the time saving mode, the combination mode in which the decorative symbols are "1" to "6" may be stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol corresponding to the "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol. Further, in the time saving mode, the game shifts to the normal mode when the special symbol game of 4 or 100 times given as the number of games is digested without the jackpot symbol being stopped and displayed. In the time saving mode, when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start storage information of the first special symbol described above, a bonus other than the SP bonus (during the first special symbol hit). , Live bonus, story bonus, or battle bonus). In this case, as the combination mode of the decorative symbol, the combination mode other than "7" is stopped and displayed, and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the first special symbol "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6" or "time reduction 1" to "time reduction 5" is displayed. Is shown to be.

The short mode of the time saving mode is executed as an effect mode that impresses when the number of games to be given is 4 times, and even if the number of games is 100 times, up to the 4th time which is the beginning of the game. Is to be executed. The long mode of the time saving mode is executed as an effect mode that impresses when the number of games to be given is 100 times. For example, when the number of games is the fourth or later from the start of the time saving mode, the short mode is executed. It may be executed with an effect mode that impresses the promotion from.

The ST mode is a production mode of a probabilistic and time-saving game state, and is executed in conjunction with the transition of the game state to the probable change game state (ST game state) after the end of the big hit game state that finally won the V prize. Is to be done. The ST mode is basically given 180 times as the number of games, and basically continues until 180 special symbol games are exhausted.

Even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as the combination mode of "7" in the ST mode, the system shifts to the SP bonus, which is the second special symbol, as in the case of the time saving mode. However, even in the ST mode, as a jackpot symbol corresponding to the "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol, the combination mode of the decorative symbols "1" to "6" may be stopped and displayed, and the time saving mode and the ST mode may be displayed. Then, the combination mode of the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed may be different. For example, in one mode, the combination mode in which the decorative symbol is "7" is made to correspond to the jackpot symbol corresponding to the "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol, and in the other mode, the decorative symbol is "1". The combination mode of "7" may be made to correspond to the jackpot symbol corresponding to the "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol. Even in the ST mode, if the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start storage information of the first special symbol described above, a bonus other than the SP bonus (per first special symbol). There may be a transition to a live bonus, story bonus, or battle bonus). In this case, as the combination mode of the decorative symbol, the combination mode other than "7" is stopped and displayed, and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the first special symbol "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6" or "time reduction 1" to "time reduction 5" is displayed. Is shown to be.

The story section of the ST mode is executed after the end of the big hit game state when the V prize is finally obtained in the big hit game state, and basically 51 special symbol games are digested. Will continue until. In this story section, a series of story productions are executed over a total of 10 sets, with 5 games as one set. In addition, the remaining number of games, one, is used to execute the effect (for example, title display, etc.) at the time of introduction of the series of stories at the beginning of the series of story effects to be executed. In the series of story productions executed in this story section, the story progresses even within the 50 games, and the story progresses each time it is executed in the series of story production units. A series of story productions progresses by the so-called "ream villa" in the jackpot game state in the ST mode.

The battle reach section of the ST mode is executed after the end of the story section of the ST mode, and is basically continued until the end of the ST mode. In this battle reach section, an effect of displaying the battle scene of one character (for example, an ally character) and another character (for example, an enemy character) is executed, and it is determined to perform reach as the effect content. Then, the result of the big hit determination is notified by executing the battle effect between the one character and the other character and displaying the victory or defeat. In addition, in this battle reach section, when it is decided to perform reach as the production content, the battle production will be performed regardless of the result of the big hit judgment (winning), but in the above-mentioned story section, the production content Even if it is decided to reach, if the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the progress of the story is prioritized and no special notification is given. As described above, in the ST mode, the story section and the battle reach section are provided so that different notifications are performed to improve the player's interest in the game.

The fluctuation pattern determination table (main fluctuation time determination table) to be referred to may be different between the story section and the battle reach section in the ST mode. That is, in the ST mode (ST game state), the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol may be determined with different selection probabilities according to the effect mode (story section and battle reach section). Specifically, in the story section of the ST mode, a fluctuation pattern (for example, shortened fluctuation) associated with a short fluctuation time (for example, 2s) has a high probability so that the progress of a series of story productions is prioritized. The fluctuation pattern determination table (main fluctuation time determination table) selected in is referred to, and in the battle reach section of the ST mode, a variation pattern (for example, normal) associated with a relatively long fluctuation time (for example, 6s) is associated. The fluctuation pattern determination table (main fluctuation time determination table) in which the variation) is selected with high probability may be referred to. In the story section of the ST mode, a variation pattern determination table (main variation time determination table) in which the selection probability of the variation pattern differs depending on the number of executions of the special symbol game may be referred to, and the battle in the ST mode may be referred to. In the reach section, a variation pattern determination table (main variation time determination table) in which the selection probability of the variation pattern differs depending on the number of times the special symbol game is executed may be referred to.

As for the live bonus during the first special symbol hit, the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol has hit patterns 1 and 2 (substantial 9R), hit pattern 3 (substantial 5R), hit pattern 7 (substantial 8R), and hit pattern 8. This is an effect mode that is executed in conjunction with the jackpot gaming states corresponding to (substantially 4R) and is executed as an effect mode that impresses these jackpot gaming states. In this live bonus, a predetermined song (any of the song patterns A to C) corresponding to the type of a more detailed hit pattern (for example, hit patterns 1-1 to 46) is selected, and the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c are used. It is output. Further, in conjunction with the output of the selected predetermined music, the effect of the display mode of the liquid crystal display device 4 and the effect of the light emission mode of the lamp / LED 27 are executed. In the live bonus, at the end of the production mode, if the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is the hit pattern 1 to 3, it is notified that the specific second round game is executed, and the hit pattern 7 Or, if it is 8, it is notified that the specific second round game is not executed.

During the first special symbol hit, it indicates that the game is in a big hit game state related to the first special symbol, and depending on the type of the hit pattern (big hit symbol), the live bonus, the story bonus, and the battle bonus production mode There is. During the first special symbol hit, it is executed when the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal mode. Further, although not shown in FIG. 49, it is also executed when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the time saving mode or the ST mode. After the end of the first special symbol hit, if the V prize is won in the big hit game state, the mode shifts to the ST mode, and if the non-V prize is won, the time saving mode is shifted.

The story bonus during the first special symbol hit is executed in conjunction with the jackpot game state in which the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol corresponds to the hit pattern 4 (substantial 5R) and the hit pattern 9 (substantial 4R). This is an effect mode that is executed as an effect mode that impresses the state of these big hit games. In this story bonus, a predetermined story production according to the type of hit pattern (may be a story production related to a series of story productions executed in the above-mentioned story section, or may be a non-related story production). Is selected and executed by the effect executing means. In the story bonus, when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is the hit pattern 4, it is notified that the specific second round game is executed at the final stage of the production mode, which is the hit pattern 9. In that case, it is notified that the specific second round game is not executed.

The battle bonus during the first special symbol hit is the jackpot game state in which the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol corresponds to the hit patterns 5 and 6 (substantially 5R) and the hit patterns 10 and 11 (substantially 0R). It is an effect mode that is executed in conjunction with each other and is executed as an effect mode that impresses these jackpot game states. In this battle bonus, a predetermined battle effect according to the type of hit pattern (may be a battle effect related to the battle effect executed in the above-mentioned battle reach section, or may be an unrelated battle effect). It is selected and executed by the effect executing means. In the battle bonus, when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is the hit pattern 5 or 6, the specific second round game is executed and the first round game is executed in the middle of the production mode. If the hit pattern is 10 or 11, it is notified that the specific second round game and the first round game are not executed.

During the second special symbol hit, it indicates that the game is in the big hit game state related to the second special symbol, and the type of the hit pattern (big hit symbol) (in the present embodiment, it is one of the hit patterns 12). Depending on (but not limited to), there is an SP bonus production mode. During the second special symbol hit, it is executed when the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the time saving mode or the ST mode. Further, as described above, it may be executed even when the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal mode. After the end of the second special symbol hit, the V prize is basically easy to win in all the big hit game states, so the mode shifts to the ST mode. Although not shown in FIG. 49, if the non-V prize is won in the big hit game state, the mode will be shifted to the time saving mode.

The SP bonus during the second special symbol hit is executed in conjunction with the jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol corresponds to the hit pattern 12 (substantially 16R), and impresses this jackpot gaming state. This is an effect mode executed as an effect mode. In this SP bonus, it is basically notified that the specific second round game is executed and that the first round game is executed the largest number of times as compared with other jackpot game states. In the SP bonus, when the second special symbol is hit in the time saving mode, the SP bonus hitting effect pattern in which the effect mode impressing the promotion from the time saving mode to the ST mode is executed is determined, and the ST mode is determined. In the case of the second special symbol hit in the story section of, the related story hit production pattern for SP bonus is determined to execute the production mode that impresses the "renso" in ST mode, and the battle reach section in ST mode. In the case of the second special symbol hit, the SP bonus battle hit effect pattern in which the effect mode that impresses the pullback of the big hit in the ST mode is executed is determined.

It should be noted that the transition between the production modes is possible with the transition of the gaming state, etc., even if not illustrated and explained, and is not limited to the range shown and explained.

[Game machine specifications]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, specifications relating to the gaming characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the present embodiment, the hit probability of the special symbol is 1 / 297.89 (220/65536) at the time of low probability (non-probability changing game state), and at the time of high probability (probability change game state). ) Is 1 / 122.96 (533/65536). As for the digestion order of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery by the second special symbol is prioritized and digested. As the probability fluctuation performance (specification of the probability variation game state), the ST game state in which the probability variation game state continues up to 180 times as the number of games (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) is implemented.

The distribution of special symbols is as follows. That is, in the big hit symbol "probability change 1" of the first special symbol, the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) becomes the winning pattern 1, and the number of rounds of the round game is 16R (of which the actual number of rounds that can easily win the big winning opening is 9R) is given, a live bonus is executed as the production mode of the jackpot game state, and the production content is "live bonus 9R success". The probability (rush rate) of "probability variation 1" as the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is set to 46/200 (hit patterns 1-1 to 46).

In the big hit symbol "Probability change 2" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is 2, and the number of rounds is 16R.
(Of which, the actual number of rounds is 9R) is given, the live bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is "live bonus 9R success". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 2" of the first special symbol is set to 1/200.
In the big hit symbol "Probability change 3" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is 3, and the number of rounds is 16R.
(Of which, the actual number of rounds is 5R) is given, the live bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is "live bonus 5R success". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 3" of the first special symbol is set to 18/200 (hit patterns 3-1 to 18).

In the big hit symbol "Probability change 4" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is 4, and the number of rounds is 16R.
(Of which, the actual number of rounds is 5R) is given, the story bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is "story bonus 5R success". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 4" of the first special symbol is set to 17/200 (hit patterns 4-1 to 17).

In the big hit symbol "probability change 5" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is 5, and the number of rounds is 16R.
(Of which, the actual number of rounds is 5R) is given, the battle bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is "Battle bonus 5R success". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 5" of the first special symbol is set to 20/200 (hit patterns 5-1 to 20).

In the big hit symbol "probability change 6" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is 6, and the number of rounds is 16R.
(Of which, the actual number of rounds is 5R) is given, the battle bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is "Battle bonus 5R success". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 6" of the first special symbol is set to 2/200 (hit patterns 6-1 and 2).

In the big hit symbol "time saving 1" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is 7, and the number of rounds is 16R.
(Of which, the actual number of rounds is 8R) is given, the live bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is "live bonus 8R failure". The inrush rate of the big hit symbol "time reduction 1" of the first special symbol is set to 16/200 (hit patterns 7-1 to 16).

In the big hit symbol "time reduction 2" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is 8, and the number of rounds is 16R.
(Of which, the actual number of rounds is 4R) is given, the live bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is "live bonus 4R failure". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "time saving 2" of the first special symbol is set to 17/200 (hit patterns 8-1 to 17).

In the big hit symbol "time saving 3" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is 9, and the number of rounds is 16R.
(Of which, the actual number of rounds is 4R) is given, the story bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is "story bonus 4R failure". The inrush rate of the big hit symbol "time reduction 3" of the first special symbol is set to 17/200 (hit patterns 9-1 to 17).

In the jackpot symbol "time reduction 4" or "time reduction 5" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is 10 or 11, and the number of rounds is 16R (of which the actual number of rounds is 0R), and the battle bonus is executed as the production mode. The content is "Battle Bonus 0R Failure". The inrush rate of the big hit symbol "time reduction 4" or "time reduction 5" of the first special symbol is set to 23/200 (hit patterns 10-1 to 23 or hit patterns 11-1 to 23).

In the big hit symbol "Probability 1" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is 12, the number of rounds is 16R (of which the actual number of rounds is 16R), the SP bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is "SP bonus 16R". ". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol is set to 1/1 (that is, 100%).

The number of large winning openings is set so that the maximum number of winnings per round is 9 for both the 1st major winning opening 36 and the 2nd major winning opening 37. The time-saving performance (specification of the time-saving gaming state) is set so that the time-saving gaming state continues up to 100 times or 4 times in the high-probability (probability-changing gaming state) or in the non-probability-changing gaming state. .. The number of prize balls is 3 for each prize in the first starting port 32, 1 for each prize in the 2nd starting port 33, and 1 prize for the general prize openings 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D. The number of prizes is set to 10 per prize, and 14 prizes are set for each prize in the prize openings (1st prize winner 36 and 2nd prize winner 37).

The hit probability of a normal symbol is set to be 0 at a low probability and 1/1 at a high probability. The number of hit symbols of a normal symbol is set to one.

[1 round opening / closing pattern]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening in one round will be described.

As shown in FIG. 51, a plurality of opening / closing patterns A to C are defined as a one-round opening / closing pattern (one-round opening / closing pattern) in the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37. The first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 are simply referred to as the big winning opening unless it is necessary to distinguish them. The opening / closing patterns A to C shown in FIG. 51 are merely examples, and the specific time and the like that define the opening / closing pattern may be other than those shown in the figure.

The opening / closing pattern A is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state continues for 27.222s. The opening / closing pattern A is defined as a round section from the first opening state to the final closing state. Similarly, in other opening / closing patterns, the round section is defined as the period from the first open state to the final closed state. In the section where the open state is 27.222s, the open state of the big winning opening is relatively long and long. That is, in the opening / closing pattern A, one long opening occurs, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern A is 27.222s.

The opening / closing pattern B is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state is initially 0.102 s, the closed state is 2.898 s, and then the open state continues for 27.222 s again. In the section where the open state is 0.102 s, the open state of the big winning opening is relatively short, which is a short opening. That is, in the opening / closing pattern B, after the short opening occurs once, the long opening occurs once after passing through the closed state once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern B is 27.324 s. In the open state where the short is open, it is extremely difficult to win the game ball to the big winning opening, while in the open state where it is long open, it is possible and easy to win the game ball to the big winning opening. ing. Such short opening is the same in the opening / closing pattern C described later.

The opening / closing pattern C is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state is only for 0.102 s. That is, the opening / closing pattern C has only one short opening, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern C is 0.102 s.

As described above, the substantial round game in the big hit game state corresponds to the round game when the opening / closing is controlled based on the opening / closing pattern A or B described above. The round game when the opening / closing is controlled based on the opening / closing pattern C is a non-substantial round game that does not correspond to the real round game.

[Displacement member operation pattern]
Next, the operation pattern of the displacement member 39 that opens and closes the specific region 38A will be described with reference to FIG. 52.

The displacement member 39 basically operates in conjunction with the open / closed state of the second large winning opening 37. As shown in FIG. 52, as for the operation pattern of the displacement member 39 (displacement member operation pattern), as a general rule, the specific area 38A is closed after the operation period of opening the specific area 38A for 0.102 s for the first time. It is defined as an operation pattern in which the non-operation period is 2.898 s, and then the operation period continues for a maximum of 29.222 s. The total operating time of the displacement member operating pattern is 32.222s. During the operation period of 0.102 s, the open state of the specific region 38A becomes relatively short, so that it becomes extremely difficult to win a V prize in the specific region 38A. On the other hand, during the operation period of 29.222 s at the longest, the open state of the specific region 38A is relatively long, so that it is relatively easy to win a V prize in the specific region 38A. For the maximum operating period of 29.222s, in one round in which the second large winning opening 37 is opened and closed, for example, the second large winning opening 37 is closed when the number of large winning opening counts reaches the upper limit winning number. When the state is reached and the predetermined monitoring processing time for the residual sphere, which will be described later, has passed, the displacement member 39 is inactive and the specific area 38A is closed even before the predetermined maximum 29.222 s has elapsed. May become.

[Large winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit game state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 53, a plurality of hit patterns 1 to 12 are defined as the large winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern). The winning patterns 1 and 2 are generated at the time of the live bonus (live bonus 9R success), and the number of rounds specified for the rounds that are generally open (hereinafter referred to as "specified number of rounds") is 16R, and the big winning opening. This is a winning pattern in which the actual number of rounds that can be won is defined as 9R. In addition, the interval between rounds is a section in which the big winning opening is closed after the big winning opening is closed last in one round until the big winning opening is first opened in the next round. Correspondingly, as shown in the figure, as the pattern of the interval between rounds, an interval pattern a in which the closed state (closing time) is 1200 ms and an interval pattern b in which the closed state is 102 ms are defined. In the hit patterns 1 and 2, the interval between all rounds is the interval pattern b, the second big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B at the 10th round, and the first big winning opening 36 opens / closes at the 1st to 8th rounds. It is specified to be pattern A. That is, the hit patterns 1 and 2 are 9 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is 1R to 8R and 10R, and only the 10R is executed as a round in which V winning to the specific area 38A is easy.

The hit pattern 3 occurs at the time of a live bonus (live bonus 5R success), and is a hit pattern in which the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is 5R. In the hit pattern 3, all the intervals between rounds are the interval pattern b, the second big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B at the 10th round, and the first big winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern A at the 1st to 4th rounds. It is stipulated to be. That is, the hit pattern 3 is executed as a round in which the actual number of rounds is 5 rounds of the 1st to 4th rounds and the 10th round, and it is easy to win a V in the specific area 38A only in the 10th round.

The winning pattern 4 occurs at the time of the story bonus (successful story bonus 5R), and is a winning pattern in which the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is 5R. In the hit pattern 4, all the intervals between rounds are the interval pattern b, the second big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B at the 10th round, and the first big winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern A at the 1st to 4th rounds. It is stipulated to be. That is, the hit pattern 4 is executed as a round in which the actual number of rounds is 5 rounds of the 1st to 4th rounds and the 10th round, and it is easy to win a V in the specific area 38A only in the 10th round.

The hit patterns 5 and 6 occur at the time of the battle bonus (successful battle bonus 5R), and are the hit patterns in which the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is 5R. In the winning patterns 5 and 6, the interval between rounds between the 1st and 10th rounds is the interval pattern a, the other intervals between the rounds are the interval pattern b, and the second big winning opening 37 is in the 10th round. It is stipulated that the opening / closing pattern B is formed and the first large winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 11th to 14th rounds. That is, the hit patterns 5 and 6 are 5 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the 10th to 14th rounds, and only the 10th round is executed as a round in which the V winning to the specific area 38A is easy.

The hit pattern 7 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of a live bonus (live bonus 8R failure), and the specified number of rounds is 16R, of which the actual number of rounds is 8R. In the hit pattern 7, all the intervals between rounds are the interval pattern b, and the first large winning opening 36 is defined to be the opening / closing pattern A in the 1st to 8th rounds. That is, the hit pattern 7 is 8 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the 1st to 8th rounds, and the round in which the V winning to the specific area 38A is easy is not executed.

The hit pattern 8 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of a live bonus (live bonus 4R failure), and the specified number of rounds is 16R, of which the actual number of rounds is defined as 4R. In the hit pattern 8, all the intervals between rounds are the interval pattern b, and the first large winning opening 36 is defined to be the opening / closing pattern A in the 1st to 4th rounds. That is, the hit pattern 8 is 4 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the 1st to 4th rounds, and the round in which the V winning to the specific area 38A is easy is not executed.

The winning pattern 9 occurs at the time of the story bonus (story bonus 4R failure), and is a winning pattern in which the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is 4R. In the hit pattern 9, all the intervals between rounds are the interval pattern b, and the first large winning opening 36 is defined to be the opening / closing pattern A in the 1st to 4th rounds. That is, the hit pattern 9 is 4 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the 1st to 4th rounds, and the round in which the V winning to the specific area 38A is easy is not executed.

The hit patterns 10 and 11 occur at the time of a battle bonus (battle bonus 0R failure), and are hit patterns in which the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is 0R. In the hit patterns 10 and 11, the interval between rounds between the 1st and 10th rounds is the interval pattern a, the other intervals between the rounds are the interval pattern b, and the first in all of the 1st to 16th rounds. The large winning opening 36 is specified to have an opening / closing pattern C. That is, in the hit patterns 10 and 11, the actual number of rounds is 0R, and the round in which the V prize in the specific area 38A is easy is not executed.

The hit pattern 12 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the SP bonus (live bonus 16R), and the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is also 16R. In the hit pattern 12, all the intervals between rounds are the interval pattern b, the second big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B at the 10th round, and the first big winning opening at the 1st to 9th R and the 11th to 16th R. 36 is specified to be the opening / closing pattern A. That is, the hit pattern 12 is 16 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the same as the specified number of rounds, and is executed as a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy only in the 10th round.

In addition, in the hit patterns 1 to 6 and 12, it is assumed that a round (specific second round game) in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy is executed only in the 10th round, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. , The specific second round game may be executed in other rounds (1st to 9th rounds, 11th to 16th rounds). Further, in these hit patterns, a plurality of specific second round games may be executed. Further, in each of the above-mentioned hit patterns including these hit patterns, the second large winning opening 37 is opened, but a round (usually the second round game) in which it is difficult to win a V in the specific area 38A is executed. May be. Further, in FIG. 53, as the interval between rounds, the portion where the interval pattern a is defined may be defined as the interval pattern b, or the location where the interval pattern b is defined may be defined as the interval pattern a. That is, various modifications are made according to the production mode in the jackpot game state (live bonus, story bonus, battle bonus, or hitting the second special symbol, SP bonus). It can be performed.

[Various tables]
Next, various tables referred to by the sub CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56. The table defines lottery value (random number value) information for determining a predetermined item based on a lottery value (random number value) extracted (lottery) from a predetermined random number range. Value information is synonymous with the so-called lottery rate. The lottery price information (lottery rate) can be changed as appropriate. In the following description, the "random number value" may be simply referred to as a "random number".

<Sub-production content determination table>
54 and 55 are diagrams showing a part of the sub-effect content determination table. The sub-effect content determination table is a table referred to in the effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 83 described later) of the sub CPU 71 described later, and the jackpot determination is made for each effect mode (or may be for each game state). Various results (winning), current game status (non-probability / non-time reduction, non-probability / time reduction, probability variation / time reduction), type of variation pattern specification command, random number range for sub-effect selection (lottery value), etc. The type of effect pattern (sub-effect content) to be determined is defined according to the parameters. In addition, the sub-effect content determination table shown in FIGS. 54 and 55 is used in the sub-effect content determination table in order to explain the item look-ahead effect (see FIGS. 43 to 48 and FIGS. 111 to 113 described later) in the present embodiment. This is an excerpt of a part of the specified item look-ahead effect, and the effect content of the item look-ahead effect and other effect contents are not limited to this. The item look-ahead effect is an effect for notifying the degree of expectation as to whether or not it is determined that a big hit is achieved by displaying an item (for example, plates A to D described later).

In the sub-effect content determination table shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the effect patterns of the item look-ahead effects 1 to 24, which are the item effect contents, are defined, and 1 is based on the respective selection probabilities (random number range for sub-effect selection). The production pattern of is determined. Further, in the item look-ahead effects 1 to 24, which are the item effect contents, the plate A, the plate B, the plate C, and the plate D are defined as a plurality of items, and the number (number of sheets) of each plate is specified. ing. Further, although not shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the item look-ahead effects 1 to 24, which are the item effect contents, include a pseudo-continuous effect described later as a plurality of expectation types, a dialogue effect described later, and a dialogue effect described later. A cut-in effect and other promotion (reversal) effects described later are stipulated, and the degree of expectation (the stage indicating the level of the degree of expectation) is stipulated. Here, the plate A corresponds to the pseudo-continuous production as the expectation type, the plate B corresponds to the dialogue production as the expectation type, and the plate C corresponds to the cut-in production as the expectation type. The plate D corresponds to other promotion (reversal) effects as an expectation type. The expectation type is the effect itself that notifies different types of expectations in each effect that constitutes a part of the item look-ahead effect (more specifically, the effect executed in the item use effect process described later). It indicates the stage of the degree of expectation, and the degree of expectation of whether or not it is decided that the item look-ahead effect as a whole will be a big hit will be determined by integrating these degrees of expectation.

<Hit production pattern determination table>
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a hit effect pattern determination table. The hit effect pattern determination table is a table referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 91 described later) of the sub CPU 71 described later, and the hit effect determined according to the lottery value for each type of the hit pattern. The type of pattern is specified. In the hit effect pattern determination table, as the types of hit effect patterns, music patterns A to C constituting the live bonus, story patterns D and E constituting the story bonus, and battle patterns F and G constituting the battle bonus are defined. ing. The lottery value defines the lottery value information when the random number range is 32768, and the lottery rate when the lottery value is 32768 is 32768/32768, that is, 100%. However, the hit effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 56 shows an example, and the defined lottery value information (lottery rate) is not limited to this.

In addition to the music pattern A, the music pattern A (success) that constitutes the success of the live bonus 9R, the music pattern A (reversal) that constitutes the success of the live bonus 5R, the music pattern that constitutes the failure of the live bonus 8R, and the music pattern that constitutes the failure of the live bonus 4R. There is a hit effect pattern of A (failure). That is, the music pattern A (success) or the music pattern A as the hit effect pattern.
When (reversal) is determined, it is basically confirmed that the ST mode (special game state) is entered after the end of the big hit game state. On the other hand, when the music pattern A (failure) is determined as the hit effect pattern, it is basically determined that the mode does not shift to the ST mode but shifts to the time saving mode after the end of the big hit game state.

In the music pattern B, the music pattern B (success) constituting the live bonus 9R success, the music pattern B (reversal) constituting the live bonus 5R success, the music pattern constituting the live bonus 8R failure and the live bonus 4R failure are further added. There is a B (failure) hit effect pattern. That is, the music pattern B (success) or the music pattern B as the hit effect pattern.
When (reversal) is determined, it is basically confirmed that the ST mode (special game state) is entered after the end of the big hit game state. On the other hand, when the music pattern B (failure) is determined as the hit effect pattern, it is basically determined that the music pattern B (failure) does not shift to the ST mode after the end of the big hit game state, but shifts to the time saving mode.

The music pattern C is one type of the music pattern C (confirmed), and when the music pattern C (confirmed) is determined as the hit effect pattern, the ST mode (special game state) is basically after the end of the big hit game state. ) Is confirmed. The music patterns A to C are music patterns in which different music is output, and the degree of expectation that the transition to the ST mode (special gaming state) is determined differs depending on the type of the output music. It has become.

The music pattern A (success) is associated with the hit patterns 1-1 to 8 (that is, eight hit patterns), and the music pattern A (failure) is associated with the hit patterns 7-1 to 12 (that is, 12 hit patterns). It is associated with the hit pattern). Here, the hit pattern 1 is a hit pattern in which the first round game for 8R minutes (1 to 8R) is executed, and then the specific second round game for 1R minutes (10R) is executed, and the hit pattern 7 is a hit pattern 7. , This is a hit pattern in which the specific second round game is not executed after the first round game for 8R minutes (1 to 8R) is executed. That is, when the music pattern A is determined and the first round game for 8R (1 to 8R) is executed, the expectation that the specific second round game is executed is 40 on 8/20. It becomes%.

Further, the music pattern A (reversal) is associated with the hit patterns 3-1 to 6 (that is, six hit patterns), and the music pattern A (failure) is the hit patterns 8-1 to 9 (that is, 9). It is associated with the hit pattern). Here, the hit pattern 3 is a hit pattern in which the first round game for 4R minutes (1 to 4R) is executed, and then the specific second round game for 1R minutes (10R) is executed, and the hit pattern 8 is a hit pattern 8. This is a hit pattern in which the specific second round game is not executed after the first round game for 4R minutes (1 to 4R) is executed. That is, when the music pattern A is determined and the first round game for 4R minutes (1 to 4R) is executed, the expectation that the specific second round game is executed is 40 on 6/15. It becomes%.

Music pattern B (success) is associated with hit patterns 1-9 to 14 (that is, 6 hit patterns), and music pattern B (failure) is associated with hit patterns 7-13 to 16 (that is, 4 hit patterns). It is associated with the hit pattern). That is, when the music pattern B is determined and the first round game for 8R (1 to 8R) is executed, the expectation that the specific second round game is executed is 60 at 6/10. It becomes%.

Further, the music pattern B (reversal) is associated with the hit patterns 3-7 to 18 (that is, 12 hit patterns), and the music pattern B (failure) is the hit patterns 8-10 to 17.
(That is, it is associated with eight hit patterns). That is, when the music pattern B is determined and the first round game for 4R (1 to 4R) is executed, the expectation that the specific second round game is executed is 60 on 12/20. It becomes%.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the specific first when the music pattern B is selected rather than the expectation (40%) that the specific second round game is executed when the music pattern A is selected. It is configured so that the expectation (60%) that the two-round game is executed is higher. With this configuration, it is possible to change the degree of expectation between songs, and it is possible to further increase the expectation of the player in the live bonus (specific gaming state).

In addition, for example, in the music pattern A, when the first round game of 4R minutes (1 to 4R) is executed, the expectation degree (that is, the hit pattern 3 or the hit pattern 8) in which the specific second round game is executed is determined. 8R minutes (1) than the expectation that the music pattern A (reversal) is selected when either the music pattern A (reversal) or the music pattern A (failure) is selected when the music pattern A (reversal) is selected. When the first round game of (8R) is executed, the expectation level at which the specific second round game is executed (that is, when the hit pattern 1 or the hit pattern 7 is determined, the music pattern A (success)). And the expectation that the music pattern A (success) is selected when any one of the music pattern B (failure) is selected) may be configured to be higher.

Specifically, the music pattern A (reversal) is associated with the hit pattern 3 (that is, 18 hit patterns), and the music pattern A (failure) is associated with the hit pattern 8 (that is, 17 hit patterns). , Music pattern A (success) may be associated with hit pattern 1 (that is, 46 hit patterns), and music pattern A (failure) may be associated with hit pattern 7 (that is, 16 hit patterns). In this case, when either the music pattern A (reversal) or the music pattern A (failure) is selected (for example, 18 + 17 = 35/200), the music pattern A (reversal) occupying the expected degree (for example) is selected. It is expected that the music pattern A (success) in the case where either the music pattern A (success) or the music pattern A (failure) is selected (for example, 46 + 16 = 62/200) is selected rather than 18/35). The degree (eg, 46/62) can be increased. With this configuration, the second intersection of the music pattern A (for example, the B melody of the second section described later) is output after the elapse of a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section described later). Since the expectation that the specific second round game is executed is relatively high, the role of a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section described later) can be diversified, and the jackpot game state (for example, the first branch section described later) can be diversified. It is possible to further increase the expectation of the player in the specific game state).

[Control by main CPU]
Next, the processes executed by the main CPU 61 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 57 to 76.

[Main processing by the main CPU]
57 and 58 are flowcharts showing the main processing executed by the main CPU 61. This main process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 57, in S10, the main CPU 61 performs a watchdog timer disable setting process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S11.

In S11, the main CPU 61 performs input / output port setting processing. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in a power failure detection state. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is HIGH (high level). If the power failure detection signal is not HIGH, it is determined that it is in the power failure detection state and the process is transferred to S12. If the power failure detection signal is HIGH, it is determined that it is not in the power failure detection state and processing is performed in S13. Move.

In S13, the main CPU 61 performs sub-control reception reception wait processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of waiting until the sub-control circuit 70 receives a signal. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S14.

In S14, the main CPU 61 performs a process of permitting writing to the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S15.

In S15, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the backup clear switch 81 (see FIG. 6) is ON. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the backup clear switch 81 is ON, the process is transferred to S30 (see FIG. 58), and when it is determined that the backup clear switch 81 is not ON, the process is changed to S16. Move the process.

In S16, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a power failure detection flag. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that there is a power failure detection flag, the process is transferred to S17, and if it is determined that there is no power failure detection flag, the process is transferred to S30 (see FIG. 58). ..

In S17, the main CPU 61 performs a process of checking the damage in the work area and calculating the work damage check value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the work damage check value is a normal value. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the work damage check value is a normal value, the process is transferred to S19, and when it is determined that the work damage check value is not a normal value, the process is transferred to S30. ..

In S19, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting 7FFEH in the stack pointer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 61 performs the initial setting process of the work area at the time of power recovery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S21.

In S21, the main CPU 61 performs a probability change state display notification setting process at the time of power recovery. Specifically, the main CPU 61 is configured to display that the jackpot winning probability is in the high probability state in the case of the probabilistic gaming state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S22. The display to be notified may be configured to end at the first fluctuation start or fluctuation end after the power is turned on.

In S22, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power recovery. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power interruption to the sub-control circuit 70. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 61 performs initial settings for devices around the main CPU 61. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S24, and the process is restored to the address before the power failure, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter restored from the stack area.

As shown in FIG. 57, in S30, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the stack pointer to 8000H. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S31.

In S31, the main CPU 61 performs a process of acquiring the initial value of the random number related to the hit determination. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 61 performs the entire work area clearing process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting an initial value of a random number related to hit determination. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 61 performs the initial setting process of the work area at the time of the initialization of the RAM. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of initialization of the main RAM 63 to the sub-control circuit 70. Further, in the sub control circuit 70, the main CPU 61 is initialized based on the received command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 61 performs initial settings for devices around the main CPU 61. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S37.

In S37, the main CPU 61 performs interrupt prohibition processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of prohibiting the interrupt process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 61 performs the initial value random number update process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt permission process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of permitting the interrupt process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the random number for selecting the effect condition. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the random number counter value for effect. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 63, and if the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, the process is transferred to S42 and the system timer monitoring timer value is 3. If it is not the above, the process is transferred to S37.

In S42, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 61 performs a timer update process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 60 and the sub control circuit 70, and a large winning opening for measuring the opening time of the large winning opening to be opened when a big hit occurs. Various types of timers such as an open time timer and a security signal output timer for measuring the minimum output period of a security signal output from the main CPU 61 to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal plate 80 when it is detected that there is an illegal act. Execute the process to update the timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 extracts a hit determination random value and a hit symbol determination random value according to the detection signals from the first start port switch 320 and the second start port switch 330. Then, with reference to the jackpot determination table (not shown) stored in the main ROM 62, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) has been won, and the determination result is stored in the main RAM 63. The special symbol control process of S44 will be described later with reference to FIG. 67. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S45.

In S45, the main CPU 61 normally performs a symbol control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether to make a lost symbol or a hit symbol based on the hit probability of the normal symbol (see FIG. 50) according to the detection signal from the passing gate switch 350, and makes a determination. Performs the process of storing the result. If the normal symbol lottery is won, the result of the determination indicating the winning symbol is stored, and if the non-winning symbol is won, the result of the determination indicating the lost symbol is stored. When the result of the determination indicating the winning symbol is stored, the blade member 34 is opened three times in 1.3 seconds, four times in 1.4 seconds, or six times in 1.8 seconds, for example. do. That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the blade member 34 is opened, and when the blade member 34 is in the open state, the game ball is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 33. The main CPU 61 extracts a normal symbol determination random value and a normal symbol determination random value according to a detection signal from the passing gate switch 350, and stores the extracted normal symbol determination random value and the main ROM 62. Based on the normal symbol winning table (not shown), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery has been won, and the result of this determination, the random value for determining the normal symbol, and the normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 62 (illustrated). (Omitted) may be used to determine whether to use a lost symbol or a hit symbol. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S46.

In S46, the main CPU 61 performs a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 transmits a control signal for driving the liquid crystal display device 4 according to the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 63 in S44 and S45 and the result of the normal symbol control process. Performs the process of storing in. The main CPU 61 transmits the control signal to the LED unit 5. The LED unit 5 variablely displays and stops the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the received control signal. Further, the normal symbol display unit 51 of the LED unit 5 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner and a stop display based on the received control signal. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S47.

In S47, the main CPU 61 performs game information data generation processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 generates data related to the game information signal to be transmitted to the stand computer or the hall computer 100, and performs a process of storing the data in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S48.

In S48, the main CPU 61 performs a symbol hold number data generation process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has the first start port switch 320, the second start port switch 320, which is detected by the special symbol-related switch check process and the normal symbol-related switch check process (S91, S92 in FIG. 61) in the timer interrupt process described later. The first is based on the detection signal from the start port switch 330 and the passing gate switch 350, and the update result of the hold number data stored in the main RAM 63 which is updated according to the execution of the variation display of the special symbol and the normal symbol. A process of storing a control signal for driving the special symbol hold display unit 55, the second special symbol hold display unit 56, and the normal symbol hold display unit 52 is performed in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S49.

In S49, the main CPU 61 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of outputting a control signal stored in the main RAM 63 from each port in the above steps and the like. Specifically, the main CPU 61 outputs a security signal to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80, an LED power supply (common signal) for lighting the LED, a first grand prize opening shutter 36A, and a second grand prize. It supplies solenoid power for driving a solenoid that opens and closes the mouth shutter 37A and opens and closes the blade member 34. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S50.

In S50, the main CPU 61 performs command control processing related to the winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of controlling a winning opening-related command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S37.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the processing in S38 to S50 of the main processing by the main CPU 61 constitutes the gaming processing.

[Timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 61]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 61. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following step units. The main CPU 61 may interrupt the main process and execute the timer interrupt process even when the main process is being executed. This timer interrupt process is a process performed according to a clock pulse generated every predetermined cycle (for example, 2 ms) from a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown). In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process by the main CPU 61 constitutes the interrupt process.

As shown in FIG. 59, in S60, the main CPU 61 performs a register save process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of saving the register. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S61.

In S61, the main CPU 61 performs a timer update process. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of increasing the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63 by +1. The system timer monitoring timer is a monitoring timer for executing a predetermined process (special symbol control process, etc.) on condition that the timer interrupt process is started a predetermined number of times (three times). The timer update process of S61 will be described later with reference to FIG. 93. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting clear data in the watchdog output data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets clear data in the watchdog output data and transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 64. The initial reset circuit 64 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. When a predetermined time (for example, 3100 ms) determined by the capacity of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 64 has elapsed after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 64 is cleared, the initial reset circuit 64 to the main CPU 61 A system reset signal is output to. The main CPU 61 is in a system reset state when a system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 64. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 61 performs random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating a random number. For example, the main CPU 61 updates random numbers such as a hit determination random number counter, a hit symbol determination random number counter, and an effect condition determination random number counter. Note that the random number counter for hit determination and the random number counter for determining the winning symbol lack fairness if the update timing of the counter value is undefined. Therefore, in order to guarantee this, the timing is fixed every 2 ms. I am trying to update with. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 61 performs a switch input process. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not each switch corresponding to each winning area or the like has detected a winning. For example, when the main CPU 61 detects a winning, the bit corresponding to the winning area determined to have won is set to "1 (ON)". The switch input process of S64 will be described later with reference to FIG. 61. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S65.

In S65, the main CPU 61 performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has won a prize in the first prize opening 36, the second prize opening 37, the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, and the general winning openings 40A, 40B, 40C, and 40D. Whether or not it is checked, and if there is a prize, the payout request command corresponding to each is transmitted to the payout / launch control circuit 82. That is, the main CPU 61 sets a command for paying out the prize ball corresponding to the winning area whose bit is "1 (ON)" with the winning of the game ball from the payout device 83, and the set command. Is sent to the payout / launch control circuit 82. Further, when this command is set, the bit corresponding to the winning area that triggered the command set is controlled to "0 (OFF)". When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 61 performs command transmission control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 transmits each set command to the command input port 74 of the sub-control circuit 70 through the command output port 66. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S67.

In S67, the main CPU 61 performs a register return process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of returning the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this processing is completed, this timer interrupt processing routine is terminated.

[Timer update process]
FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a timer update process executed by the main CPU 61. This timer update process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 60, in S70, the main CPU 61 adds 1 to the value of the system timer monitoring timer. The system timer monitoring timer is a timer for counting the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed (started). In the present embodiment, when the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed (started) reaches a predetermined condition (three times), a predetermined process (special symbol control process, etc.) is executed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S71.

In S71, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the waiting time timer. The waiting time timer is a timer for timing various execution waiting times. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S72.

In S72, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is “0”. The residual ball monitoring timer is a ball passage from the first big winning opening 36 to the first big winning opening count switch 360, and a ball passage from the second big winning opening 37 to the second big winning opening count switch 370. It is a timer for measuring the residual sphere monitoring processing time for monitoring the residual spheres remaining in the switch. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0", the process is transferred to S77, and when it is determined that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S77. , S73. If the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0" and the large winning opening count switch detects a game ball when the round game is not in progress, an error may be notified.

In S73, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the residual ball monitoring timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S74.

In S74, the main CPU 61 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is “0”. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is not "0", it shifts the process to S77, and if it determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S77. , S75.

In S75, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the specific area 38A is open. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the specific area 38A is not open, the process is transferred to S77, and if it is determined that the specific area 38A is open, the process is transferred to S76.

In S76, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the specific area closure data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets data for closing the specific area 38A, and drives the displacement member solenoid 390 based on the control signal based on this data. As a result, the displacement member 39 is driven so as to close the specific region 38A. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S77. As described above, in the present embodiment, the value of the residual ball monitoring timer becomes "0" after the second big winning opening 37 ends the long opening (the section where the opening state is 27.222s) and becomes the closed state. Then, the displacement member 39 is forcibly controlled from the operating state to the non-operating state, so that the specific region 38A is changed from the open state to the closed state. That is, the specific region 38A is closed after an open state of about 28.320s, which is slightly shorter than 29.222s defined as the longest operating period by the displacement member operating pattern shown in FIG. 52.

In S77, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the emission monitoring timer is “0”. The discharge monitoring timer is a timer for measuring the discharge ball monitoring processing time for monitoring the discharge balls discharged by winning a prize in the second large winning opening 37. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S80 when it is determined that the value of the emission monitoring timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the emission monitoring timer is not "0", it is S78. Move the process to. In the present embodiment, a smaller value (shorter time) is set in the residual ball monitoring timer than in the discharge monitoring timer, but the same value or a larger value (longer time) may be set.

In S78, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the emission monitoring timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S79.

In S79, the main CPU 61 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the emission monitoring timer is not "0", it terminates this timer update processing routine, and when it determines that the value of the emission monitoring timer is "0". Moves the process to S80.

In S80, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is “10”. The large winning opening opening count counter is a counter used to identify the 10th round on which the second large winning opening 37 opens and closes. Therefore, the value of the large winning opening opening count counter does not count the number of times that the first major winning opening 36 and the second major winning opening 37 are actually opened, but is added by 1 for each round. be. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is not "10", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S82 and determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is "10". If so, the process is transferred to S81.

In S81, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag described later is a value (04H) indicating the process of opening the large winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening, the timer update processing routine is terminated, and the control state flag indicates the processing during opening of the large winning opening. If it is determined that the value is not (04H), the process is transferred to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second large winning opening winning counter is larger than the value of the ejection ball counter. The second big winning opening winning counter is a counter for counting the number of winnings to the second big winning opening 37 detected by the second big winning opening count switch 370. The discharge ball counter is a counter for counting the number of discharge balls of the game ball detected by the specific area switch 380A and the non-specific area switch 380B. Basically, the value of the second big winning opening winning counter and the value of the ejection ball counter are the same. In this process, if the value of the second big winning opening winning counter is not larger than the value of the ejection ball counter, the main CPU 61 ends this timer update processing routine, and the value of the second big winning opening winning counter becomes. If it is larger than the value of the discharge ball counter, the process is transferred to S83. The value set in the discharge monitoring timer is longer than the time required from the time when the game ball is detected by the second special winning opening count switch 370 to the time when it is detected by the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B. Corresponds to time. Therefore, if it is determined in this process that the value of the 2nd big winning opening winning counter is larger than the value of the ejection ball counter, the ball is clogged inside the 2nd big winning opening 37 or the 2nd big due to so-called goto action. It is assumed that only the winning opening count switch 370 is detected.

In S83, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a discharge error command. The ejection error command corresponds to a command for notifying that the ejection has not been performed normally. This discharge error command is transmitted in the command transmission control process in the timer interrupt process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the second large winning opening winning counter in the ejection ball counter. This prevents the discharge error command from being sent repeatedly. When this processing is completed, the timer update processing routine is terminated. It should be noted that the discharge error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the processing of S84.

[Switch input processing]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a switch input process executed by the main CPU 61. This switch input process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 61, in S90, the main CPU 61 performs a fraud detection switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 confirms the detection state of a radio wave sensor (not shown) capable of detecting radio waves, a magnetic sensor capable of detecting magnetism, a vibration sensor capable of detecting vibration, and the like. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S91. If any of the above sensors is in the detected state, an error notification may be performed, and at that time, for example, even if the large winning opening count switch detects the winning of the game ball, the winning is invalidated. You may try to do it.

In S91, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol-related switch check process. This special symbol-related switch check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 62. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 61 performs a normal symbol-related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not there is an input of the passing gate switch 350, in other words, whether or not a game ball is detected, and if it is determined that there is an input, the reserved number is an upper limit (for example,). It is determined whether or not the number is 4), and if it is determined that the upper limit is satisfied, this process is terminated. If it is determined that the upper limit is not reached, a process of outputting a detection signal is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 61 performs a prize ball-related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an input of the general winning opening left switch 400A, the general winning opening right switch 400B, the first starting port switch 320, and the second starting port switch 330. When it is determined that the input of the general winning opening left switch 400A or the general winning opening right switch 400B is input, the process of adding 1 to the value of the general winning opening winning ball counter is performed, and the first starting opening switch 320 or the second starting is started. When it is determined that the input of the mouth switch 330 has been input, a process of adding 1 to the value of the starting mouth winning counter corresponding to each is performed. When this processing is completed, this switch input processing routine is terminated.

[Special symbol related switch check processing]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a special symbol-related switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol-related switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 62, in S100, the main CPU 61 performs a first start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 61 performs a second start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S102.

In S102, the main CPU 61 performs the first big winning opening switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 65. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S103.

In S103, the main CPU 61 performs the second big winning opening switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 66. When this processing is completed, this special symbol-related switch check processing routine is terminated.

[1st start port switch check process]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a first start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This first start port switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 63, in S110, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 32 is detected based on the detection signal from the first starting port switch 320. conduct. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the first start port winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the first start port switch 320 is "1 (ON)", and determines whether or not the bit is "1 (ON)", and the first start port. When the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process is transferred to S111, and when the bit of the winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", this first starting port is used. Terminates the switch check processing routine.

In S111, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start storages of the first special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start storages of the first special symbol, that is, the number of holdings is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holdings is 4 or more, the first start port switch check processing routine is terminated, and if it is determined that the number of holdings is not 4 or more, the processing is transferred to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the number of start storages of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the reserved number of the first special symbol stored in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S113.

In S113, the main CPU 61 performs various random value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts the hit symbol determination random number value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. , The random number value for determining the effect condition is extracted from the random number counter for determining the effect condition and stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol start storage area is from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0). Judgment results based on the hit determination random numbers are derived and displayed by the first special symbol, and various types obtained by winning a prize in the first starting port 32 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing. The random number values of are sequentially stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S114.

In S114, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol fluctuation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S115.

In S115, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to perform a winning effect based on a random number lottery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S116.

In S116, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. This start winning command includes information indicating a random number for hit determination and information indicating a random number for determining a winning symbol. The start winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes that the game ball has won a prize and whether or not the winning lottery result has been won. It will be like. The data of the start winning command includes data for executing a winning effect, for example, an effect such as changing the display mode of the reserved ball to be displayed, when it is determined in the process of S115 that the winning effect is to be produced. This enables a so-called "look-ahead effect" in which the effect is executed based on the start memory before the variable execution. When this processing is completed, the first start port switch check processing routine is terminated.

[2nd start port switch check process]
FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a second start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This second start port switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 64, in S120, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 is detected based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 330. conduct. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the second start port winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the second start port switch 330 is "1 (ON)", and determines whether or not the bit is "1 (ON)", and the second start port. If the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process is transferred to S121, and if the bit of the winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", this second starting port is used. Terminates the switch check processing routine.

In S121, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start storages of the second special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start storages of the second special symbol, that is, the number of holdings is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holdings is 4 or more, the second start port switch check processing routine is terminated, and if it is determined that the number of holdings is not 4 or more, the processing is transferred to S122.

In S122, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the number of start storages of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the reserved number of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 61 performs various random value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts the hit symbol determination random number value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. , The random number value for determining the effect condition is extracted from the random number counter for determining the effect condition and stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63.

In the present embodiment, the second special symbol start storage area is from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0). Judgment results based on the hit determination random numbers are derived and displayed by the second special symbol, and various types obtained by winning a prize in the second starting port 33 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The random number values of are sequentially stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S124.

In S124, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S125.

In S125, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to perform a winning effect based on a random number lottery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S126.

In S126, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command is as described above. When this processing is completed, the second start port switch check processing routine is terminated.

[1st big prize opening switch check process]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a first large winning opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This first big winning opening switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 65, in S130, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball to the first winning opening 36 is detected based on the detection signal from the first winning opening count switch 360. Perform the processing. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball to the first large winning opening 36 is detected, the process is transferred to S131, and the winning of the game ball to the first large winning opening 36 is detected. If it is determined that this is not the case, the first large winning opening switch check processing routine is terminated.

In S131, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the first large winning opening winning counter. The first large winning opening winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the maximum number of winnings per round has been reached. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 61 sets the first big winning opening winning command in the predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The first big winning opening winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 wins the game ball to the first big winning opening 36. Become aware. As a result, for example, the total number of payouts (number of payout prize balls) displayed during the additional bonus is additionally displayed. When this process is completed, the first large winning opening switch check process routine is terminated.

[2nd prize opening switch check process]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a second big winning opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This second big winning opening switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 66, in S140, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening 37 is detected based on the detection signal from the second winning opening count switch 370. Perform the processing. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball to the second major winning opening 37 is detected, the process is transferred to S141, and the winning of the game ball to the second major winning opening 37 is detected. If it is determined that the process is not performed, the process is transferred to S143.

In S141, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the second large winning opening winning counter. The second major winning opening winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the maximum number of winnings per round has been reached. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 61 sets the second big winning opening winning command in the predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The second big winning opening winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 wins the game ball to the second big winning opening 37. Become aware. Also by this, for example, the total number of payouts (number of payout prize balls) displayed during the additional bonus is additionally displayed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S143.

In S143, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is detected based on the detection signal from the specific area switch 380A. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the V prize of the game ball in the specific area 38A is detected, the process is transferred to S144, and it is determined that the V prize of the game ball in the specific area 38A is not detected. In that case, the process is transferred to S152.

In S144, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the discharge ball counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S145.

In S145, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is “10”. The large winning opening opening counter is as described above. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening counter is not "10", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S152 and determines that the value of the large winning opening opening counter is "10". If so, the process is transferred to S146.

In S146, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag described later is a value (04H) indicating the process of opening the large winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S149, and the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening. ), The process is transferred to S147.

In S147, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag described later is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before restarting the large winning opening or a value (06H) indicating the winning end interval management process. I do. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control status flag is "05H" or "06H", it shifts the process to S148, and when it determines that the control status flag is neither "05H" nor "06H". Moves the process to S152.

In S148, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the emission monitoring timer is larger than "0". The emission monitoring timer is as described above. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the emission monitoring timer is larger than "0", the process is transferred to S149, and when it is determined that the value of the emission monitoring timer is not larger than "0". The process is transferred to S152. If it is determined in this process that the value of the emission monitoring timer is not greater than "0", it is determined that an illegal prize has occurred, and an error command is sent to the sub-control circuit 70 to notify the error. You may try to do it.

In S149, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the specific area passage flag is "01H". The specific area passage flag is an internal flag whose value is set as "01H" when the V winning of the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 380A. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the specific area passage flag is "01H", the process is transferred to S152, and if it is determined that the value of the specific area pass flag is not "01H", the main CPU 61 transfers the process to S152. , S150.

In S150, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the specific area passage flag. The value "01H" of the specific area passing flag is also used as internal information indicating that the transition to the probabilistic gaming state is determined after the end of the jackpot gaming state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S151.

In S151, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a specific area passage command. The specific area passage command is a command indicating that the game ball has passed (V winning) with respect to the specific area 38A. The specific area passage command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the V winning to the specific area 38A. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S152.

In S152, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the passage of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected based on the detection signal from the non-specific area switch 380B. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the passage of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected, the process is transferred to S153, and it is determined that the passage of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is not detected. In that case, the process is transferred to S154.

In S153, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the discharge ball counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S154.

In S154, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second large winning opening winning counter is smaller than the value of the ejection ball counter. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the game ball is detected only in the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B without detecting the game ball by the second big winning opening count switch 370. judge. In this process, if the value of the second big winning opening winning counter is not smaller than the value of the ejection ball counter, the main CPU 61 ends the second big winning opening switch check processing routine and ends the second big winning opening. If the value of the winning counter is smaller than the value of the ejection ball counter, the process is transferred to S155.

In S155, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a discharge error command. The discharge error command is as described above. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S156.

In S156, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the second large winning opening winning counter in the ejection ball counter. This prevents the discharge error command from being sent repeatedly. When this process is completed, the second special winning opening switch check process routine is terminated. It should be noted that the discharge error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the processing of S156.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol control process is executed in the following step units. In FIG. 67, the numerical values shown on the sides of S161 to S168 indicate the control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the storage area of the control state flags in the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 63. As a result, the special symbol game will proceed.

As shown in FIG. 67, in the first S160, the main CPU 61 executes a process of loading the control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 61 reads the control state flag from the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S161.

In S161 to S168, which will be described later, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the game of the special symbol game, and enables any of the processes in S161 to S168 to be executed. In addition, the main CPU 61 executes the processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time timer or the like set for each step. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the main CPU 61 ends without executing the process in each step, and executes another subroutine. The main CPU 61 also executes timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

In S161, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol storage check process. The details of S161 will be described later with reference to FIG. 68. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S162.

In S162, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol fluctuation time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 uses the control state flag as a value (01H) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management, and when the fluctuation time elapses, the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management as the control state flag. Set and set the waiting time (for example, 600ms) after confirmation in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of S163 after the waiting time has elapsed after the confirmation. The details of S162 will be described later with reference to FIG. 70. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S163.

In S163, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol display time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a big hit when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management and the waiting time has elapsed after the confirmation. When the main CPU 61 is a big hit, the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management is set in the control state flag, and the time corresponding to the hit start interval is set in the waiting time timer. That is, the process of S164 is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when it is not a big hit. That is, it is set to execute the process of S168. The details of S163 will be described later with reference to FIG. 71. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S164.

In S164, the main CPU 61 executes the hit start interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has a control state flag having a value (03H) indicating hit start interval management, and when the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed, the first grand prize read from the main ROM 62 has elapsed. The data for opening the mouth shutter 36A and the second prize-winning mouth shutter 37A and the data for opening the displacement member 39 are stored in the main RAM 63. Then, in the process of S49 of FIG. 58, the main CPU 61 receives data and a displacement member 39 for opening the first special winning opening shutter 36A and the second special winning opening shutter 37A stored in the main RAM 63. Data for opening is read out, and a control signal based on these data is supplied to the first special winning opening shutter solenoid 360A, the second special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A, and the displacement member solenoid 390. As a result, the main CPU 61 controls the opening and closing of the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37. The details of S164 will be described later with reference to FIG. 72. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S165.

In S165, the main CPU 61 executes the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 61 has a control state flag having a value (05H) indicating waiting time management before reopening the large winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the inter-round interval (interval patterns a and b) has elapsed, The memory is updated so that the number of times the large winning opening opening counter is increased by "1". The main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 61 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 27.222s of the opening / closing pattern A) in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of S166. In this process, the main CPU 61 also performs a process for controlling the opening / closing of the displacement member 39. The details of S165 will be described later with reference to FIG. 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S166.

In S166, the main CPU 61 executes the process during the opening of the large winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 61 has elapsed the opening upper limit time under the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is "9" or more when the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open (04H). It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the large winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When any of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 61 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 63 in order to close the first special winning opening 36 or the second special winning opening 37. Then, it is determined whether or not the condition that the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or more than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number (the final round) is satisfied. The main CPU 61 sets a value (06H) indicating a winning end interval in the control state flag when it is the final round, and a value (05H) indicating waiting time management before reopening the big winning opening when it is not the final round. To the control status flag. The details of S166 will be described later with reference to FIG. 32. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S167.

In S167, the main CPU 61 executes the hit end interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has a control state flag having a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval, and when the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed, the main CPU 61 has a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. Set to the flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of S168. The details of this S167 will be described later with reference to FIG. 75. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S168.

In S168, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol game end process. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game, the main CPU 61 indicates the end of the process at the end of the special symbol game (for example, the end of one game from the external terminal board 801). (Processing for outputting a game end signal, a big hit signal indicating that a big hit game state is in progress, etc.) is executed, and a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check is set. That is, it is set to execute the process of S161. The details of S168 will be described later with reference to FIG. 76. When this processing is completed, the special symbol control processing routine is terminated.

As described above, by setting the control state flag, the special symbol game is executed. Specifically, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags in the order of (00H), (01H), (02H), and (07H) when the result of the hit determination is a loss in the case where the game is not in the big hit game state. As a result, the processes of S161, S162, S163, and S168 shown in FIG. 67 are executed at predetermined timings. Further, in the case where the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit gaming state, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags in the order of (00H), (01H), and (02H), so that S161 shown in FIG. , S162, S163 are executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit game state is started. Further, when the main CPU 61 is in the big hit game state, the control state flags are set in the order of (03H), (04H), and (05H) to predetermine the processing of S164, S166, and S165 shown in FIG. It will be executed at the timing of, and the jackpot game state will be executed. When the end condition of the big hit game state is satisfied, the processes of S165, S167 to S168 shown in FIG. 67 are executed at a predetermined timing by setting (04H), (06H), and (07H) in this order. Then, the jackpot game state will be terminated.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol storage check process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 68, in S170, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag has a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S171. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 61 ends this special symbol storage check processing routine.

In S171, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining the presence / absence of start storage. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is no start memory of the special symbol game, that is, the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) or the second special symbol start storage area. If no data is stored in the area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process is transferred to S172. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is a start memory, the process is transferred to S173.

In S172, the main CPU 61 performs a demo display process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demo display permission value in the main RAM 63. Further, the state in which the start memory of the special symbol game (the first special symbol start storage area or the second special symbol start storage area in which the random value for hit determination is stored) becomes "0" is a predetermined time (for example, 30 s). If it is maintained, set the value that allows the execution of the demo display as the demo display permission value. Then, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demo display command when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demo display command stored in this way is supplied as a demo display command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. As a result, the demo display is executed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this processing is completed, the special symbol storage check processing routine is terminated.

In S173, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is "0". In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the presence / absence of data in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the start storage corresponding to the second special symbol is “0”. That is, when it is determined that no data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process is transferred to S174. When it is determined that the start storage corresponding to the second special symbol is not "0", that is, data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), S175 Move the process to.

In S174, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating that the second special symbol is a fluctuation as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S176.

In S175, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating that the first special symbol is a fluctuation as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S176.

In S176, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S177.

In S177, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol storage transfer process. In this process, when the special symbol to be variablely displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 61 first displays the data of the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). When the special symbol that shifts (stores) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3) and is variablely displayed is the second special symbol, the second special symbol start storage area A process of shifting (storing) each of the data from the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) is executed. do. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S178.

In S178, the main CPU 61 executes the jackpot determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has one jackpot from a plurality of jackpot determination tables (not shown) in which the number of determination values (big hit determination values) to be jackpots differs depending on whether or not the game status flag indicates a probability variation gaming state. Select a judgment table. That is, when the game state flag is a value indicating the probabilistic gaming state, the jackpot determination table for high probability with a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and when the game status flag is not a value indicating the probabilistic gaming state, the jackpot determination value. The jackpot determination table for the non-probability variable gaming state is referred to. In this way, when the game state flag is a value indicating the probabilistic game state, that is, when the game state is the probabilistic game state as a special game state in which it is easy to shift to the specific game state (big hit game state), the game state is changed to the big hit game state. The probability of transition is higher than that of the non-probability changing gaming state as the special gaming state, which is more difficult to shift to the specific gaming state than the non-probability changing gaming state as the non-special gaming state.

The special gaming state is a probabilistic / short-time gaming state, and the non-special gaming state is basically a non-probable / non-short-time gaming state. It also includes the case where the game is in a short-time game state.

Then, the main CPU 61 is extracted at the time of winning the game ball, and is for hit determination of the special symbol start storage area previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). Refer to the random value and the selected jackpot determination table. Then, when the hit determination random value and the jackpot determination value match, the main CPU 61 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the game is in a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player.

The jackpot probability due to winning the first starting port 32 in the normal gaming state may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability due to winning the second starting port 33. The jackpot probability of winning a prize in the first starting port 32 in the normal gaming state may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability of winning a prize in the second starting port 33.

As described above, in the process of S178, either a big hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S179.

In S179, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a jackpot symbol when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot win, and determining a lost symbol when the result is a loss. The details of this S179 will be described later with reference to FIG. 69. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S180.

In S180, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines a different variation pattern based on the special symbol determined in the process of S179, the result of the jackpot determination in the process of S178, and the value of the probability variation counter. Select a decision table. Then, the main CPU 61 determines the variation pattern based on the effect condition determination random number value extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table, and stores the variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. Here, the ST gaming state and the normal gaming state have different fluctuation pattern determination tables. The main CPU 61 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the data indicated by such a variation pattern. This process is the same even during the ST gaming state.

The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 of the LED unit 5. As a result, the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 will be variablely displayed in the variable pattern determined by the special symbol. Further, the data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a variation pattern designation command. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 executes the effect display according to the received variation pattern designation command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S181.

In S181, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol fluctuation time setting process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer, and executes the process of clearing the storage area used for the variation display this time. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S182.

Then, in S182, the main CPU 61 executes a process of clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the variable display this time. When this processing is completed, the special symbol storage check processing routine is terminated.

[Special symbol determination process]
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a special symbol determination process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol determination process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 69, in S190, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, the process is transferred to S191. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the process to S198.

In S191, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the fluctuation state number of the jackpot determined in S190 is a value (01H) indicating that the fluctuation is the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S192 when the variation state number is a value (01H) indicating that the variation is the first special symbol. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 has a value (02H) indicating that the variation state number is not the variation of the first special symbol, that is, the variation state number is the variation of the second special symbol. In that case, the process is transferred to S194.

In S192, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the random value for determining the winning symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 shows the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol (the first special symbol jackpot symbol distribution in FIG. 50) based on the hit symbol determination random value extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter and the jackpot determination table. A process for determining (a symbol corresponding to any one of the probabilistic variation 1 to the probabilistic variation 6 and the time reduction 1 to the time reduction 5) is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the determined jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and a command set of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the jackpot symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53. The first special symbol display unit 53 variablely displays the first special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a command of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies the command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the jackpot stop display mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S196.

In S194, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 shows the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol (second special symbol jackpot symbol distribution in FIG. 50) based on the hit symbol determination random value extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter and the jackpot determination table. The process of determining the symbol corresponding to the probability change 1) is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S195.

In S195, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the determined jackpot symbol of the second special symbol and a command set of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the jackpot symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 variablely displays the second special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a command of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies the command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the jackpot stop display mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S196.

In S196, the main CPU 61 performs a hit start interval display time data set process corresponding to the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the hit start interval display time data corresponding to the jackpot symbol in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S197.

In S197, the main CPU 61 performs data set processing related to the number of times the large winning opening is opened. In this process, the main CPU 61 has data related to the number of times the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 are opened, that is, probability variation 1 to probability variation 6 and time reduction 1 to time reduction according to the first special symbol. 5 or the process of setting the data corresponding to the probability variation 1 by the second special symbol in the main RAM 63 is performed. When this processing is completed, this special symbol determination processing routine is terminated.

On the other hand, in S198, when it is determined in S190 that the main CPU 61 is not a big hit, that is, it is a loss, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the lost symbol and a command set of the lost symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the data of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies the data to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 variablely displays the special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the lost symbol of the special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a command of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies the command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the loss stop display mode. When this processing is completed, this special symbol determination processing routine is terminated.

[Special symbol fluctuation time management process]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a special symbol fluctuation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol fluctuation time management process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 70, in S210, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management. When the main CPU 61 determines that the value (01H) indicates the special symbol fluctuation time management, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S211. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value (01H) does not indicate the special symbol variation time management, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol variation time management processing routine.

In S211 the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S212. If it is determined that the waiting time timer is not "0", the special symbol fluctuation time management processing routine is terminated.

In S212, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management in the special symbol control state flag, and shifts the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a symbol stop command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a symbol stop command in the main RAM 63. Then, the symbol stop command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a symbol stop command, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the symbol stop. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S214.

In S214, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a waiting time after confirmation in an area functioning as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 63. When this processing is completed, the special symbol fluctuation time management processing routine is terminated.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a special symbol fluctuation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol fluctuation time management process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 71, in S220, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating a special symbol display time management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the process is transferred to S221. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management process routine.

In S221, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is "0". When the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S222. On the other hand, when the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management processing routine.

In S222, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it shifts the processing to S223. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the process to S224.

In S223, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the game state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a normal game state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) in the game state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S234.

In S224, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". The time saving number counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of games (number of symbol fluctuations) in the time saving gaming state. When the value of the time reduction counter is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S228. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S225.

In S225, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S226.

In S226, the main CPU 61 again determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". When the value of the time reduction counter is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S227. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S228.

In S227, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a time saving end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a time-saving end command indicating the end of the time-saving game state in the main RAM 63. Then, the time saving end command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the game state, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the end of the time saving gaming state. Become. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S232.

In S228, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0". The probability change number counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of games (number of symbol fluctuations) in the probability change game state. When the value of the probability variation counter is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S233. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S229.

In S229, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the probability variation counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S230.

In S230, the main CPU 61 again determines whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0". When the value of the probability variation counter is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S231. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S233.

In S231, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a probability change end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a probability change end command indicating the end of the probability change game state in the main RAM 63. Then, the probability change end command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the game state, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the end of the probability change game state. Become. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S232.

In S232, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the game state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a normal game state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) in the game state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S233.

In S233, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating an end process of the special symbol game as a control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the special symbol display time management process routine is terminated.

In S234, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S235. In this embodiment, as an example, the hit start interval time corresponding to the first special symbol is when the jackpot symbol is "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 4" and "time reduction 1" to "time reduction 3". Is 10000 ms, and is 50,000 ms in the case of other jackpot symbols, and the hit start interval time corresponding to the second special symbol is 3000 ms when the jackpot symbol is “probability variation 1”.

In S235, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit start display command corresponding to the special symbol. In this process, the hit start display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the start of the big hit game state. The hit start display command includes data indicating the start of the big hit game state and a specific hit pattern. The sub CPU 71 determines the effect pattern in the big hit game state based on the data indicating the hit pattern included in the hit start display command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S236.

In S236, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the large winning opening opening number counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S237.

In S237, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process to the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the special symbol display time management process routine is terminated.

[Hit start interval management process]
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit start interval management process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 72, in S240, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the process is transferred to S241. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management process routine.

In S241, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S242. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management processing routine.

In S242, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number counter in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and transfers the process to S243.

In S243, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the large winning opening opening number counter, and shifts the process to S244.

In S244, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) hit pattern data indicating a big winning opening opening / closing pattern according to the type of the big hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The displacement member operation pattern data for opening and closing the specific region 38A is also set here. The main CPU 61 performs round control based on the pattern (hit pattern) shown in FIG. 53 corresponding to the jackpot symbol determined in S244. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S245.

In S245, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a display command during opening of the large winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this case, the large winning opening open display command is data indicating the start of the round game. The large winning opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S246.

In S246, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a process during opening of the large winning opening to the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S247.

In S247, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the large winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S248.

In S248, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the discharge ball counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S249.

In S249, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the large winning opening in the main RAM 63. The value of the waiting time timer is set as 27.222s for a time corresponding to the value (number of rounds) of the large winning opening opening number counter, for example, if the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is "probability variation 1". When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S250.

In S250, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the large winning opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to open the first special winning opening 36 or the second special winning opening 37. The variable stored in this way drives the first special winning opening shutter solenoid 360A or the second special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A to open the first large winning opening 36 or the second special winning opening 37. Become. When this processing is completed, the hit start interval management processing routine is terminated.

[Waiting time management process before reopening the big prize opening]
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, which is executed by the main CPU 61. This waiting time management process before reopening the big prize opening is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 73, in S260, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, the process is transferred to S261. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening, the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time management processing routine before reopening the big winning opening.

In S261, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S262. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time management processing routine before reopening the large winning opening.

In S262, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the large winning opening opening number counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S263.

In S263, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a display command during opening of the large winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this case, the large winning opening open display command is data indicating the start of the round game. The large winning opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a large winning opening opening display command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S264.

In S264, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a process during opening of the large winning opening to the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S265.

In S265, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the large winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S266.

In S266, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the discharge ball counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S267.

In S267, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the large winning opening in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S268.

In S268, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the large winning opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this processing is completed, the waiting time management processing routine before reopening the large winning opening is terminated.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a process during opening of the large winning opening executed by the main CPU 61. This large winning opening opening process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 74, in S270, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the process of opening the large winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening, the processing is transferred to S271. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (04H) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening, the main CPU 61 ends the processing routine during opening of the large winning opening.

In S271, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the large winning opening winning counter is "9" or more. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening winning counter is "9" or more, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S272. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening winning counter is not "10" or more, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S274.

In S272, the main CPU 61 executes the big winning opening opening / closing process according to the opening / closing pattern for each set round in the type of big hit and the current round, and transfers the processing to S273.

In S273, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer as the opening time of the big winning opening is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S274. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the processing routine during opening of the big winning opening.

In S274, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the large winning opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to close the big winning opening. The variable stored in this way closes the first special winning opening shutter solenoid 360A or the second special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S275.

In S275, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the residual ball monitoring timer. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 1098 ms is set as a predetermined value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S276.

In S276, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the closed large winning opening is the second large winning opening 37. When the main CPU 61 determines that the closed large winning opening is the second large winning opening 37, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S277. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the closed large winning opening is not the second large winning opening 37, that is, the first large winning opening 36, the processing is transferred to S278.

In S277, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the emission monitoring timer. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 1998 ms is set as a predetermined value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S278.

In S278, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the large winning opening opening number (number of rounds). In this process, the main CPU 61 compares the value of the large winning opening opening count counter stored in the main RAM 63 with the upper limit of the large winning opening opening count (the number of rounds), and the value of the large winning opening opening count counter. Determines whether or not is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening is opened. Here, the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening is opened is 16 times (16R). When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening count counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the winning opening opening count, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S282. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is not equal to or more than the upper limit of the large winning opening opening number, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S279.

In S279, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds in the main RAM 63 based on the hit pattern and the number of rounds. That is, the time corresponding to the interval pattern a or b is set based on the hit pattern and the current number of rounds (see FIG. 53). The interval display time between rounds may be set to a time different from the time corresponding to the interval patterns a and b. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S280.

In S280, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S281.

In S281, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this processing is completed, the processing routine during the opening of the large winning opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in S282, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S283. In this embodiment, as an example, the hit end interval display time corresponding to the first special symbol is 20000 ms when the jackpot symbol is "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6", and "time reduction 1" to "time reduction 1" to ". When the time reduction is 5 ", the hit end interval display time corresponding to the second special symbol is 20000 ms when the jackpot symbol is" probability variation 1 "and the jackpot in the non-probability variation gaming state is 20000 ms. If it is a big hit in the game state, it is 5000 ms. As described above, in the present embodiment, the hit end interval display time at the end of the so-called first hit (the first big hit that triggers the transition from the non-probable changing gaming state to the probabilistic gaming state) is the consecutive villa hit (probable changing gaming state). (Big hit that the probabilistic game state will continue) The hit end interval display time at the end is set to be longer.

In S283, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval management process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S284.

In S284, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The hit end display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the end of the big hit game state. When this processing is completed, the processing routine during the opening of the large winning opening is terminated.

[Hit end interval management process]
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a hit end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit end interval management process is executed in the following step units.

In S290, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, the process is transferred to S291. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval management process routine.

In S291, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time is "0". In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S292. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval management processing routine.

In S292, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game of the main RAM 63 in the special symbol control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S293.

In S293, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the specific area passage flag of the main RAM 63 is “01H”. If it is determined that the specific area passage flag is "01H", the process is transferred to S294. If it is determined that the specific area passage flag is not "01H", the process is transferred to S297.

In S294, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "02H" to the game state flag of the main RAM 63. The game state flag "02H" indicates a probabilistic game state and a time-saving game state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S295.

In S295, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "180" as the number of STs in the value of the probability variation number counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S296.

In S296, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "00H" to the specific area passage flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S299.

In S297, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the game state flag of the main RAM 63 to "01H". The game state flag "01H" indicates a non-probability variable game state and a time-saving game state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S298.

In S298, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "4" or "100" as the number of time reductions in the value of the time reduction counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S299. When "4" is set as the number of time reductions, it means that the jackpot symbol has changed from "time reduction 2" to "time reduction 4" in the non-probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state, and the time reduction game state in other situations. In the case of shifting to, "100" is set as the number of time reductions.

In S299, the main CPU 61 sets a game state command and ends the hit end interval management processing routine. The game state command is a command including information indicating the type of the finished hit game state, in addition to the information indicating the game state controlled after the end of the big hit game state and the remaining number of times as the number of time reductions. The remaining number of time reductions is also referred to as the remaining time reduction number as described later, and means the time reduction number of "4" or "100" set in the process of S298. That is, the remaining number of time reductions (remaining time reduction number) does not mean the number of time reductions remaining at any time point in the time reduction mode, but merely indicates the number of time reductions remaining at the start time of the time reduction mode. The game state command including information such as the remaining number of times is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol game end process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 76, in S300, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the processing is transferred to S301. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol game end processing routine.

In S301, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol game end-time processing according to the opening / closing pattern for each set round in the jackpot type and the current round, and transfers the processing to S302. In this special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 61 executes processing for outputting one game end signal and a jackpot signal from the external terminal board 80 to the hall computer 100. In S302, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the special symbol game end process routine is terminated.

[Control by sub CPU]
Next, the processes executed by the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 77 to 93. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 receives various commands from the main control circuit 60 and performs various processes such as display control processes.

[Main processing by sub CPU]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the sub CPU 71. This main process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 77, in S310, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of initializing in response to a power-on. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S311.

In S311 the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating a random number value (a random number counter value for determining an effect, a random number counter value for determining a stop symbol, etc.) stored in the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S312.

In S312, the sub CPU 71 performs command analysis processing. The details of this process will be described later, but the sub CPU 71 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 60 and stored in the receive buffer of the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S313. The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81.

In S313, the sub CPU 71 performs display control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 transmits data for displaying in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 to the display control circuit 76. The display control circuit 76 including the VDP (VideoDisplayProcessor) obtains various image data such as identification symbol data, background image data, and effect image data based on the data for displaying the effect image from the sub CPU 71. It is read from the ROM, superimposed, and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S314.

In S314, the sub CPU 71 performs voice control processing for controlling the sound generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c via the voice control circuit 77. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S315.

In S315, the sub CPU 71 executes a lamp control process for controlling light emission (lighting / blinking) of the lamp / LED 27 via the lamp control circuit 78. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S316.

In S316, the sub CPU 71 performs the movable effect device control process via the movable effect device control circuit 79. In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes a control process for controlling the movable effect device 42 that drives the upper movable effect member 101A and the lower movable effect member 101B. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S311, and thereafter, the processes of S311 to S316 are repeated.

On the other hand, the sub CPU 71 may interrupt the main process and execute the command reception interrupt process or the timer interrupt process even when the main process is being executed. Hereinafter, the command reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 78, and the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 79.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This command reception interrupt process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 78, in S320, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S321.

In S321, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the receive buffer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the receive buffer area of the work RAM 73. For example, the sub CPU 71 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 60. In this process, the stored command is analyzed by the command analysis process of FIGS. 80 and 81. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S322.

In S322, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of returning the program saved in S320 to each register. When this processing is completed, the command reception interrupt processing routine is terminated.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 79, in S330, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the value used in the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S331.

In S331, the sub CPU 71 performs various timer update processes. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating (adding / subtracting) the value of the timer set for the effect control. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S332.

In S332, the sub CPU 71 performs a pressing operation button operation determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of detecting whether or not the press operation button 9A is operated. That is, when a predetermined effect is performed, if the predetermined effect changes depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the pressing operation button 9A, the effect content is changed based on the determination result in this process. Will be controlled.

In S333, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of returning the program saved in S330 to each register. When this processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing routine is terminated.

[Command analysis processing]
80 and 81 are flowcharts showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 80, in S390, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has been received, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S391. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 71 ends this command analysis processing routine.

In S391, the sub CPU 71 reads the data of the received command and performs the processing according to the data of the command in the subsequent steps. When the reading of the data of the received command is completed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S392.

In S392, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S393. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the fluctuation pattern designation command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S394.

In S393, the sub CPU 71 performs an effect pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern including a variation display mode of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern designation command. When the sub CPU 71 determines the effect pattern including the variable display mode of the decorative symbol, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined effect pattern data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. This effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 82. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

As described above, the effect pattern may be determined based on the received variation pattern designation command or based on the received start winning command. In addition, each information contained in these commands may be integrated.

In S394, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol designation command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S395. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S396.

In S395, the sub CPU 71 performs a stop symbol determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the stop decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. When the stop decoration symbol is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decoration symbol data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

The decorative symbols displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 include, for example, numbers "1" to "7", and the number of these decorative symbols (numbers) is a predetermined number (for example, three (3). When the digits)) are aligned with the same decorative pattern (number), the game shifts to the jackpot game state. In addition, the decorative symbols corresponding to the loss are different from these, but among them, a specific number (for example, two) is stopped and displayed (reach) with the same decorative symbol (number), and the rest (for example, 1). Those with different decorative patterns (numbers) that are stopped and displayed are called reach loss eyes. However, even if it is a random eye, even if a specific random eye suggesting a specific meaning (for example, "753" meaning 753) is stopped and displayed, the game may shift to the jackpot game state. ..

In S396, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol stop command has been received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S397. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S398.

In S397, the sub CPU 71 performs a decorative symbol stop process for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S398, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit start display command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S399. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S401.

In S399, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern determination process. The hit effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S400.

In S400, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit start effect process. This hit start effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S401, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the large winning opening winning command has been received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the large winning opening winning command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S402. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the large winning opening winning command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S403.

In S402, the sub CPU 71 executes the prize ball counter addition process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 is in a big hit game state (or in the case of a consecutive villa) according to the number of game balls winning in the big prize opening (1st big winning opening 36 and 2nd big winning opening 37). Counts the number of prize balls in all the jackpot game states that have been transferred to the consecutive villas), and also performs a process of displaying the counted number of prize balls. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S403, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the specific area passage command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the command for passing through a specific area has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S404. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command for passing through a specific area has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S405.

In S404, the sub CPU 71 executes the V winning notification process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data indicating that the V prize has been won in the big hit game state, that is, the transition to the ST mode is performed after the end of the big hit game state. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S405, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the inter-round display command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the inter-round display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S406. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the inter-round display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S407.

In S406, the sub CPU 71 executes the inter-round effect processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process such as setting effect data according to the interval display time between rounds, for example. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated. In the hit effect pattern determination process described later with reference to FIG. 91, a live bonus is determined as the hit effect pattern, and when this live bonus is executed, the execution of the live bonus is prioritized and the interval display between rounds is displayed. It is configured so that the production data according to the time is not set.

In S407, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the large winning opening opening display command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the command for displaying the opening of the large winning opening is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S409. On the other hand, if it is determined that the sub CPU 71 has not received the large winning opening opening display command as the read command, the process is transferred to S410 in FIG. 81.

In S408, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect processing during the round. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data for displaying the remaining possible winning numbers and the large winning opening opening time in the round. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S409 of FIG. 81, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit end display command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S410. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S411.

In S410, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit end effect process. The hit end effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S411, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the game state command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the game state command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S412. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the game state command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S413.

In S412, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect mode change process. In this process, if the received game state command is a command indicating a probability change / time saving game state, the sub CPU 71 sets the value of the effect mode flag to "03H" and uses a command indicating a non-probability change / time saving game state. Yes, if the remaining number of time reductions is 100, it is a command to set the value of the effect mode flag to "02H" to indicate the non-probability change / time reduction game state, and if the remaining number of time reductions is 4 times. , "01H" is set in the value of the effect mode flag, and if it is a command indicating other, "00H" is set in the value of the effect mode flag. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S413, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the time saving end command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the time saving end command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S414. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the time saving end command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S415.

In S414, the sub CPU 71 executes the time saving mode end processing. In this process, for example, the sub CPU 71 sets a special effect content determination table (not shown) that makes it easier to select an effect pattern with a relatively high expectation in a predetermined number of games after the end of the time saving mode. conduct. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S415, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the probability change end command has been received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the probability change end command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S416. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the probability change end command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S417.

In S416, the sub CPU 71 executes the ST mode termination process. In this process, for example, the sub CPU 71 sets a special effect content determination table (not shown) that makes it easy to select an effect pattern with a relatively high expectation in a predetermined number of games after the end of the ST mode. conduct. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S417, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the discharge error command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the discharge error command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S418. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the discharge error command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S419.

In S418, the sub CPU 71 executes the discharge error notification process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data for notifying the occurrence of an error in the second special winning opening 37. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S419, the sub CPU 71 also executes processing corresponding to the received command. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

[Production pattern determination process]
FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an effect pattern as an effect content, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 82, in S430, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “03H”. The effect mode flag is an internal flag indicating the type of effect mode. In the present embodiment, the effect mode flag has a value corresponding to the normal mode of "00H", a value corresponding to the short mode of "01H", a value corresponding to the long mode of "02H", and a value corresponding to the ST mode. It becomes "03H". The background image and the effect content are different depending on the value of the effect mode flag. If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is "03H", the process is transferred to S431. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not "03H", the process is transferred to S432.

In S431, the sub CPU 71 executes the process during the ST mode. The processing during the ST mode will be described later with reference to FIG. 83. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S441.

In S432, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the item pre-reading effect in-progress flag indicating that the item pre-reading effect is being executed is ON. If it is determined that the item pre-reading effect flag is ON, the process is transferred to S433. On the other hand, if it is determined that the item pre-reading effect flag is not ON, the process is transferred to S434.

In S433, the sub CPU 71 executes the item look-ahead effect processing. This item look-ahead effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 85. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S441.

In S434, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “02H”. If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is "02H", the process is transferred to S435. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not "02H", the process is transferred to S436.

In S435, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect pattern determination process during the long mode. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to a sub-effect content determination table for long mode (not shown), and the result of the jackpot determination (win), the type of the variation pattern specification command, and the random number range for sub-effect selection (lottery value). The process of determining the effect pattern is performed based on the above. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S439.

In S436, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is "01H". If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is "01H", the process is transferred to S437. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not "01H" (when the value of the effect mode flag is "00H"), the process is transferred to S438.

In S437, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect pattern determination process during the short mode. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to a sub-effect content determination table for short mode (not shown), and the result of the jackpot determination (win), the type of the variation pattern specification command, and the random number range for sub-effect selection (lottery value). The process of determining the effect pattern is performed based on the above. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S439.

In S438, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect pattern determination process in the normal mode. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the sub-effect content determination table (for normal mode) shown partially in FIG. 54, the result of the jackpot determination (win), the type of the variation pattern specification command, and the sub-effect. A process of determining an effect pattern is performed based on a random number range for selection (lottery value) and the like. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S439.

In S439, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the determined effect pattern is an item look-ahead effect in any of the processes S435, S437, and S438 shown in FIG. 82. If it is determined that the determined effect pattern is an item look-ahead effect, the process is transferred to S440. On the other hand, if it is determined that the determined effect pattern is not the item look-ahead effect, the process is transferred to S441.

In S440, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of setting (ON) the item pre-reading effecting flag in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S441.

In S441, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of setting effect data according to the type of the determined effect pattern. When this process is completed, the effect pattern determination process routine is terminated.

In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern designation command is received, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the item look-ahead effect can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the winning effect determination process of the first start port switch check process S115 shown in FIG. 63 or the second start port switch check process S125 shown in FIG. 64, the main CPU 61 performs "look-ahead effect". When is determined, the item look-ahead effect may be executed. That is, whether or not to execute the item look-ahead effect may be controlled on the main CPU 61 side. In this case, the variation pattern specification command may include information regarding whether or not the "look-ahead effect" is possible by the main CPU 61, or the sub CPU 71 may include information regarding whether or not the "look-ahead effect" included in the received start winning command is possible. The information may be retained and the effect pattern may be determined with reference to the retained information.

Further, the effect content of the item look-ahead effect (for example, the number of plates A to D and the expectation degree of each expectation degree type) may be determined on the main CPU 61 side. In this case, a variation pattern may be determined for each effect content of the item look-ahead effect, and the sub CPU 71 may perform the item look-ahead effect based on the content of the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the determined variation pattern. When the variation pattern of is selected, the effect content of the item look-ahead effect is separately determined, and the variation pattern specification command including the information of the determined effect content is transmitted, so that the sub CPU 71 performs the item look-ahead effect. It may be that. That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to execute the item look-ahead effect, and at the same time, determines the effect content of the item look-ahead effect, whether or not the main CPU 61 executes the item look-ahead effect. The sub CPU 71 determines the effect content of the item look-ahead effect, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute the item look-ahead effect, and determines the effect content of the item look-ahead effect. Aspects are also included.

Further, regardless of whether the decision-making body is the main CPU 61 or the sub CPU 71, whether or not to execute the item look-ahead effect and the effect content of the item look-ahead effect when the item look-ahead effect is executed are different lottery. It may be decided by a batch lottery, or it may be decided at the same time by a batch lottery. That is, whether or not to execute the item look-ahead effect and the effect content of the item look-ahead effect when the item look-ahead effect is executed may be determined by a plurality of processes, or may be determined by one process. ..

[Processing during ST mode]
FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a process during ST mode executed by the sub CPU 71. This ST mode processing is a process for determining an effect pattern as an effect content in the ST mode, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 83, in S450, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ST management counter is “51”. The ST-during management counter is a counter that indicates the number of times the special symbol game is executed in the ST mode. If it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is "51", the process is transferred to S451. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is not "51", the process is transferred to S452.

In S451, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of setting (ON) the ST battle effect control flag indicating that it is the battle reach section of the ST mode in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S452.

In S452, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the battle effect control flag during ST is ON (ON). If it is determined that the battle effect control flag during ST is ON, the process is transferred to S453. On the other hand, if it is determined that the battle effect control flag during ST is not ON (ON), the process is transferred to S454.

In S453, the sub CPU 71 refers to a sub-effect content determination table for ST battle effect (not shown), and the result of the jackpot determination (win), the type of the variation pattern specification command, and the random number range for sub-effect selection (lottery value). The process of determining the effect pattern is performed based on the above. When this processing is completed, the processing routine during ST mode is terminated.

In S454, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ST management counter is “0”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is the first special symbol game (first game) in the ST mode. If it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is "0", the process is transferred to S455. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is not "0", the process is transferred to S457.

In S455, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining a story introduction effect pattern according to the value of the ST middle villa counter. The ST middle consecutive villa counter is a counter indicating the number of consecutive villas in the big hit gaming state (for example, during the second special symbol hit) in the ST mode, except for the so-called first hit. In the present embodiment, a series of story productions in the story section of the ST mode proceed according to the number of consecutive villas of big hits in the ST mode (value of the ST middle villa counter). Further, the story introduction effect pattern is an effect pattern for setting the effect data for executing the effect (for example, title display, etc.) at the time of introduction of the series of stories at the beginning of the series of story effects. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S456.

In S456, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "1" as the initial value of the number of sets. As for the number of sets, in the story section of ST mode, the number of games is set to 5 times as one set, and a series of story productions are executed over a total of 10 sets, and what set of story productions are currently executed? It is the data which shows. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S462.

In S457, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ST management counter is "1". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is the second special symbol game (second game) in the ST mode and is the first special symbol game in which the first set of story production is started. If it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is "1", the process is transferred to S460. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is not "1", the process is transferred to S458.

In S458, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ST management counter is “5 × number of sets (however,“ 9 ”or less) +1”. That is, in the sub CPU 71, the values of the ST management counters are "5 x 1 + 1 = 6" (start of the second set), "5 x 2 + 1 = 11" (start of the third set), and "5 x 3 + 1 = 16". (Start of 4th set), "5x4 + 1 = 21" (Start of 5th set), "5x5 + 1 = 26" (Start of 6th set), "5x6 + 1 = 31" (7th set) (Start), "5 x 7 + 1 = 36" (start of 8th set), "5 x 8 + 1 = 41" (start of 9th set), "5 x 9 + 1 = 46" (start of 10th set) Judge whether or not. If it is determined that the values of the management counter during ST are these values, the process is transferred to S459. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is not these values, the process is transferred to S461.

In S459, the sub CPU 71 performs an update process for the number of sets in which the number of sets is incremented by 1. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S460.

In S460, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining a story effect pattern according to the number of sets (“1” to “9”) and the value of the ST middle villa counter. By performing the processing in this way, a series of story productions proceed in the story section of the ST mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S461.

In S461, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the fluctuation causes a big hit. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special symbol variation pattern in the current symbol variation finally stops and displays the jackpot symbol. If it is determined that the fluctuation is a big hit, the process is transferred to S463. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation does not result in a big hit, the process is transferred to S462.

In S462, the sub CPU 71 performs an update process of the ST management counter that adds 1 to the value of the ST management counter. When this processing is completed, the processing routine during ST mode is terminated.

In S463, the sub CPU 71 executes the story effect pattern change process during ST. The process of changing the story effect pattern during ST will be described later with reference to FIG. 84. When this processing is completed, the processing routine during ST mode is terminated.

[Story production pattern change processing during ST]
FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a story effect pattern change process during ST executed by the sub CPU 71. This ST story effect pattern change process is a process for changing the effect pattern as the effect content when a big hit occurs in the story section of the ST mode, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 84, in S470, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of calculating the remaining production time of the basic production time for one set from the value of the ST middle management counter. Here, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot determination in the story section of the ST mode (ST game state) is lost is basically set to 2s (2000ms). ing. That is, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the first fluctuation pattern corresponding to the first fluctuation time (2s) is determined with high probability. .. Further, the basic production time for one set (five times of special symbol games) in the story section of the ST mode is set to be 10s (10000ms). That is, the time obtained by multiplying the first fluctuation time (2s) by a predetermined number of games (five times corresponding to one set) is set as the basic production time (10s), and the story production corresponding to the value of the number of sets is advanced. ..

The sub CPU 71 is 10s (10s-0s) when the value of the ST management counter indicates the first game in one set (for example, the values of the ST management counter are "1" and "6"). Is calculated as the remaining production time, and when it indicates the second game in one set (for example, the values of the management counter during ST are “2” and “7”), 8s (10s-2s) is the remaining production time. When it indicates the third game in one set (for example, the values of the management counters during ST are "3" and "8"), 6s (10s-4s) is calculated as the remaining production time. When it indicates the 4th game in one set (for example, the values of the management counters during ST are "4" and "9"), 4s (10s-6s) is calculated as the remaining production time, and 5 in one set. When it indicates a game item (for example, the values of the management counters during ST are "5" and "10"), 2s (10s-8s) is calculated as the remaining production time. That is, the sub CPU 71 calculates the remaining production time with respect to the basic production time according to the number of remaining games in one set. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S471.

In S470, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of calculating the remaining production time of the basic production time for one set from the value of the ST middle management counter, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 71 is included in one set. An in-set counter that counts the number of games (or the number of effects) may be provided, and a process of calculating (selecting) the remaining effect time of the basic effect time for one set may be performed from the value of the in-set counter. For example, when the value of the in-set counter indicates the first game in one set (for example, the value of the in-set counter is "1"), the sub CPU 71 calculates (selects) 10s as the remaining production time. However, when it indicates the second game in one set (for example, the value of the counter in the set is "2"), 8s is calculated (selected) as the remaining production time, and the third game in one set (for example, for example). When the value of the in-set counter indicates "3"), 6s is calculated (selected) as the remaining production time, and the fourth game in one set (for example, the value of the in-set counter is "4") is calculated. When it is shown, 4s is calculated (selected) as the remaining production time, and when it indicates the 5th game in one set (for example, the value of the counter in the set is "5"), 2s is the remaining production. It may be calculated (selected) as time.

In S471, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the remaining effect time calculated in the process of S470 is the same as the fluctuation time determined in the variation. For example, if the remaining production time is 6s (6000ms) and the fluctuation time is also 6s (6000ms), the sub CPU 71 determines that the remaining production time and the fluctuation time are the same. If it is determined that the remaining production time and the fluctuation time are the same, the process is transferred to S472. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining production time and the fluctuation time are not the same, the process is transferred to S473.

In S472, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the jackpot notification effect data at the end of the set. The big hit notification effect data at the end of the set is the effect data for notifying the transition to the big hit gaming state in synchronization with the end of the currently executing set in the story section of the ST mode. In this way, when the remaining production time and the fluctuation time are the same, the story production in the set is executed normally until the end of the currently running set, and it becomes a big hit at the end of the currently running set. Will be announced. It should be noted that the big hit was achieved by the combination of decorative symbols at the end of the set without setting the big hit notification effect data at the end of the set (that is, without notifying that the big hit was achieved by a dedicated effect). May be announced. When this process is completed, the story effect pattern change processing routine during ST is terminated.

In S473, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the remaining effect time calculated in the process of S470 is longer than the variation time determined in the variation. For example, if the remaining production time is 8s (8000ms) and the fluctuation time is 6s (6000ms), the sub CPU 71 determines that the remaining production time is longer than the fluctuation time. If it is determined that the remaining production time is longer than the fluctuation time, the process is transferred to S474. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining production time is not longer than the fluctuation time (the remaining production time is shorter than the fluctuation time), the process is transferred to S475.

In S474, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of advancing the story effect pattern determined so that the remaining effect time and the variation time are the same. For example, when the remaining production time is 8s (8000ms) and the fluctuation time is 6s (6000ms), 8s (8000ms) when the story production in the set is normally executed until the currently executing set is completed. ) Although it is necessary, the sub CPU 71 advances the story production in the set so that the story production in the remaining set ends in 6s (6000ms), and the end of the remaining production time and the end of the variable time are reached. Control to synchronize. In addition, after advancing the story production in the set, the effect data for big hit notification at the end of the set is set in the same manner as the processing of S472, and the big hit is announced at the end of the currently executing set. It may be done, or different production data may be set. Further, it may be possible to notify that the jackpot has been achieved by the combination of decorative symbols at the end of the set without notifying that the jackpot has been achieved. When this process is completed, the story effect pattern change processing routine during ST is terminated.

In S475, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of calculating the effectable time by subtracting the remaining effect time calculated in the process of S470 from the fluctuation time. That is, when the remaining effect time is shorter than the fluctuation time, the sub CPU 71 is a predetermined set after the currently executing set, and becomes a big hit at the end of the set, and the story effect ends. In the effect end target set, the effectable time for synchronizing the end of the effect end target set and the end of the variable time is calculated. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S476.

In S476, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the effectable time calculated in the process of S475 is longer than the basic effect time (10 s (10000 ms)). For example, if the remaining production time is 4s (4000ms) and the fluctuation time is 30s (30000ms), the production possible time is calculated to be 26s (26000ms). In this case, the sub CPU 71 is the production possible time (26s). ) Is longer than the basic production time (10s). If it is determined that the effectable time is longer than the basic effect time, the process is transferred to S477. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effectable time is not longer than the basic effect time (the effectable time is shorter than the basic effect time), the process is transferred to S478.

In S477, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting special effect data during ST, which suggests a big hit in the effect end target set. In the present embodiment, when the effectable time is longer than the basic effect time, the effect end target set is the set after the next set that is currently being executed. In this case, as a so-called premier effect, a jackpot suggestion effect (special effect mode) based on the special effect data during ST is executed. It should be noted that the processing of S477 may be performed without performing the processing of S476. That is, even when the effect end target set is the next set of the set currently being executed, the jackpot suggestion effect (special effect mode) based on the special effect data during ST may be executed. Specific screen display examples (effect examples) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 102 to 110.

In S478, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining the story effect pattern of the set following the determined story effect pattern so that the effectable time and the time until the end of the effect of the effect end target set are the same. For example, when the production possible time is 6s (6000ms), the next set of the currently executing set becomes the production end target set, so that the sub CPU 71 can perform the story production in the next set, which is the production end target set. By determining the story effect pattern that will end in 6s (6000 ms), control is performed so that the end of the effectable time and the end of the effect of the effect end target set are synchronized. After executing the story production in the production end target set, the production data for big hit notification at the end of the set is set in the same manner as in the process of S472, and the big hit is announced at the end of the production end target set. It may be done, or different production data may be set. Further, it may be possible to announce that the jackpot has been achieved by the combination of the decorative symbols at the end of the production end target set without notifying that the jackpot has been achieved. When this process is completed, the story effect pattern change processing routine during ST is terminated.

[Item look-ahead effect processing]
FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an item look-ahead effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This item pre-reading effect processing is a process when the item pre-reading effect is determined as the effect pattern in the normal mode or the time saving mode, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 85, in S480, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the fluctuation has started. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special symbol variation pattern in the current symbol variation is a special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command for which the item look-ahead effect is determined. If it is determined that the fluctuation has started, the process is transferred to S481. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation does not occur, the process is transferred to S482.

In S481, the sub CPU 71 executes an item use effect process for basically executing an effect for using all the plates after acquiring all the plates as items in the fluctuation. This item use effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 86. When this processing is completed, the item look-ahead effect processing routine is terminated.

In S482, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an acquisition plate. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not any one of the plate A, the plate B, the plate C, and the plate D corresponding to the determined item look-ahead effect (see FIGS. 54 and 55) is one or more. do. If it is determined that there is an acquisition plate, the process is transferred to S483. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no acquisition plate, the item look-ahead effect processing routine is terminated.

In S482, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the special symbol variation pattern is a shortened variation. If it is determined that the special symbol variation pattern is a shortened variation, the item look-ahead effect processing routine is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol variation pattern is not a shortened variation, the process is transferred to S484.

In S484, the sub CPU 71 executes an item acquisition effect process for determining whether or not to have the player acquire the plate as an item in advance before the change. This item acquisition effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 90. When this processing is completed, the item look-ahead effect processing routine is terminated.

As described above, in the item look-ahead effect, an item (for example, a plate) may be acquired before the change, or all items (for example, a plate) may be acquired in the change, but before the change. , When a shortened fluctuation with a relatively shorter fluctuation time (for example, a shortened fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 2000 ms) is determined as a special symbol fluctuation pattern than a normal fluctuation (for example, a normal fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 4000 ms). , The item acquisition effect processing is not performed, and the item (for example, a plate) is not acquired in advance (that is, the advance notification effect in the item acquisition effect process described later is not performed). With this configuration, even when the item look-ahead effect is executed, it is possible to prevent the effect from being out of balance due to the relationship with the fluctuation time (particularly, shortened variation). In the predetermined symbol fluctuation before the fluctuation, the normal fluctuation was determined as the special symbol fluctuation pattern, but the fluctuation is shortened according to the number of reserved pieces (for example, according to the number of reserved pieces being 3 or more). Even if it is changed, in the process of S482, it is determined that the special symbol variation pattern is a shortened variation, and the item acquisition effect process is not performed.

[Item usage effect processing]
FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an item use effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This item use effect process is a process for executing an effect that basically uses all the plates after acquiring all the plates as items in the change, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 86, in S490, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an acquisition plate. That is, the sub CPU 71 has not acquired all the plates by the item acquisition effect processing described later, and the plate A, the plate B, and the plate C corresponding to the determined item look-ahead effect (see FIGS. 54 and 55). , And whether or not any one of the plates D is one or more. If it is determined that there is an acquisition plate, the process is transferred to S491. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no acquisition plate, the process is transferred to S492.

In S491, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting plate acquisition effect data for acquiring all the remaining plates. For example, "item look-ahead effect 15" (see FIGS. 54 and 55) has been determined, and the remaining plates include one plate A, one plate B, one plate C, and one plate D. In this case, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data for performing the effect of sequentially acquiring the plates A to D at the start of the fluctuation. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S492.

In S492, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a pseudo-continuous effect. Basically, the decorative symbol starts its fluctuation when the special symbol starts to fluctuate, and stops its fluctuation when the special symbol stops fluctuating. By temporarily stopping and re-changing only the decorative design, it is a production that makes it appear as if the design was changed multiple times. The number of temporary stops / re-variations of this decorative symbol is the pseudo-ream number (pseudo-ream number), and the larger the number of pseudo-reams, the higher the expectation that it will be a big hit. For example, when the determined effect pattern is "item look-ahead effect 15", more specifically, "item look-ahead effect 15" (pseudo-ream effect data = pseudo-ream number 0 times) to "item look-ahead effect". It is possible to determine any of "15" (pseudo-ream production data = pseudo-ream number 4 times). That is, even if the "item look-ahead effect 15" is the same in terms of the notation of the effect pattern, there are effect patterns having different pseudo-ream numbers (0 to 4 times). However, from the viewpoint of ensuring the consistency of the effect, when the number of pseudo stations is 0, the effect pattern of the item look-ahead effect in which the number of plates A is one or more is not determined. As described above, in S492, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the effect pattern in which the pseudo-ream number is 1 or more is determined. If it is determined that there is a pseudo-continuous effect, the process is transferred to S493. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no pseudo-continuous effect, the process is transferred to S496.

In S493, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate A has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate A has been acquired, the process is transferred to S494. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate A has not been acquired, the process is transferred to S495.

In S494, the sub CPU 71 executes the plate A use effect processing. The plate A use effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 87. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S496.

In S495, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting pseudo-continuous effect data predetermined by the effect pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 controls so that the pseudo-ream effect is performed according to a predetermined pseudo-ream number (0 to 4 times). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S496.

In S496, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a serif effect. The dialogue effect is an effect of displaying the dialogue of a predetermined character in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 while the special symbol is fluctuating, and the expectation that is a big hit is displayed differently depending on the color of the dialogue. It is a thing. As an example, it is assumed that the expectation that the big hit is in the order of the dialogue (white), the dialogue (yellow), the dialogue (green), and the dialogue (red) is high. For example, when the determined effect pattern is "item look-ahead effect 15", more specifically, "item look-ahead effect 15" (no dialogue effect data = no dialogue effect), "item look-ahead effect 15". It is possible to determine one of (line effect data = line (white)) to "item look-ahead effect 15" (line effect data = line (red)). That is, even if the "item look-ahead effect 15" is the same in terms of the notation of the effect pattern, there is an effect pattern in which the presence / absence of the dialogue effect and the color are different. However, from the viewpoint of ensuring the consistency of the effect, when there is no dialogue effect, the effect pattern of the item look-ahead effect in which the number of plates B is one or more is not determined. In this way, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not an effect pattern with a dialogue effect is determined. If it is determined that there is a dialogue effect, the process is transferred to S497. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no dialogue effect, the process is transferred to S500.

In S497, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate B has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate B has been acquired, the process is transferred to S498. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate B has not been acquired, the process is transferred to S499.

In S498, the sub CPU 71 executes the plate B use effect processing. The plate B use effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 88. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S500.

In S499, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting serif effect data predetermined by the effect pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 controls so that the serif effect is performed according to the predetermined color of the serif effect. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S500.

In S500, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a cut-in effect. The cut-in effect is an effect of cutting in a predetermined character in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 while the special symbol is fluctuating, and if the expected degree of big hit differs depending on the color of the cut-in. It is intended to be displayed. As an example, it is assumed that the expectation that the cut-in (white), the cut-in (yellow), the cut-in (green), and the cut-in (red) are big hits increases in this order. For example, when the determined effect pattern is "item look-ahead effect 15", more specifically, "item look-ahead effect 15" (no cut-in effect data = no cut-in effect), "item look-ahead effect". It is possible to determine one of "15" (cut-in effect data = cut-in (white)) to "item look-ahead effect 15" (cut-in effect data = cut-in (red)). That is, even if the "item look-ahead effect 15" is the same in terms of the notation of the effect pattern, there are effect patterns with different cut-in effects and different colors. However, from the viewpoint of ensuring the consistency of the effect, when there is no cut-in effect, the effect pattern of the item look-ahead effect in which the number of plates C is one or more is not determined. In this way, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not an effect pattern with a cut-in effect is determined. If it is determined that there is a cut-in effect, the process is transferred to S501. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no cut-in effect, the process is transferred to S504.

In S501, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate C has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate C has been acquired, the process is transferred to S502. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate C has not been acquired, the process is transferred to S503.

In S502, the sub CPU 71 executes the plate C use effect processing. The plate C use effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 89. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S504.

In S503, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting cut-in effect data predetermined by the effect pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 controls so that the cut-in effect is performed according to the predetermined color of the cut-in effect. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S504.

In S504, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate D has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate D has been acquired, the process is transferred to S505. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate D has not been acquired, the process is transferred to S506.

In S505, the sub CPU 71 executes the plate D use effect processing. Since the plate D is configured to have a higher probability of being acquired when the result of the jackpot determination (hit) is a hit than when it is a loss (see FIGS. 54 and 55), the plate D is configured. It means that there is a high degree of expectation that it will be a big hit just by acquiring it. In this process, when the result of the jackpot determination (winning) is a hit and the jackpot symbols are "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6", the sub CPU 71 determines the hit effect pattern described later using FIG. 91. When the plate D is carried over so that the plate D is used in the treatment, the treatment of carrying over the plate D can be performed. Further, in other cases, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting special effect change data. The special effect change data directly or indirectly applies the plate D to the effect data set in the processing of S494 (FIG. 87), S495, S498 (FIG. 88), S499, S502 (FIG. 89), or S503. It is the data to change the effect to be performed so that the expectation is higher. For example, even when it is determined that there is a cut-in effect and it is determined that the plate C has not been acquired, the cut-in effect data predetermined by the effect pattern is converted into S502 (FIG. Change in the same manner as in the process of 89). At that time, the effect of directly using the plate D may be performed, or the effect of converting the plate D into the plate C and using the plate D may be performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S506.

It should be noted that the mode of changing the effect based on the special effect change data is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect. As an example, it is possible to adopt an aspect of changing the effect so that the jackpot is notified by the variable display mode and the stop display mode different from the variable display mode and the stop display mode of the normal decorative symbol. For example, in a predetermined effect mode (including the effect mode in the variation of the item look-ahead effect), the reach state is first reached, and then the effect is generated (developed) before the decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed, and the super reach state is achieved. After that, if it is a big hit, the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and if it is not a big hit, it is configured to stop and display with a reach loss. In the case of a big hit in the fluctuation, the predetermined effect is originally set based on the fact that the special effect change data is set (that is, the plate D is acquired). In the embodiment, where the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the reach loss eye, and then the effect of starting the pseudo normal fluctuation of the next game is performed. , The effect using the plate D may be performed, and the effect may be changed so that the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode. Furthermore, as another example, when there are multiple super reach states with different expectations, the expectation is higher based on the fact that the special effect change data is set (that is, the plate D is acquired). The production may be changed so as to generate a high super reach state.

In S506, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of clearing the number of acquired plates. Further, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of clearing (OFF) the item pre-reading effect in progress flag. When this process is completed, the item use effect processing routine is terminated.

[Plate A use effect processing]
FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a plate A use effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This plate A use effect process is a process for causing the acquired plate A to act to execute a pseudo-continuous effect in the fluctuation, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 87, in S510, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of pseudo stations is larger than the number of acquired plates A. For example, if the number of pseudo stations is 3 and the number of acquired plates A is 2, the sub CPU 71 determines that the number of pseudo stations is larger than the number of plates A acquired. If it is determined that the number of pseudo stations is larger than the number of plates A acquired, the process is transferred to S511. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of pseudo-reams is not greater than the number of plates A acquired (the number of pseudo-reams is less than or equal to the number of plates A acquired), the process is transferred to S512.

In S511, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the effect data of the pseudo-continuous temporary stop. A screen display example (effect example) of the effect of the pseudo-continuous temporary stop will be described later with reference to FIGS. 111 to 113. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S513.

In S512, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the effect data of the normal temporary stop, the effect data of using the plate A, and the effect data of the pseudo-continuous temporary stop. A screen display example (effect example) of the normal temporary stop and the effect of using the plate A will be described later with reference to FIGS. 111 to 113. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S513.

In S513, the sub CPU 71 performs a pseudo-ream number update process of subtracting 1 from the pseudo-ream number. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S514.

In S514, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the pseudo-ream number is “0”. If it is determined that the pseudo-ream number is "0", the plate A use effect processing routine is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo-ream number is not "0", the process is transferred to S510.

[Plate B use effect processing]
FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a plate B use effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This plate B use effect processing is a process for causing the acquired plate B to act to execute the dialogue effect in the fluctuation, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 88, in S520, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of temporarily setting dialogue effect data having a lower expectation than the predetermined dialogue effect data according to the number of plates B. For example, in the sub CPU 71, when the predetermined dialogue effect data is dialogue (red) and the number of plates B is one, the dialogue effect data with low expectation for one plate B is dialogue (green). Temporarily set. Further, for example, in the sub CPU 71, when the predetermined dialogue effect data is dialogue (red) and the number of plates B is two, the dialogue effect data having a low expectation for two plates B (serifu) ( Temporarily set (yellow). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S521.

In S521, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the temporarily set low-expected dialogue effect data, the effect data using the plate B, and the original dialogue effect data. By setting these effect data, when the number of plates B is one in the above example, the effect corresponding to the serif (green) dialogue effect data is first executed, and then the plate B is executed. It is notified that the effect corresponding to the effect data using one sheet is executed and the expectation of the dialogue effect is increased, and finally the effect corresponding to the dialogue (red) dialogue effect data is executed. Further, in the above example, when the number of plates B is two, the effect corresponding to the serif (yellow) dialogue effect data is first executed, and then the effect data using two plates B is supported. It is notified that the effect to be performed is executed and the expectation level of the dialogue effect is increased, and finally, the effect corresponding to the dialogue effect data of the dialogue (red) is executed. That is, it is possible to produce an effect as if the expectation level of the dialogue effect was improved by the action of the plate B. When this processing is completed, the plate B use effect processing routine is terminated.

[Plate C use effect processing]
FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a plate C use effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This plate C use effect processing is a process for executing the cut-in effect in the fluctuation by causing the acquired plate C to act, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 89, in S530, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of temporarily setting cut-in effect data having a lower expectation than the predetermined cut-in effect data according to the number of plates C. For example, in the sub CPU 71, when the predetermined cut-in effect data is cut-in (red) and the number of plates C is one, the cut-in effect data having a low expectation for one plate C is cut. Temporarily set the in (green). Further, for example, in the sub CPU 71, when the predetermined cut-in effect data is cut-in (red) and the number of plates C is two, the cut-in effect data with a low expectation for two plates C is used. Temporarily set a certain cut-in (yellow). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S531.

In S521, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the temporarily set cut-in effect data with low expectation, the effect data using the plate C, and the original cut-in effect data. By setting these effect data, when the number of plates C is one in the above example, the effect corresponding to the cut-in (green) cut-in effect data is first executed, and then the effect corresponding to the cut-in effect data is executed. It is notified that the effect corresponding to the effect data using one plate C is executed and the expectation of the cut-in effect is increased, and finally the effect corresponding to the cut-in (red) cut-in effect data is executed. To. In the above example, when the number of plates C is two, the effect corresponding to the cut-in effect data of the cut-in (yellow) is executed first, and then the effect data corresponding to the effect data using two plates C is supported. It is notified that the effect to be performed is executed and the expectation of the cut-in effect is increased, and finally the effect corresponding to the cut-in (red) cut-in effect data is executed. That is, it is possible to produce an effect as if the expectation of the cut-in effect is improved by the action of the plate C. When this processing is completed, the plate C use effect processing routine is terminated.

[Item acquisition production process]
FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an item acquisition effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This item acquisition effect processing is a process for executing an effect of causing the player to acquire a plate as an item before the change, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 90, in S540, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate A has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate A has been acquired, the process is transferred to S541. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate A has not been acquired, the process is transferred to S544. In S541, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of executing a plate A display lottery for determining whether or not to display the effect image indicating that the plate A has been acquired in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S542.

In S542, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate A display lottery has been won. If it is determined that the plate A display lottery has been won, the process is transferred to S543. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate A display lottery has not been won, the process is transferred to S544.

In S543, the sub CPU 71 performs an update process for the number of plates A by subtracting 1 from the number of plates A. When there are a plurality of plates A, it may be determined whether or not to display one plate at a time by the above-mentioned plate A display lottery, and it is determined whether or not to display a plurality of plates A. May be. In the latter case, the number of plates A will be subtracted in this process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S544.

In S544, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate B has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate B has been acquired, the process is transferred to S545. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate B has not been acquired, the process is transferred to S548.

In S545, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of executing a plate B display lottery for determining whether or not to display the effect image indicating that the plate B has been acquired in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S546.

In S546, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate B display lottery has been won. If it is determined that the plate B display lottery has been won, the process is transferred to S547. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate B display lottery has not been won, the process is transferred to S548.

In S547, the sub CPU 71 performs an update process of the number of plates B by subtracting 1 from the number of plates B. When there are a plurality of plates B, it may be determined whether or not to display one plate at a time by the above-mentioned plate B display lottery, and it is determined whether or not to display a plurality of plates B. May be. In the latter case, the number of plates B is subtracted in this process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S548.

In S548, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate C has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate C has been acquired, the process is transferred to S549. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate C has not been acquired, the process is transferred to S552.

In S549, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of executing a plate C display lottery for determining whether or not to display the effect image indicating that the plate C has been acquired in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S550.

In S550, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate C display lottery has been won. If it is determined that the plate C display lottery has been won, the process is transferred to S551. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate C display lottery has not been won, the process is transferred to S552.

In S551, the sub CPU 71 performs an update process for the number of plates C by subtracting 1 from the number of plates C. When there are a plurality of plates C, it may be determined whether or not to display one plate at a time by the above-mentioned plate C display lottery, and it is determined whether or not to display the plurality of plates C. May be. In the latter case, the number of plates C will be subtracted in this process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S552. In S552, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate D has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate D has been acquired, the process is transferred to S553. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate D has not been acquired, the process is transferred to S556.

In S553, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of executing a plate D display lottery for determining whether or not to display the effect image indicating that the plate D has been acquired in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S554.

In S554, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate D display lottery has been won. If it is determined that the plate D display lottery has been won, the process is transferred to S555. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate D display lottery has not been won, the process is transferred to S556.

In S555, the sub CPU 71 performs an update process of the number of plates D by subtracting 1 from the number of plates D. When there are a plurality of plates D, it may be determined whether or not to display one plate at a time by the above-mentioned plate D display lottery, and it is determined whether or not to display a plurality of plates D. May be. In the latter case, the number of plates D will be subtracted in this process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S556.

In S556, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting plate display effect data according to the plate that has won the display lottery (S541, S545, S549, S553). Based on this plate display effect data, the number of target plates won in each of the above-mentioned display lottery is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 as an effect image. When this processing is completed, the item acquisition effect processing routine is terminated.

Here, as an example of the case where the plate (item) is acquired by the item acquisition effect process shown in FIG. 91, it is determined that the item use effect process shown in FIG. 86 is executed in the special symbol game after three games. In this case (when the special symbol game after 3 games is the variation), the case where one plate A to D is acquired will be described as an example.

In the special symbol game of the first game (two games before the change), for example, when the plate A display lottery and the plate D display lottery are won, an effect image showing that one plate A is acquired, and an effect image showing that one plate A is acquired, and An effect image indicating that one plate D has been acquired is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. Next, in the special symbol game of the second game (one game before the fluctuation), for example, when the plate B display lottery is won, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays an effect image showing that one plate B has been acquired. Is displayed in the display area 4A of. Then, in the special symbol game of the third game (the change), one plate C is acquired for the remaining plate C which is not shown to be acquired by the item acquisition effect processing shown in FIG. 91. Is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 (see S491 in FIG. 86), and the item look-ahead effect using these plates (items) is performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, before the fluctuation is started, the advance notification effect (for example, plates A to D) for notifying the type of the item (for example, plates A to D) in the item look-ahead effect is acquired. It is configured to determine whether or not to perform an effect image) indicating that the person is present. With this configuration, when a big hit notice (notice of transition to a specific game state) is given, it is possible to perform a more varied look-ahead effect (a effect based on the start memory before the variable execution). ..

[Hit effect pattern determination process]
FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing a hit effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit effect pattern determination process is a process for determining a hit effect pattern, which is an effect pattern during the big hit game state, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 91, in S560, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the hit effect pattern flag indicates the hit pattern 12. Here, the hit effect pattern flag is an internal flag indicating the hit patterns 1 to 12 (see FIG. 50), and the hit effect pattern flags “01H” to “0CH” are set corresponding to each of the hit patterns 1 to 12. Will be done. The hit effect pattern flag may be set according to the information of the big hit symbol included in the received symbol designation command, and may be set according to the same information included in the received hit start display command. May be. That is, in this process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the type of jackpot to be started is the hit pattern 12 (the jackpot symbol "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol). If it is determined that the hit effect pattern flag indicates the hit pattern 12, the process is transferred to S561. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit effect pattern flag does not indicate the hit pattern 12, the process is transferred to S566.

In S561, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the ST mode is in progress. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the effect mode flag described above is "03H". If it is determined that the ST mode is in progress, the process is transferred to S563. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ST mode is not in progress, the process is transferred to S562.

In S562, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining the promotion hit effect pattern for SP bonus. When the hit effect pattern flag indicates the hit pattern 12 and it is not in the ST mode, it is basically the case where the big hit symbol "probability change 1" of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the time saving mode. , It is decided to determine the promotion hit production pattern for SP bonus, which indicates in the SP bonus that the mode is changed (promoted) from the time saving mode to the ST mode via the SP bonus in the second special symbol. When this process is completed, the hit effect pattern determination process routine is terminated.

In S563, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ST management counter is "50" or less. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the story section in the ST mode has become a big hit (whether the big hit has been a series of villas). If it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is "50" or less, the process is transferred to S564. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is not "50" or less, the process is transferred to S565.

In S564, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining an effect pattern per related story for SP bonus according to the value of the ST consecutive villa counter and the value of the ST middle management counter. In the present embodiment, a series of story productions in the story section of the ST mode proceed according to the number of jackpot consecutive villas in the ST mode (value of the ST middle consecutive villa counter). The series of story productions that are being performed can be carried over even when shifting from the story section of the ST mode to the SP bonus during the second special symbol. Therefore, per SP bonus related story according to the number of big hit consecutive villas in ST mode (value of ST middle consecutive villa counter) and the progress of the story in the story section of ST mode (value of ST middle management counter). The production pattern will be decided. A screen display example (effect example) of the effect pattern per story related to the SP bonus will be described later with reference to FIG. 101. When this process is completed, the hit effect pattern determination process routine is terminated.

In S565, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining an effect pattern per battle for SP bonus. The SP bonus battle hit effect pattern is a hit effect pattern determined when a big hit occurs in the battle reach section of the ST mode, and one character (for example, an ally character) in the battle reach section of the ST mode and others. This is a hit effect pattern for executing an effect related to a battle scene of a character (for example, an enemy character) in an SP bonus. When this process is completed, the hit effect pattern determination process routine is terminated.

In S566, the sub CPU 71 refers to the hit effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56), and performs a process of determining the hit effect pattern according to the type of the hit pattern indicated by the hit effect pattern flag. As described above, when the hit effect pattern is determined according to the type of the more detailed hit pattern (for example, the hit patterns 1-1 to 46), the hit effect pattern flag should be specified in more detail. However, the hit effect pattern may be determined according to the hit effect pattern flag and other information indicating a more detailed hit pattern. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S567.

In S567, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate D has been acquired. More specifically, in the plate D use effect process of S505 of the item use effect process shown in FIG. 86, it is determined whether or not the number of carried over plates D is 1 or more. If it is determined that the plate D has been acquired, the process is transferred to S568. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate D has not been acquired, the hit effect pattern determination processing routine is terminated.

In S568, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of changing the hit effect pattern so as to be a promotion (reverse) pattern according to the type of the determined hit pattern. For example, if a live bonus (live bonus 9R success) is determined as a winning effect pattern and a plate D is acquired, a live bonus (live bonus 4R failure) is temporarily set as an effect pattern. , Performs a process of setting the effect data corresponding to the temporarily set live bonus (live bonus 4R failure), the effect data using the plate D, and the effect data corresponding to the live bonus (live bonus 9R success). By setting these effect data, in the live bonus, the effect corresponding to the effect data corresponding to the live bonus (live bonus 4R failure) is first executed, and then in the first branch section described later, the effect is executed. It is notified that the production corresponding to the production data using the plate D is executed and the live bonus is promoted (reversed), and then the production corresponding to the production data corresponding to the live bonus (live bonus 9R success) is executed. Change the hit effect pattern as shown. When this process is completed, the hit effect pattern determination process routine is terminated.

[Hit start effect processing]
FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a hit start effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit start effect process is a process for starting the effect in the big hit game state based on the determined hit effect pattern, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 92, in S570, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a music pattern (see FIG. 56) is determined as a hit effect pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to start the live bonus during the first special symbol. If it is determined that the music pattern has been determined as the hit effect pattern, the process is transferred to S571. On the other hand, if it is determined that the music pattern has not been determined as the hit effect pattern, the process is transferred to S572.

In S571, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a valid period timer according to the start time of the initial section described later in the determined music pattern. That is, when the music pattern is determined as the hit effect pattern, the sub CPU 71 controls to start the effect by the music pattern from a predetermined time before the start of the big hit game state. For example, when the hit start interval time is 10,000 ms, 4000 ms is set as the validity period timer. An example of the production of the music pattern and an example of the screen display will be described later with reference to FIGS. 94, 53, 55 and 56. When this processing is completed, the hit start effect processing routine is terminated.

In S572, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a valid period timer corresponding to the time corresponding to the hit start interval time. That is, when the music pattern is not determined as the hit effect pattern, the sub CPU 71 controls to start the effect by the hit effect pattern so as to synchronize with the start of the big hit game state. For example, when the hit start interval time is 10,000 ms, 10000 ms is set as the validity period timer. When this processing is completed, the hit start effect processing routine is terminated.

[Hit end effect processing]
FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a hit end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit end effect process is a process for ending the effect in the big hit game state based on the determined hit effect pattern, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 93, in S580, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the hit effect pattern flag indicates a probability change. That is, in the sub CPU 71, the type of jackpot to be terminated is hit pattern 1 to 6 (big hit symbol "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6" of the first special symbol) or hit pattern 12 (big hit symbol "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol). ") Is determined. If it is determined that the hit effect pattern flag indicates a probability change, the process is transferred to S581. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit effect pattern flag does not indicate a probability change, the process is transferred to S585.

In S581, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ST middle villa counter is "1" or more. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the jackpot has become a big hit (whether the jackpot has been consecutively villaged) in the ST mode. If it is determined that the value of the ST middle villa counter is "1" or more, the process is transferred to S582. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the ST middle villa counter is not "1" or more ("0"), the process is transferred to S583.

In S582, the sub CPU 71 performs an update process of the ST middle villa counter that adds 1 to the value of the ST middle villa counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S584.

In S583, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "1" as the initial value of the ST middle villa counter. As a result, the first series of story production is performed in the story section of the ST mode after the end of the so-called first hit. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S584.

In this embodiment, the number of consecutive villas excluding the so-called first hit is counted using the ST middle consecutive villa counter, but the number of consecutive villas including the first hit may be counted separately. .. In this case, a consecutive villa counter that counts the number of consecutive villas including the first hit may be provided separately, and from the value of the ST middle consecutive villa counter (for example, 1 is added to the value of the ST middle consecutive villa counter). , You may count the number of consecutive villas including the first hit. By counting the number of consecutive villas including the first hit in this way, the count result may be displayed separately from the series of story productions. For example, when the above-mentioned first series of story productions are performed, by displaying "2 consecutive big hits" as the display of the number of consecutive villas including the first hit, the game is played regardless of the production content. It is possible to make a person roughly grasp the number of game media acquired.

In S584, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" as the initial value of the ST middle management counter. As a result, the number of games in the story section of the so-called ST mode is managed from the beginning. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S585.

In S585, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a music pattern (see FIG. 56) is determined as a hit effect pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is the end of the live bonus during the first special symbol. When it is determined that the music pattern is determined as the hit effect pattern, the hit end effect processing routine is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the music pattern has not been determined as the hit effect pattern, the process is transferred to S586.

In S586, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the effect data at the end of the bonus according to the type of the hit effect pattern. Here, when the hit effect pattern is a music pattern, if the effect corresponding to the music pattern started in the hit start effect process (see FIG. 92) is not completed, the effect is preferentially executed. The production data at the end of the bonus is not set. That is, the effect according to the music pattern is not overwritten by the effect at the end of the bonus. When this processing is completed, the hit end effect processing routine is terminated.

Although not shown, in this hit end effect process, the sub CPU 71 operates the return button 24 to return the card (for example, the prepaid card) from the card unit 84 at the end of the so-called first hit. Is performed to set the card forgotten notification effect data for executing the card forgotten notification for urging the player. This card forgetting notification may be executed together with the effect corresponding to the effect data at the end of the bonus, and at the end of the so-called first hit, it is executed instead of the effect corresponding to the effect data at the end of the bonus. You may do it. Further, even when the hit effect pattern is a music pattern and the effect by this music pattern is not completed at the end of the so-called first hit, the card forgotten notification may be executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 94 to 113, various effects in the present embodiment will be described with reference to an effect example and a screen display example.

[Example of live bonus production]
93 and 94 are diagrams showing an example of live bonus production. In addition, in FIG. 93 and FIG. 94, an production example in the case of the music pattern A is shown as an example of the live bonus.

The upper part of FIG. 94 shows an example of the effect when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 1 and the live bonus music pattern A (success) is selected as the hit effect pattern. In the music pattern A (success), the initial section (6s) in which the intro part of the music pattern A is output, the first section (22s) in which the verse part of the music pattern A is output, and the music pattern A continue. The first branch section (7s) indicating whether or not it is first, the second section (22s) in which the B melody portion in the music pattern A is output, and the second section indicating whether or not the music pattern A continues are shown below. It is composed of a branch section (9s) and a third section (25s) in which the chorus portion in the music pattern A is output and it is suggested that the specific second round game is executed. The output time shown in parentheses in each section (including the 4th section and the 5th section described later) is an example, and the average digestion time for each round (for each long release or short release) and the interval between rounds. It is assumed that the time corresponding to the interval and the tone of the music corresponding to the music pattern can be comprehensively set as appropriate.

In the music pattern A (success), the intro part, which is the initial common part of the predetermined music, is output from the predetermined time before the start of the jackpot gaming state, and then the predetermined music is synchronized with the start of the jackpot gaming state. The A melody part, which is the first common part, is output, and then it is shown whether or not the output of the predetermined music is continued in the predetermined branch period (first branch section) starting from the end of the 3rd round. Next, the B melody part, which is the second common part of the predetermined music, is output from the middle of the 4th R, and then, in the specific branch period (second branch section) starting from the early stage of the 7th R, the predetermined. Whether or not the output of the music of the music is continued is shown, and then the chorus portion, which is a specific part of the predetermined music, is output from the middle of the 8th R.

The lower part of FIG. 94 shows an example of the effect when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 7 and the live bonus music pattern A (failure) is selected as the hit effect pattern. The music pattern A (failure) includes the above-mentioned initial section (6s), the above-mentioned first section (22s), the above-mentioned first branch section (7s), the above-mentioned second section (22s), and the above-mentioned. It is composed of a second branch section (9s) and a fourth section (13s) in which the chorus portion in the music pattern A is not output and it is suggested that the specific second round game is not executed.

In the music pattern A (failure) when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 7, the intro part which is the initial common part of the predetermined music is output from the predetermined time before the start of the jackpot game state, and then the jackpot game state is set. The A melody part, which is the first common part of the predetermined music, is output so as to synchronize with the start, and then, in the predetermined branch period (first branch section) starting from the end of the 3rd round, the predetermined music Whether or not the output continues is indicated, then the B melody part, which is the second common part of the predetermined song, is output from the middle of the 4th R, and then a specific branch starting from the early stage of the 7th R. In the period (second branch section), it is shown whether or not the output of the predetermined music is continued, and then the chorus part, which is a specific part of the predetermined music, is not output from the middle of the 8th R, and the specific second It is shown that the round game is not performed.

The upper part of FIG. 95 shows an example of the effect when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 3 and the live bonus music pattern A (reversal) is selected as the hit effect pattern. In the music pattern A (reversal), the above-mentioned initial section (6s), the above-mentioned first section (22s), the above-mentioned first branch section (7s), and a predetermined sound are output to perform a specific second round game. It consists of a fifth section (13s) that is suggested to be executed. The predetermined sound output in the fifth section may be a chorus portion in the music pattern A (that is, the third section and the fifth section may be the same), or another sound in the music pattern A. It may be a part (for example, a C melody part), or it may be a specific sound effect related to a predetermined music indicating that it has been reversed (a specific second round game is executed). Further, after the specific sound effect is output, a rust portion or a part of another portion may be output.

In the music pattern A (reversal), the intro part, which is the initial common part of the predetermined music, is output from the predetermined time before the start of the jackpot gaming state, and then the predetermined music is synchronized with the start of the jackpot gaming state. The A melody part, which is the first common part, is output, and then it is shown whether or not the output of the predetermined music is continued in the predetermined branch period (first branch section) starting from the end of the 3rd round. Next, a predetermined sound, which is a specific part of the predetermined music, is output from the middle of the 4th R.

The lower part of FIG. 94 shows an example of the effect when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 8 and the live bonus music pattern A (failure) is selected as the hit effect pattern. The music pattern A (failure) is composed of the above-mentioned initial section (6s), the above-mentioned first section (22s), the above-mentioned first branch section (7s), and the above-mentioned fourth section (13s). There is.

In the music pattern A (failure) when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 8, the intro part which is the initial common part of the predetermined music is output from the predetermined time before the start of the jackpot game state, and then the jackpot game state is set. The A melody part, which is the first common part of the predetermined music, is output so as to synchronize with the start, and then, in the predetermined branch period (first branch section) starting from the end of the 3rd round, the predetermined music Whether or not the output is continued is shown, and then it is shown that the predetermined sound, which is a specific part of the predetermined music, is not output from the middle of the 4th round, and the specific second round game is not executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the predetermined music is in both the big hit game state of the hit pattern 3 in which the specific second round game is executed and the big hit game state of the hit pattern 8 in which the specific second round game is not executed. The first common portion (for example, the verse of the first section) of (for example, the music corresponding to the music pattern A) is output, and a predetermined branching period (for example, the first branching section) elapses. Then, in the big hit game state of the hit pattern 3, a specific part of a predetermined music (for example, reversal of the fifth section) suggesting that the specific second round game is executed after the lapse of the predetermined branch period is performed. Output. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player in the big hit gaming state (specific gaming state).

Further, in the present embodiment, before the execution of the specific second round game is started, a predetermined time (for example, 1R where the initial section is started) at which the output of the specific part of the predetermined music is started is started. By configuring so that the output of a predetermined song (for example, the output of the intro of the initial section) is started from (during the waiting time before the start of the eyes), it is not necessary to monitor the round game, so that the control load is increased. Can be prevented from doing so.

Further, in the present embodiment, the predetermined music (for example, in any of the jackpot gaming state of the hit pattern 3, the jackpot gaming state of the hit pattern 8, the jackpot gaming state of the hit pattern 1, and the jackpot gaming state of the hit pattern 7). The first common portion (for example, the verse of the first section) of the music corresponding to the music pattern A is output, and a predetermined branching period (for example, the first branching section) is allowed to elapse. Here, in the big hit game state of the hit pattern 3, a specific part of a predetermined music (for example, reversal of the fifth section) suggesting that the specific second round game is executed after the lapse of the predetermined branch period. Is output, and in the jackpot gaming state of the hit pattern 1 and the jackpot gaming state of the hit pattern 7, the second common part of the predetermined music (for example, the B melody of the second section) is output, and a specific branching period is output. (For example, the second branch section) is allowed to pass. Then, in the big hit game state of the hit pattern 1, a specific part of a predetermined music (for example, chorus in the third section) suggesting that the specific second round game is executed after the lapse of this specific branch period is performed. Output. With such a configuration, the expectation of the player in the specific gaming state can be further increased.

The music pattern B (success) and the music pattern C (confirmed) basically have the same configuration as the music pattern A (success), and the music pattern B (reversal) basically has the same structure as the music pattern A (reversal). The composition of the music pattern B (failure) is basically the same as that of the music pattern A (failure), but a part or all of the output time of each specified section is different. It may be configured so as to be, or it may be configured so that a part of the specified sections is not provided.

Further, for example, in the first branch section and / or the second branch section, an effect of prompting the pressing operation of the pressing operation button 9A may be performed, based on the fact that the pressing operation button 9A is operated a predetermined number of times. The portion of the predetermined music corresponding to the section following the section may be output earlier than the case where the pressing operation button 9A is not operated a predetermined number of times.

[Example of screen display during normal operation]
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of screen display in a normal state. The normal time referred to here means a time when an effect mode such as a normal mode or a time saving mode is executed. As shown in the figure, basically, a plurality of decorative symbols 700, a first reserved quantity information 701 corresponding to the start storage of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in the normal state. The second reserved quantity information 702 corresponding to the start storage of the symbol is displayed.

The plurality of decorative symbols 700 form, for example, three columns, and the numerical symbols "1" to "7" are displayed so as to be in a variable display mode or a stop display mode in each column. The plurality of decorative symbols 700 are displayed in a variable manner and stopped in conjunction with the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol. When the plurality of decorative symbols 700 shift from the normal gaming state to the big hit gaming state, basically, the stop display mode is set in a state where all the decorative symbols 700 are aligned in the same numerical symbol from the variable display mode. The stop display mode of the decorative symbol 700 other than these is basically a loss.

The first reserved quantity information 701 and the second reserved quantity information 702 are displayed by the reserved marks corresponding to the reserved quantity corresponding to the start storage of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. Up to four hold marks indicating the first hold quantity information 701 and the second hold quantity information 702 are additionally displayed according to the winning of the game balls to the first start opening 32 and the second start opening 33, respectively. The hold mark indicating the first hold quantity information 701 and the second hold quantity information 702 is used when the decorative symbol starts variable display together with the special symbol based on the start memory of the corresponding first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. It is hidden from the right end side and erased. When the hold marks of both the first hold quantity information 701 and the second hold quantity information 702 are displayed, the start memory of the second special symbol has priority over the start memory of the first special symbol. 2 The hold mark of the hold quantity information 702 is erased in preference to the hold mark of the first hold quantity information 701.

Although not shown in particular, different display images, background images, and the like are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in various production modes depending on the production content. Of course, the same display image, background image, or the like may be displayed even in different production modes.

[Screen display example of music pattern A]
97 and 98 are diagrams showing an example of screen display of the music pattern A. In the above-mentioned initial section, first to fifth section, first branch section, and second branch section, the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is linked to the output of music from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c. The production image is also displayed. Although the effect image corresponding to the initial section is omitted in FIGS. 97 and 98, for example, it is assumed that an effect image such as a title display in which the song title is displayed is displayed according to the intro portion.

As shown in FIG. 97, in the first section of the music pattern A, the predetermined character sings the A melody portion in conjunction with the output of the A melody portion which is the first common part of the predetermined music. The effect image is displayed, and in the first branch section of the music pattern A, the effect image indicating whether or not the output of the predetermined music is continued is displayed.

When the hit pattern is the hit pattern 8, an effect image suggesting that the specific second round game is not executed is displayed in the fourth section of the music pattern A, and the hit pattern is the hit pattern 3. In this case, an effect image suggesting that the specific second round game is executed is displayed in conjunction with the output of the predetermined sound which is a specific part of the predetermined music.

Further, when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 1 or 7, as shown in FIG. 98, the predetermined character is linked to the output of the B melody portion which is the second common part of the predetermined music. An effect image for singing the B melody portion is displayed, and an effect image indicating whether or not the output of a predetermined music is continued is displayed in the second branch section of the music pattern A.

When the hit pattern is the hit pattern 7, an effect image suggesting that the specific second round game is not executed is displayed in the fourth section of the music pattern A, and the hit pattern is the hit pattern 1. In this case, an effect image suggesting that the specific second round game is executed is displayed in conjunction with the output of the chorus portion which is a specific part of the predetermined music.

[Screen display example of story section in ST mode]
99 and 100 are diagrams showing an example of screen display of a story section in ST mode. As shown in FIG. 99, the first reserved quantity information 701 and the second reserved quantity information 702 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in the story section of the ST mode, and the story corresponding to the current set number is displayed. The set story display area 703 (first image display means) for displaying an image (first image), and a scheduled set for displaying a window image (second image) suggesting a story corresponding to the number of sets from the next time onward. A window display area 704 (second image display means) is provided. The decorative symbol 700 may be superimposed on the set story display area 703 with a predetermined transparency and displayed in a variable manner, and may be reduced to the set story display area 703, the planned set window display area 704, or another area. It may be displayed in a variable manner. Alternatively, the decorative symbol 700 may not be displayed in the story section of the ST mode.

As described above, in the story section of the ST mode, a series of story productions are performed according to the value of the current number of sets and the value of the ST Churenso counter. For example, as shown in FIG. 100, when the value of the ST Churenso counter is "1", the story production of "Episode 1", which is the first story production in a series of story productions, is the current story production. It is performed according to the value of the number of sets, and when the value of the ST Churenso counter is "2", it is the story production "Episode 2" following the "Episode 1" of the series of story productions. The story production will be performed according to the value of the current number of sets. At this time, the story images 703a and 703b corresponding to the current number of sets are displayed in the set story display area 703, and the window images 704a and 704b suggesting the story corresponding to the number of sets from the next time onward are the scheduled set window display area 704. Will be displayed in.

Further, for example, when the number of sets is updated (added by 1) to the next number of sets, the story image corresponding to the story suggested by the window image 704a (704b) is displayed in the set story display area 703. At the same time, the plurality of window images displayed in the scheduled set window display area 704 slide to the left, and the update of the number of sets (that is, the progress of the story production) is notified. In FIG. 100, the white window image, the shaded window image, and the black window image displayed in the schedule set window display area 704 are schematically assumed to indicate different window images (that is, different stories). It is a representation of the target.

[Screen display example of production pattern per related story for SP bonus]
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a screen display example of an effect pattern per story related to SP bonus. In this embodiment, in the story section of the ST mode, a series of story productions are performed according to the value of the current number of sets and the value of the ST Churenso counter, and a big hit in the story section of the ST mode. In the case of, the production pattern per related story for SP bonus related to the series of story production is determined (see FIG. 91).

The upper part of FIG. 101 shows a screen display example of a production pattern per story related to SP bonus when the value of the ST middle villa counter is "1" and the value of the ST middle management counter is less than "26". ing. In this screen display example, the value of the ST Churenso counter is "1" as the effect pattern per story for the SP bonus related to the ST Churenso counter value of "1". The outline of the story of a series of story production by the story production pattern during ST is displayed. That is, in this screen display example, a summary of a story in a series of story productions is displayed as a related story production.

The lower part of FIG. 101 shows a screen display example of a production pattern per story related to SP bonus when the value of the ST middle villa counter is "1" and the value of the ST middle management counter is "26" or more. ing. In this screen display example, the value of the ST Churenso counter is "1" as the effect pattern per story for the SP bonus related to the ST Churenso counter value of "1". In the case of, the name scene of the story of a series of story production by the story production pattern during ST and the explanation (corresponding story) of this name scene are displayed. When displaying this famous scene, a window image (second image) displayed in the above-mentioned scheduled set window display area 704 (second image display means) is used. That is, in this screen display example, the story corresponding to the window image (second image) and the window image (second image) is displayed as the related story effect. As a related story effect, only the window image (second image) may be displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when shifting from the story section of the ST mode to the SP bonus during the second special symbol, a series of SP bonuses during the second special symbol are based on the ST story effect pattern. It is configured so that the related story production is performed by the production pattern per the related story for the SP bonus related to the story production. With such a configuration, the story production can be appropriately advanced without increasing the control load and the amount of information stored in the storage area.

Further, in the present embodiment, the related story production by the production pattern per related story for SP bonus depends on the progress of the story in the series of story production by the story production pattern during ST (for example, the value of the management counter during ST). It is configured to be displayed. With this configuration, a series of story effects performed in a predetermined section in the special game state (for example, the story section in the ST mode) and a specific game state (for example, SP bonus) in the case of a big hit in the special game state. ) Can be related to the related story production performed in), and an appropriate related story production can be performed in consideration of the time when a big hit occurs.

In this embodiment, as the degree of progress of the story in the series of story production, the case where the value of the ST management counter is less than "26" is regarded as the case where the degree of progress of the story is small, and the summary of the story in the series of story production. Is displayed, and the story corresponding to the window image (second image) and the window image (second image) is assumed to have a high degree of progress in the story when the value of the ST management counter is "26" or more. Is to be displayed, but it is not limited to this.

For example, the display content of the story summary in the related story production may be different depending on the value of the ST management counter (or the value of the set number counter). In this case, for a series of story productions, a summary may be displayed for parts other than those already performed in the story section of ST mode, and a summary may be displayed for the parts already performed in the story section of ST mode. It may be displayed, and for the other parts, the story that should have been performed by a series of story productions may be displayed as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to display a summary of the story according to the degree of progress of the story in a series of story productions. According to the present embodiment, when a series of story productions progresses according to the number of consecutive villas of big hits in the special game state (for example, ST mode) (for example, the value of the ST middle villa counter), the next series It is possible to perform a related story production in a specific game state (for example, SP bonus) with the production content of the story production and the production content that does not cause a discrepancy.

Further, for example, according to the value of the ST management counter (or the value of the set number counter), the display content of the story corresponding to the window image (second image) and the window image (second image) is further displayed. It may be different. In this case, for a series of story productions, a story corresponding to a window image (second image) and a window image (second image) corresponding to other parts other than the part already performed in the story section of ST mode is displayed. It may be displayed, and for the part already performed in the story section of the ST mode, the window image (second image) and the story corresponding to the window image (second image) corresponding to the part are displayed. For other parts, the story that was supposed to be performed by a series of story productions may be displayed as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to display a window image (second image) and a story corresponding to the window image (second image) according to the progress of the story in a series of story production. According to the present embodiment, when a series of story productions progresses according to the number of consecutive villas of a big hit in a special game state (for example, ST mode) (for example, the value of the ST middle villa counter), the next series It is possible to perform a related story production in a specific game state (for example, SP bonus) with the production content that does not cause a discrepancy with the production content of the story production, and the window image (second image) used in the series of story production. Since it is also used for the related story production, it is possible to reduce the image data for the production and secure a larger storage area.

[Screen display example of story production pattern during ST]
102 to 110 are diagrams showing a screen display example of the story effect pattern during ST. FIGS. 102 to 110 show the content of the production within the basic production time (10s) corresponding to one set (five times of the special symbol game) in the story section of the ST mode. The display area 4A, the set story display area 703 (first image display means), and the scheduled set window display area 704 (second image display means) are the same as or similar to those shown in FIG. 99. Therefore, the reference numerals are omitted in FIGS. 102 to 110. Further, the description of the first reserved quantity information 701 and the second reserved quantity information 702 is omitted in FIGS. 102 to 110 for convenience of explanation.

In FIG. 102, in any of the games of the first variation to the fifth variation, the result of the jackpot determination (lottery result) is a loss, and the first variation pattern corresponds to the first variation time (for example, 2s). It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story effect pattern in ST in a predetermined set when the variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern which shows shortening variation) is determined. The remaining effect time is calculated based on the above-mentioned basic effect time (10 s) and the value of the ST management counter (or the value of the in-set counter) (see FIG. 84), and is in the set (1). / 5-5 / 5) indicates the number of games in one set. The same applies to FIGS. 103 to 110. In FIG. 102, since the remaining production time and the fluctuation time are synchronized, a series of story productions in a predetermined set progresses based on the basic production time.

In FIG. 103, in the first and second fluctuation games, the result of the jackpot determination (lottery result) is a loss, and as the fluctuation pattern, the above-mentioned first fluctuation pattern corresponding to the above-mentioned first fluctuation time is used. In the third variation, the result of the jackpot determination (lottery result) is a hit, and the variation pattern is a second variation time (for example, 6s) longer than the above-mentioned first variation time (for example, 2s). It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story effect pattern in ST in a predetermined set when the 2nd variation pattern corresponding to (for example, the variation pattern which shows a normal reach) is determined. In FIG. 103, since the remaining production time and the fluctuation time are synchronized, a series of story productions in a predetermined one set progresses based on the basic production time, and at the end of the predetermined one set, based on the jackpot notification production data. A big hit announcement production will be performed.

In FIG. 104, in the first variation game, the result of the jackpot determination (lottery result) is a loss, and the above-mentioned first variation pattern corresponding to the above-mentioned first variation time is determined as the variation pattern. In the variation, the result of the jackpot determination (lottery result) is a hit, and the variation pattern corresponds to the second variation time (for example, 6s) longer than the above-mentioned first variation time (for example, 2s). It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story effect pattern during ST in a predetermined set when 2 fluctuation patterns (for example, the fluctuation pattern which shows a normal reach A) are determined. In FIG. 104, since the remaining production time is longer than the fluctuation time, the second time (2) in the set of the in-set productions (the part corresponding to the predetermined one set in a series of story productions) in the predetermined one set. For the part corresponding to the / 5) to the 5th time (5/5), the in-set production is advanced so that the remaining production time and the fluctuation time are synchronized. That is, the remaining part of the in-set effect is advanced so that the remaining part of the in-set effect, which is normally performed over 8 s as the remaining effect time, ends in 6 s. In addition, various modes can be adopted as the mode for advancing the remaining part of the effect in the set. For example, control that changes the playback speed (that is, fast-forward playback) so that the playback time is 6 s, where the image data (video data) related to the remaining portion of the effect in the set is normally played for 8 s. May be performed, or control for changing the frame rate (that is, thinning-out reproduction) may be performed. Further, these changed image data (video data) may be stored in advance. The same applies to FIGS. 106 and 110.

In FIGS. 105 and 106, in the game of the first variation to the third variation, the result of the jackpot determination (lottery result) is a loss, and the variation pattern corresponds to the above-mentioned first variation time. The fluctuation pattern is determined, and in the fourth fluctuation, the result of the jackpot determination (lottery result) is a hit, and the fluctuation pattern is a second fluctuation time (for example, 2s) longer than the above-mentioned first fluctuation time (for example, 2s). During ST in the next one set (next set) following the predetermined one set and the predetermined one set when the second fluctuation pattern corresponding to (10s)) (for example, the fluctuation pattern indicating normal reach B) is determined. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of a story production pattern. In FIGS. 105 and 106, since the fluctuation time is longer than the remaining production time, the in-set production in a predetermined set is performed according to the basic production time, and a series of story productions proceed. Here, the effectable time is calculated based on the second variation time (for example, 10 s) and the remaining effect time (for example, 4 s which is the remaining effect time of the fourth variation) (see FIG. 84). In the screen display example shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the effectable time is 6 s. Further, since the effectable time is 6 s, the effect end target set is the next set. As for the in-set production in the next set, the first (1/5) to the fifth (5/5) in-set production in the set (the part corresponding to the next set in the series of story production) in the next set. ), The in-set production is advanced so that the production possible time and the fluctuation time are synchronized. That is, the remaining part of the in-set effect is advanced so that the remaining part of the in-set effect, which is normally performed over 10 s as the remaining effect time, ends in 6 s.

In FIGS. 107 to 110, in the games of the first variation to the third variation, the result of the jackpot determination (lottery result) is a loss, and the variation pattern corresponds to the above-mentioned first variation time. The fluctuation pattern is determined, and in the fourth fluctuation, the result of the jackpot determination (lottery result) is a hit, and the fluctuation pattern is a second fluctuation time (for example, 2s) longer than the above-mentioned first fluctuation time (for example, 2s). , 30s), when a second variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern indicating super reach) has been determined, a predetermined set, a predetermined set, a next set following the predetermined set, and a next set following the next set. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story effect pattern in ST in 1 set after 2 sets, and 1 set after 3 sets (after the next set to 3 sets) following 1 set after 2 sets. In FIGS. 107 to 110, since the fluctuation time is longer than the remaining production time, the in-set production in a predetermined set is performed according to the basic production time, and a series of story productions proceed. Further, in the screen display examples shown in FIGS. 107 to 110, since the effectable time is 26 s, the effect target set is after 3 sets, and the in-set effect after the next set and 2 sets is also the basic effect time. A series of story productions will proceed according to the street. As for the in-set production after 3 sets, the 1st (1/5) to 5th (5) in the set of the in-set effects after 3 sets (the part corresponding to after 3 sets in a series of story productions). For the part corresponding to / 5), the in-set production is advanced so that the production possible time and the fluctuation time are synchronized. That is, the remaining part of the in-set effect is advanced so that the remaining part of the in-set effect, which is normally performed over 10 s as the remaining effect time, ends in 6 s.

Further, in FIGS. 107 to 110, of the in-set effects in a predetermined set, the effect ends from the portion corresponding to the fifth time (5/5) in the set to the in-set effects in the next set and after two sets. The window image suggesting the in-set effect after 3 sets, which is the target set, is displayed in the scheduled set window display area 704 (second image display means) in a special effect mode based on the special effect data during ST. It has become. Specifically, the window image suggesting the in-set effect after three sets, which is the effect end target set, is displayed by highlighting, which is a display mode different from the usual one. The display mode different from the usual is not limited to this, and the outer frame of the window image may be a display mode different from the normal, and the translucent image showing a big hit in the window image ( For example, the letter V) may be displayed. Further, the special effect mode based on the special effect data during ST is not limited to displaying the window image in a display mode different from the usual one, and the story image to be displayed in the set story display area 703 (first image display means) is displayed. It may be displayed in a display mode different from the usual one.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case where a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 times) is set as one set in a predetermined section (for example, the story section in the ST mode) in the special gaming state, a series of story production is advanced. , The time obtained by multiplying the first fluctuation time (for example, 2s) by a predetermined number of games (five times corresponding to one set) is defined as the basic production time (for example, 10s), and the number of sets is based on this basic production time. Progress the story corresponding to. Then, when the fluctuation pattern determined in the case of a big hit is the second fluctuation pattern corresponding to the second fluctuation time (for example, 30s) longer than the first fluctuation time, the variation pattern is within one set. The remaining production time is calculated based on the number of games played in the game and the basic production time, and if the second fluctuation time is longer than the remaining production time, the production end target set for the next and subsequent sets is special. By suggesting by the effect mode (for example, the effect mode in which the window image suggesting the effect in the set of the effect end target set is displayed in a display mode different from the usual one), the specific game state (for example, SP) in the effect end target set It is configured to notify you of the transition to (bonus).

With this configuration, it is possible to roughly synchronize the production time of a series of story effects executed over multiple games and the fluctuation time of the identification symbol with one set as one unit with a simple configuration. At the same time, even if it is decided that it will be a big hit, a big hit notice (specific game) that will advance a series of story productions so as not to cause inconsistency as much as possible and will improve the interest for the player. It is possible to give a notice of transition to the state).

Further, in the present embodiment, in the series of story productions, the portion corresponding to the number of target sets suggested by the special production mode (for example, the production in the set of the production end target set) has a second variation time. It is configured to advance the story in sync with the end. With this configuration, it is possible to synchronize the production time of multiple sets in a series of story production with the fluctuation time of the identification symbol, and it is possible to perform a series of story production and a big hit notice in a more comfortable manner. Will be.

Further, in the present embodiment, the window image (second image) corresponding to the number of sets to be suggested by the special production mode in the series of story production is displayed in a display mode different from the usual one. It is configured. By configuring in this way, a window image (second image) that suggests a story corresponding to the number of sets from the next time onward will be used to give a big hit notice (shift to a specific game state) that will further improve the interest. It will be possible to give a notice).

[Example of screen display for item look-ahead effect]
111 to 113 are diagrams showing a screen display example of the item look-ahead effect. The upper left of FIG. 111 shows an image display example when the effect image indicating that the plate A is acquired is displayed in the display area 4A before the change, and the upper right of FIG. 111 shows the image before the change. In the lower left of FIG. 111, an image display example is shown in which an effect image indicating that the plate B has been acquired is displayed in the display area 4A, and the plate C has been acquired before the change. An image display example is shown in the case where the effect image showing the above is displayed in the display area 4A, and in the lower right of FIG. 111, the effect image showing that the plate D is acquired before the change is shown in the display area 4A. An example of displaying an image when it is displayed is shown.

In the effect image showing that the plate A is acquired, it is shown that the expectation type associated with the plate A together with the image of the plate A is a pseudo-continuous effect, and it is shown that the plate B is acquired. In the effect image, it is shown that the expectation type associated with the plate B is the dialogue effect together with the image of the plate B, and in the effect image showing that the plate C is acquired, the plate C is shown together with the image of the plate C. In the effect image showing that the type of expectation associated with is a cut-in effect and the plate D is acquired, the expectation is increased by acquiring the plate D together with the image of the plate D. It is shown to be higher. In this way, before the change, the degree of expectation that the type of the acquired plate (item) is associated with the plate (item) according to the processing result of the item acquisition effect processing (see FIG. 90). It will be notified together with the type.

FIG. 112 shows the case where the pseudo-ream number is “1” (that is, the pseudo-ream is executed once) in the item look-ahead effect (more specifically, the item use effect process shown in FIGS. 86 to 89). It is a figure which shows the screen display example of. (A) of FIG. 112 shows the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol 700, (b) shows the effect display corresponding to the effect data of the normal temporary stop, and (c) indicates the use of the plate A. (D) shows the effect display corresponding to the effect data of the pseudo-continuous temporary stop, and (e) shows the effect display corresponding to the effect data of the pseudo-continuous temporary stop, and (e) shows the decorative symbol 700 from the pseudo-continuous temporary stop. Indicates the start of re-variation, and (f) indicates that the decorative symbol 700 has stopped and displayed in the reach state.

In the variation of the item look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 112, first, as shown in (a), the variation display of the decorative symbol 700 is started in the normal variation mode. Here, for example, when the plate A is acquired and it is not notified that the plate A is acquired before the fluctuation, the effect image similar to the effect image shown in the upper left of FIG. 111 is used. It is notified that the plate A has been acquired (see S491 in FIG. 86). Next, when one plate A is acquired, as shown in (b), only one plate A is obtained rather than the predetermined expectation degree (one pseudo-ream) as the expectation of the pseudo-ream effect. After the effect display of the normal temporary stop with low expectation (indicating 0 times of pseudo-ream) is performed, the effect display using the plate A is performed as shown in (c), and based on this plate A, ( As shown in d) and (e), the effect display of the pseudo-ream temporary stop and the re-variation start is performed according to a predetermined expectation degree (pseudo-ream once). Then, as shown in (f), it is notified whether or not the player is in the reach state and finally becomes a big hit. On the other hand, when the plate A is not acquired, as shown in (d) and (e), the effect of pseudo-continuous temporary stop and re-variation start according to a predetermined degree of expectation (pseudo-ream once). The display is done. Then, as shown in (f), it is notified whether or not the player is in the reach state and finally becomes a big hit.

FIG. 113 shows a case where the pseudo-ream number is “3” (that is, the pseudo-ream is executed three times) in the item look-ahead effect (more specifically, the item use effect process shown in FIGS. 86 to 89). It is a figure which shows the screen display example in the case which two plates A are acquired. Since (a) to (f) of FIG. 113 are the same as those shown in FIG. 112, the display contents of the screen are omitted in FIG. 113.

Also in the variation of the item look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 113, first, as shown in (a), the variation display of the decorative symbol 700 is started in the normal variation mode. Here, since the number of pseudo-reams is "3" and the number of plates A is 2, so that the plate A is used in the later pseudo-ream production in the fluctuation, the plates are used in the first pseudo-ream. A is not used. Therefore, (d) pseudo-ream temporary stop and (e) re-variation start effect display are performed, and the first pseudo-ream ends. Next, since the number of pseudo-reams is "2" and the number of plates A is 2, (b) normal temporary stop, (c) plate A is used, (d) pseudo-ream temporary stop and (e) revariation. The start effect display is performed, and the second pseudo-ream ends. Next, since the number of pseudo-reams is "1" and the number of plates A is 2, (b) normal temporary stop, (c) plate A is used, (d) pseudo-ream temporary stop and (e) revariation. The start effect display is performed, the third pseudo-ream ends, (f) the reach effect display is performed, and it is notified whether or not the final hit will be a big hit.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of predetermined items (for example, plate A) specified in the item look-ahead effect is 0, a predetermined expectation type (for example, pseudo-ream) corresponding to the predetermined item is used. A predetermined effect (for example, (d) pseudo-continuous temporary stop and (e) effect display of re-variation start) in which a predetermined expectation degree (for example, the number of pseudo stations) is notified. Is executed, and when the number of predetermined items (for example, plate A) specified in the item look-ahead effect is 1 or more, the expectation degree of a predetermined expectation type (for example, pseudo-continuous effect) corresponding to the predetermined item. After being notified of an expectation degree that is lower than a predetermined expectation degree as (for example, a pseudo-ream number) by a predetermined number of items (for example, (b) a normal temporary stop effect display is performed), a predetermined degree is determined. A predetermined expectation is notified based on the item (for example, based on (c) the effect display of using the plate A) (for example, (d) pseudo-continuous temporary stop and (e) re-operation). The effect display of the start of fluctuation is performed). With this configuration, it is possible to give a more varied jackpot notice (notice of transition to a specific gaming state).

[Modified example of this embodiment]
Next, a modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. In each of the following modifications, each process in the present embodiment shall be performed in the same manner unless otherwise specified.

<Hit effect pattern determination table (variation example)>
FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a hit effect pattern determination table of this modification. In the hit effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 56, the type of the hit effect pattern to be determined is specified according to the lottery value for each type of the hit pattern, but the hit effect pattern determination shown in FIG. 114 is determined. In the table (variation example), the type of winning effect pattern to be determined is further defined according to the winning rate. The winning rate may be determined by the main CPU 61 or the sub CPU 71.

The winning rate is, for example, a game won in the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, the first big winning opening 36, the second big winning opening 37, or the general winning opening 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D in a predetermined period. It can be obtained from the number of balls or the number of game balls that have won a prize in a predetermined combination thereof. Further, the predetermined period is, for example, a certain period in the non-probability / non-time saving gaming state, a certain period in the non-probability / time-saving gaming state, a certain period in the probabilistic / time-saving gaming state, or a certain period in the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state). , Or any of these predetermined periods can be set as a combination thereof. In this modification, as an example of the winning rate, the number of game balls won in the first big winning opening 36 / the specific first round game (for example, the 1st round) in the big hit game state (specific game state) is required. The winning rate will be calculated from the time. For example, if the number of game balls won in the first big winning opening 36 is 9, and the time required for a specific first round game in the big hit game state (specific game state) is 18 s, the prize is won per s. The rate will be 50%. Here, the threshold value of the winning rate can be set as appropriate, but in this modification, the threshold value of the winning rate of 50% is taken as an example of the threshold value. In the hit effect pattern determination table (modification example) shown in FIG. 114, the description of the hit effect pattern corresponding to the story bonus and the hit effect pattern corresponding to the battle bonus is omitted for convenience of explanation. ..

As shown in FIG. 114, in the hit effect pattern determination table (modification example), as the type of the hit pattern, the music pattern A constituting the live bonus 9R success (similar to the hit effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 56). Success), music pattern A (reversal) constituting live bonus 5R success, music pattern A (failure) constituting live bonus 8R failure and live bonus 4R failure are defined. Regarding the music pattern A (success), the music pattern A (success) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold value and the music pattern A (success) short selected when the winning rate is equal to or more than the threshold value. Is stipulated. Further, regarding the music pattern A (reversal), the music pattern A selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold value.
(Reversal) long and music pattern A (reverse) short selected when the winning rate is equal to or higher than the threshold value are specified. Regarding the music pattern A (failure), the music pattern A (failure) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold value and the music pattern A (failure) short selected when the winning rate is equal to or more than the threshold value. Is stipulated. Here, "long" indicates a hit effect pattern in which the effect time (for example, the time during which the music pattern A is output) is set to a relatively long time, and "short" means the effect time. Indicates a hit effect pattern set in a relatively short time. That is, in this modification, the music pattern A (success) long and the music pattern A (success) short both constitute the live bonus 9R success, but the time when the music corresponding to the music pattern A is output in the live bonus. It is a hit effect pattern that is configured to be different.

Similarly, regarding the music pattern B (success), the music pattern B (success) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold value and the music pattern B (success) selected when the winning rate is equal to or more than the threshold value. For music pattern B (reversal) where a short is specified, music pattern B (reversal) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold value and music pattern B selected when the winning rate is equal to or more than the threshold value ( (Reverse) Short is specified, and for music pattern B (failure), music pattern B (failure) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold value and music pattern selected when the winning rate is greater than or equal to the threshold value. B (failure) short is specified. Similarly, regarding the music pattern C (confirmed), the music pattern C (confirmed) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold value and the music pattern C selected when the winning rate is equal to or more than the threshold value (similarly). Confirmed) Short is specified.

Here, the winning rate can be an index as to whether or not the player actively launches the game ball using the launching device 26 (that is, whether the player is active in the game). Therefore, if the player is active in the game, for example, the music pattern A (success) short is selected as the hit effect pattern, and if the player is not active in the game, for example. By configuring the music pattern A (success) long to be selected as the hit effect pattern, a big hit game state (specific game state) that matches the player's game tendency (game progress speed) is produced. At the same time, it is possible to make it easier to synchronize the end of the output of the music according to the music pattern with the end of the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state).

In the same hit effect pattern (for example, music pattern A (success)), various methods can be used as a method for differently outputting the output time. For example, the music pattern A (success) long constitutes each section as shown in the upper part of FIG. 94, and the music pattern A (success) short corresponds to one or more sections of each section. The time may be shortened, or the section where the output is not output may be defined. Further, as a method of shortening the production time, the tempo of the music corresponding to the music pattern may be increased, or the arranged music may be output.

Further, various timings can be taken as the timing for determining the winning rate. For example, in the above-mentioned example, the winning rate in the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) shifted immediately before the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) in which the live bonus is to be performed this time may be determined. In this case, the winning rate to be determined is updated every time the jackpot game state (specific game state) is reached. In addition, the winning rate from when the power of the gaming machine is turned on or when returning from a predetermined error (for example, a door opening error indicating that the table frame 3 or the protective glass 7 has been opened, a backup error of the work RAM 73, etc.) The average value may be calculated. In this case, the winning rate to be determined is cleared when the gaming machine is turned off or when a predetermined error occurs.

Further, in the above example, when calculating the winning rate, the number of game balls winning in the first big winning opening 36 or the second big winning opening 37 / the game ball fired in the big hit game state (specific game state). The winning rate may be calculated from the number of. Also in this case, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the player is active in the game.

<Story production table group>
FIG. 115 is a conceptual diagram showing a story production table group of this modification. In the present embodiment, a series of story productions are performed in the story section of the ST mode, and when the story section of the ST mode is changed to the SP bonus, the related story productions related to the series of story productions are performed in the SP bonus. However, in this modification, the production related to a specific story is performed in all the production modes (game states), and the story is advanced in units of specific stories.

For example, when the specific story is the first story, in the normal mode, the effect pattern is determined by referring to the effect pattern determination table in the first story corresponding normal mode corresponding to the first story. As a result, in the normal mode, it is possible to determine an effect pattern or the like corresponding to the effect of introducing the character appearing in the first story. Further, in the short mode of the time saving mode, the effect pattern is determined by referring to the effect pattern determination table in the first story corresponding short mode corresponding to the first story. Further, in the long mode of the time saving mode, the effect pattern is determined by referring to the effect pattern determination table in the long mode corresponding to the first story corresponding to the first story. As a result, in the time saving mode, it is possible to determine an effect pattern or the like corresponding to the effect in which the background image related to the first story is displayed. Further, in the first special symbol hit, the hit effect pattern is determined by referring to the first story corresponding hit effect pattern determination table corresponding to the first story. As a result, in the live bonus, the music pattern related to the first story can be selected, in the story bonus, the story pattern related to the first story can be selected, and in the battle bonus, the battle related to the first story can be selected. Allows the pattern to be selected. Further, during the second special symbol hit, the hit effect pattern is determined by referring to the hit effect pattern determination table for the first story corresponding SP bonus corresponding to the first story. As a result, in the SP bonus, it is related to the first story depending on whether the production mode before the transition is the time saving mode, the story section of the ST mode, or the battle reach section of the ST mode. The hit effect pattern can be selected. Further, in the ST mode, the production pattern determination table in the ST mode corresponding to the first story corresponding to the first story is referred to, and it is related to the first story depending on whether it is a story section or a battle reach section. It is possible to select the effect pattern to be performed. The same applies when the specific story is the second story or the third story.

In addition, from the first effect control state, which is the state in which the effect related to the first story is performed (that is, the state in which each effect pattern is selected from the first story effect table group), the effect related to the second story is performed. The effect related to the third story is performed from the transition condition to the second effect control state, which is the state (that is, the state in which each effect pattern is selected from the second story effect table group), and the second effect control state. Various conditions can be taken for the transition condition to the third effect control state, which is a state (that is, a state in which each effect pattern is selected from the third story effect table group). As an example, for example, if a big hit is obtained in the normal mode of the first effect control state and a V prize is obtained during the first special symbol hit in the first effect control state, the first effect is also performed in the ST mode that shifts thereafter. The control state is continued, and the transition to the second effect control state is performed with the end of the ST mode as the transition condition. In addition, if a non-V prize is won during the first special symbol hit in the first effect control state, the first effect control state is continued even in the time saving mode that shifts thereafter, and the end of the time saving mode is set as the transition condition. , Move to the second effect control state. Alternatively, the transition to the second effect control state may be performed on the condition that the non-V prize is won during the first special symbol hit in the first effect control state. That is, at the end of a specific gaming state (for example, during the first special symbol hit), a special gaming state (for example, ST mode), or a time-saving gaming state (for example, time-saving mode), which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, each It can be configured to shift the effect control state (first to third effect control states). With such a configuration, even when a state advantageous to the player ends, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by advancing a specific story.

Further, as another example, the transition to the second effect control state is performed on the condition that a big hit is obtained in the normal mode of the first effect control state and a V prize is obtained during the first special symbol hit of the first effect control state. If a non-V prize is won during the first special symbol hit in the first effect control state, the first effect control state is continued even in the time saving mode that shifts thereafter. Alternatively, the transition to the second effect control state may be performed on the condition that a big hit is obtained in the normal mode of the first effect control state. That is, each effect control state (first to third effects) at the time of transition to the specific game state (for example, during the first special symbol hit) or the special game state (for example, ST mode), which is an advantageous game state for the player. It can be configured to shift the control state). With this configuration, when the player shifts to a state advantageous to the player, a specific story progresses, so that the player's motivation to play can be increased.

It should be noted that various conditions can be taken for the initialization condition for shifting the effect control state to the initial control state (for example, the first effect control state). For example, the initialization condition may be that the gaming machine is turned off or that the above-mentioned predetermined error occurs, and the demo display is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 for a predetermined time or longer (for example, 30 minutes or longer). ) The continuation may be the initialization condition.

<Main fluctuation time determination table (variation example)>
FIG. 116 is a diagram showing a main fluctuation time determination table of this modification. In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 71 is determined by the main CPU 61 in the story section of the ST mode by performing the ST mode processing (see FIG. 83) and the ST story effect pattern change processing (see FIG. 84). It was supposed to synchronize the fluctuation pattern (end timing of the fluctuation time of the identification symbol) with the end of the in-set effect in the series of story effects, but in this modification, the main CPU 61 further ends the in-set effect. The configuration is such that the fluctuation pattern to be synchronized (the end timing of the fluctuation time of the identification symbol) is determined. Although the detailed description of the main fluctuation time determination table is omitted in the present embodiment, the same main fluctuation time determination table as shown in FIG. 116 may be adopted, and some or all of them are different. The main fluctuation time determination table may be adopted.

In the main fluctuation time determination table (variation example) shown in FIG. 116, the result of the jackpot determination (winning), the current game state (non-probability / non-time reduction, non-probability / time reduction, probability variation / time reduction), and the reach determination random number. The types of fluctuation patterns to be determined are defined according to various parameters such as the range (0 to 250) and the random number range for effect selection (0 to 99), and the game state is probablely changed and the game state is shortened. In the case of ST game state), whether the number of games is "1 to 50 times" (whether it is a story section in ST mode) or "51 to 180 times" (battle reach section in ST mode). The types of fluctuation patterns are specified according to the type of fluctuation. Further, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit, different types of fluctuation patterns are further defined according to the value of the in-set counter. In the present embodiment, the case where the in-set counter is provided in the work RAM 73 and is counted by the sub CPU 71 is described. However, in this modification, the in-set counter is also provided in the main RAM 63. It is assumed that the number of games in the set is counted by the main CPU 61. Further, the count of the number of games in the probable change / time saving game state (ST game state) may be obtained from the value of the probabilistic change number counter. Further, the ST middle management counter is also provided in the main RAM 63, and the main CPU 61 is used. The number of games may be counted.

The reach determination random number range defines a range of reach determination random numbers that determines the reach variation time that determines the reach variation time or does not determine the reach variation time. The reach determination random number value is extracted from a reach determination counter (not shown) and stored in the main RAM 73 when the game ball wins a prize in the first start opening 32 or the second start opening 33 in each gaming state. Further, the random number range for effect selection defines the range of random numbers for reach determination, the fluctuation time, and the range of random numbers for effect selection corresponding to the effect content. The effect selection random value is extracted from an effect selection counter (not shown) and stored in the main RAM 73 when the game ball wins the first start port 32 or the second start port 33 in each game state.

In the hit effect pattern determination table (modification example) shown in FIG. 116, for example, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the selection rate is 96/100 and the fluctuation pattern is “02H”. Is selected, and "03H" is selected as the fluctuation pattern with a selection rate of 4/100. The variation pattern “02H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 2000 ms (2 s) and the effect content is shortened variation A. Further, the variation pattern "03H" is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 4000 ms (4 s) and the effect content is the shortened variation B. Here, the fluctuation pattern "02H" corresponds to the above-mentioned first fluctuation pattern corresponding to a specific fluctuation time (for example, 2s), and is determined with high probability in the story section of the ST mode. .. However, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the fluctuation pattern "02H" may always be selected.

Further, for example, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit and the value of the counter in the set is "1" (that is, when it is the first game in one set), With a selection rate of 96/100, "07H" is selected as the variation pattern, with a selection rate of 2/100, "04H" is selected as the variation pattern, and with a selection rate of 2/100, "05H" is selected as the variation pattern. Will be done. The variation pattern "07H" is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 10000 ms (10 s) and the effect content is the special variation A. Further, the fluctuation pattern "04H" is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 20000 ms (20 s) and the effect content is super reach A. Further, the fluctuation pattern "05H" is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 30,000 ms (30 s) and the effect content is super reach B. Here, the fluctuation pattern "07H" corresponds to the above-mentioned second fluctuation pattern different from the above-mentioned first fluctuation pattern, and is determined with high probability in the story section of the ST mode. However, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit and the value of the in-set counter is "1", the fluctuation pattern "07H" may always be selected.

Further, for example, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit and the value of the counter in the set is "2" (that is, when it is the second game in one set), With a selection rate of 96/100, "08H" is selected as the variation pattern, with a selection rate of 2/100, "04H" is selected as the variation pattern, and with a selection rate of 2/100, "05H" is selected as the variation pattern. Will be done. The variation pattern "08H" is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 8000 ms (8 s) and the effect content is the special variation B. Here, similarly to the above, the fluctuation pattern "08H" corresponds to the above-mentioned second fluctuation pattern different from the above-mentioned first fluctuation pattern, and is determined with high probability in the story section of the ST mode. ing. However, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit and the value of the in-set counter is "2", the fluctuation pattern "08H" may always be selected.

Further, for example, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit and the value of the counter in the set is "3" (that is, when it is the third game in one set), With a selection rate of 96/100, "09H" is selected as the variation pattern, with a selection rate of 2/100, "04H" is selected as the variation pattern, and with a selection rate of 2/100, "05H" is selected as the variation pattern. Will be done. The variation pattern "09H" is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 6000 ms (6 s) and the effect content is the special variation C. Here, similarly to the above, the fluctuation pattern "09H" corresponds to the above-mentioned second fluctuation pattern different from the above-mentioned first fluctuation pattern, and is determined with high probability in the story section of the ST mode. ing. However, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit and the value of the in-set counter is "3", the fluctuation pattern "09H" may always be selected.

Further, for example, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit and the value of the counter in the set is "4" (that is, when it is the fourth game in one set), With a selection rate of 96/100, "0AH" is selected as the variation pattern, with a selection rate of 2/100, "04H" is selected as the variation pattern, and with a selection rate of 2/100, "05H" is selected as the variation pattern. Will be done. The variation pattern "0AH" is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 4000 ms (4 s) and the effect content is the special variation D. Here, similarly to the above, the fluctuation pattern "0AH" corresponds to the above-mentioned second fluctuation pattern different from the above-mentioned first fluctuation pattern, and is determined with high probability in the story section of the ST mode. ing. However, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit and the value of the in-set counter is "4", the fluctuation pattern "0AH" may always be selected.

Further, for example, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit and the value of the counter in the set is "5" (that is, when it is the fifth game in one set), With a selection rate of 96/100, "0BH" is selected as the variation pattern, with a selection rate of 2/100, "04H" is selected as the variation pattern, and with a selection rate of 2/100, "05H" is selected as the variation pattern. Will be done. The variation pattern "0BH" is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 2000 ms (2 s) and the effect content is the special variation E. Here, similarly to the above, the fluctuation pattern "0BH" corresponds to the above-mentioned second fluctuation pattern different from the above-mentioned first fluctuation pattern, and is determined with high probability in the story section of the ST mode. ing. However, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit and the value of the in-set counter is "5", the fluctuation pattern "0BH" may always be selected.

As described above, in this modification, the second fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the in-set counter, but as described above, the value of the in-set counter is "1". In a certain case, the above-mentioned remaining effect time in the one set is 10 s, and when the value of the counter in the set is "2", the above-mentioned remaining effect time in the one set is 8 s, and it is in the set. When the value of the counter is "3", the above-mentioned remaining effect time in the one set is 6 s, and when the value of the counter in the set is "4", the above-mentioned remaining effect in the one set. The time is 4 s, and when the value of the in-set counter is "5", the above-mentioned remaining effect time in the one set is 2 s. That is, in this modification, the variation time is synchronized with the end of the predetermined effect (in-set effect) by determining the variation pattern using the hit effect pattern determination table (transformation example) shown in FIG. 116. The second variation pattern corresponding to is determined. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately synchronize the production time of a predetermined effect (for example, the effect in the set) in which a series of effects are executed over a plurality of games and the fluctuation time of the identification symbol. Become.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following gaming machines can be provided.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board (for example, a gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which the gaming medium can roll, and a starting area (for example, a first) provided in the gaming area through which the gaming medium can pass. A first variable winning device (for example, a first variable winning device (for example, 1 start port 32, a second start port 33), which is provided in the game area and can be varied into a first mode in which it is easy to accept a game medium and a second mode in which it is difficult to accept a game medium. The first large winning opening 36) and a specific area (for example, a specific area) provided in the game area, which can be varied into a first aspect in which the game medium is easily accepted and a second aspect in which the game medium is difficult to be accepted, and through which the game medium can pass. , A specific gaming state (eg, a specific gaming state) advantageous to the player, provided that the gaming medium has passed through the second variable winning device (for example, the second large winning opening 37) having the specific area 38A) inside. , The specific game state transition determination means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to the big hit game state), and the determination result for shifting to the specific game state by the specific game state transition determination means can be obtained. The specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) that controls the game state to the specific game state, and the specific game on the condition that the game medium passes through the specific area in the specific game state. After the state is completed, the special gaming state is controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a probabilistic / shortened gaming state) in which a determination result indicating the transition to the specific gaming state is relatively easy to be obtained by the specific gaming state transition determination means. A control means (for example, the main CPU 61) and a first round game executing means (for example, a first round game executing means capable of executing a first round game for varying the first variable winning device into the first aspect and the second aspect in the specific gaming state). For example, the main CPU 61) and the second round game executing means (for example, the main) capable of executing the second round game in which the second variable winning device is changed to the first mode and the second mode a predetermined number of times in the specific game state. The CPU 61), a music pattern selection means (for example, a sub CPU 71) that selects a music pattern from a plurality of music patterns when the specific game state control means controls the specific game state, and the music pattern selection. A gaming machine including a music output means (for example, a speaker 10) that outputs a music corresponding to a music pattern selected by the means in the special gaming state, and the second round game execution means is the first. During the execution of the two-round game, the passage of the game medium to the specific area is relatively It is possible to perform a specific second round game that becomes easy, and the specific game state is the first round game of the first specific number of times (for example, 4 times of 1 to 4R) by the first round game execution means. Is executed, the first specific game state (for example, the big hit game state according to the hit pattern 3) in which the specific second round game is executed at least once by the second round game execution means, and the first A second specific game state (for example, a hit pattern) in which the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game execution means after the first round game is executed the first specific number of times by the one round game execution means. The music pattern selection means includes a first music pattern (for example, a music pattern) when the specific game state control means controls the music pattern selection means to the first specific game state. A (reverse)) can be selected, and a second music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure)) can be selected when the specific game state control means controls the second specific game state. In the first music pattern, the first common portion of a predetermined music (for example, A melody in the first section) is output by the music output means, and a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) is set. It is a music pattern in which it is predetermined that a specific part of the predetermined music (for example, reversal of the fifth section) is output after the lapse of time, and the second music pattern is the predetermined music output means. It is a music pattern in which the first common part of the music is output, and after the predetermined branching period elapses, the specific part of the predetermined music is not output. When either the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means, a predetermined time (for example, during the waiting time before the start of the first R when the initial section is started). When the first music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means, the specific second round game is started by the second round game execution means at the predetermined time. A gaming machine, characterized in that it is a time when the output of the specific portion of the predetermined music can be started before the execution of the music is started.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board (for example, a gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which the gaming medium can roll, and a starting area (for example, a starting area) provided in the gaming area and through which the gaming medium can pass. , 1st start port 32, 2nd start port 33), and the first aspect provided in the game area, which is easy to accept the game medium, and the second mode, which is difficult to accept the game medium, can be varied, and the game medium passes through. It is advantageous to the player on condition that the variable winning device (for example, the large winning opening 37 shown in FIG. 117) having a possible specific region (for example, the specific region 38A) inside and the gaming medium have passed through the starting region. The specific gaming state transition determination means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state (for example, the big hit gaming state) and the specific gaming state transition determination means are used to shift to the specific gaming state. The specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) that controls the game state to the specific game state, and the game medium has passed through the specific area in the specific game state, on condition that the determination result of the above is obtained. As a condition, after the specific gaming state is completed, it is relatively easy to obtain a determination result that the specific gaming state transition determination means shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, a probability change / time saving gaming state). The special gaming state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) to be controlled to the above, and the first variable winning device are varied into the first and second aspects in the specific gaming state, and the gaming medium is passed through the specific area. The first round game executing means (for example, the main CPU 61) capable of executing the first round game relatively difficult, and the second variable winning device in the specific gaming state are the first aspect and the second. A second-round game executing means (for example, the main CPU 61) capable of executing a specific second-round game a predetermined number of times, which is varied depending on the embodiment and makes it relatively easy for the game medium to pass through the specific area, and the specific game. A music pattern selection means (for example, a sub CPU 71) that selects a music pattern from a plurality of music patterns when the state control means controls the specific gaming state, and a music pattern selected by the music pattern selection means. A gaming machine including a music output means (for example, a speaker 10) that outputs music according to the above-mentioned special game state, and the specific game state is the first specific number of times by the first round game execution means. (For example, 4 times of 1 to 4R) The first round game After being executed, the first specific game state (for example, the big hit game state according to the hit pattern 3) in which the specific second round game is executed at least once by the second round game execution means, and the first one. A second specific game state (for example, a hit pattern 8) in which the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game execution means after the first round game is executed the first specific number of times by the round game execution means. When the music pattern selection means is controlled to the first specific gaming state by the specific gaming state control means, the first music pattern (for example, music pattern A) is included. (Reversal)) can be selected, and a second music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure)) can be selected when the specific game state control means controls the second specific game state. In the first music pattern, the first common part (for example, A melody of the first section) of a predetermined music is output by the music output means, and a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) elapses. It is a music pattern in which it is predetermined that a specific part of the predetermined music (for example, reversal of the fifth section) is output, and the second music pattern is the predetermined music output means. It is a music pattern in which the first common part of the music is output and the specific part of the predetermined music is not output after the predetermined branching period has elapsed, and the music output means is the music output means. When either the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means, from a predetermined time (for example, during the waiting time before the start of the first R when the initial section is started). When the output of the predetermined music is started and the first music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means at the predetermined time, the second round game execution means of the specific second round game. A gaming machine characterized in that it is a time when the output of the specific portion of the predetermined music can be started before the execution is started.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a predetermined music (for example, in the first specific gaming state in which the specific second round game is executed and in the second specific gaming state in which the specific second round game is not executed). The first common portion (for example, the verse of the first section) of the music corresponding to the music pattern A is output, and a predetermined branching period (for example, the first branching section) elapses. Then, in the first specific game state, after the lapse of the predetermined branch period, a specific part of a predetermined music (for example, reversal of the fifth section) suggesting that the specific second round game is executed is output. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player in the specific gaming state.

Further, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, before the execution of the specific second round game is started, the output of the specific part of the predetermined music is started at a predetermined time (for example, the initial section). By configuring so that the output of a predetermined song (for example, the output of the intro of the initial section) is started from (during the waiting time before the start of the 1st round), it is not necessary to monitor the round game. , It is possible to prevent the control load from increasing.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the specific gaming state is the second specific number of times (for example, 8 times of 1 to 8R), which is larger than the first specific number of times by the first round game execution means. A third specific game state (for example, a big hit game state corresponding to the hit pattern 1) in which the specific second round game is executed at least once by the second round game execution means after the one round game is executed. , A fourth specific game state (for example,) in which the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game execution means after the first round game is executed the second specific number of times by the first round game execution means. , A big hit game state according to the hit pattern 7), and the music pattern selection means is controlled to the third specific game state by the specific game state control means, a third music pattern (for example, , Music pattern A
(Success)) can be selected, and a fourth music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure)) can be selected when the specific game state control means controls the fourth specific game state. In the third music pattern, the first common part of the predetermined music is output by the music output means, and after the predetermined branching period elapses, the second common part of the predetermined music is further formed. For example, the B melody of the second section) is output, and after a specific branch period (for example, the second branch section) has elapsed, the specific part of the predetermined music (for example, the chorus of the third section) is output. It is a music pattern that is predetermined, and in the fourth music pattern, after the first common portion of the predetermined music is output by the music output means and the predetermined branching period elapses, further. It is a music pattern in which the second common part of the predetermined music is output, and the specific part of the predetermined music is not output after the specific branching period has elapsed, and the music is output. When either the third music pattern or the fourth music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means, the means starts outputting the predetermined music from the predetermined time, and the predetermined means. The timing is set when the third music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means, and before the execution of the specific second round game is started by the second round game execution means, the predetermined music is selected. The gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that it is a time when the output of the specific portion can be started.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in any of the first to fourth specific gaming states, the first common portion (for example, the first section) of a predetermined music (for example, a music corresponding to the music pattern A) A melody) is output, and a predetermined branching period (for example, the first branching section) elapses. Here, in the first specific game state, a specific part of a predetermined music (for example, reversal of the fifth section) suggesting that the specific second round game is executed after the lapse of the predetermined branch period is output. Then, in the third specific gaming state or the fourth gaming state, the second common part of the predetermined music (for example, the B melody of the second section) is output, and the specific branch period (for example, the second branch section) is output. ). Then, in the third specific game state, after the lapse of this specific branch period, a specific part of a predetermined music (for example, chorus in the third section) suggesting that the specific second round game is executed is output. .. With such a configuration, the expectation of the player in the specific gaming state can be further increased.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first music pattern occupying the case where either the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means is selected. The degree of expectation that the third music pattern is selected when either the third music pattern or the fourth music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means is higher than the degree of expectation. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is configured in such a manner.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first music pattern occupied when either the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected (for example, 18 + 17 = 35/200) is selected. The third music pattern that occupies when either the third music pattern or the fourth music pattern is selected (for example, 46 + 16 = 62/200) is selected rather than the expectation degree (for example, 18/35). By configuring the expectation level (for example, 46/62) to be high, after the elapse of a predetermined branching period (for example, the first branching section), the second common part of the predetermined music (for example, the B melody of the second section) is set. ) Is output, the expectation that the specific second round game will be executed becomes relatively high, so that the role of the predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) can be diversified and specified. It is possible to further increase the expectation of the player in the gaming state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the predetermined music includes the first music and the second music, and the music pattern corresponding to the first music is selected by the music pattern selection means. In this case, the music pattern corresponding to the second music is selected by the music pattern selection means rather than the expectation that the specific second round game is executed by the second round game execution means. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the second round game executing means is configured to have a higher expectation that the specific second round game is executed.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a specific second round game when a music pattern (for example, music pattern A) corresponding to a first music (for example, a music corresponding to music pattern A) is selected. To the second music (for example, the music corresponding to the music pattern B) rather than the expectation that the music is executed (for example, the ratio at which the winning pattern 1 or 3 is determined when the music pattern A is selected). When the corresponding music pattern (for example, music pattern B) is selected, the degree of expectation that the specific second round game is executed (for example, when music pattern B is selected, the winning pattern 1 or 3 is determined. By setting the ratio) to be high, it is possible to change the degree of expectation between the songs, and it is possible to further raise the expectation of the player in the specific gaming state.

The game machine according to the present embodiment has a game board (for example, a game board 1) having a game area in which the game medium can roll, and a start area (for example, a first) provided in the game area and through which the game medium can pass. 1 start port 32, second start port 33), and a variable winning device (for example, a first mode) provided in the game area and variable between a first mode in which a game medium is easily accepted and a second mode in which a game medium is difficult to be accepted. A large winning opening 36, a second large winning opening 37), a starting storage information storage means (for example, a main RAM 63) capable of storing a plurality of starting storage information indicating that the game medium has passed through the starting area, and the starting storage information. On condition that the start storage information is stored by the storage means, it is determined whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player due to the fluctuation of the variable winning device. The specific game state transition determination means (for example, the main CPU 61), the identification information display means for variablely displaying the identification information (for example, the first special symbol display unit 53, the second special symbol display unit 54), and the specific game state transition. The identification by the variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 61) that determines the variation pattern of the identification information that is variablely displayed by the identification information display means according to the determination result by the determination means, and the specific gaming state transition determination means. The gaming state is described on condition that the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the start storage information for which the determination result of shifting to the gaming state is obtained is stopped and displayed by the identification information display means. The specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) that controls the specific game state, and the plurality of types of items (for example, plates A to D) each have a plurality of expectation types (for example, pseudo-continuous effect, dialogue effect, cut-in). Expectation of whether or not the determination result of shifting to the specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition determination means by displaying the item in response to the production and other promotion (reversal) production). An item effect executing means (for example, sub CPU71) that executes an item effect (for example, an item look-ahead effect) that notifies the degree, and an item effect control means (for example, an item effect control means that controls the progress of the item effect executed by the item effect execution means). For example, the sub CPU 71) is provided, and the item effect control means determines whether or not to execute the item effect according to the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means, and the item effect is performed. When executing, the above-mentioned multiple The item production content (for example, item look-ahead effects 1 to 24) to be executed is determined from the plurality of item production contents in which the number of each of several types of items and the expectation of each of the plurality of expectation types are defined. , When the number of predetermined items (for example, plate B) specified in the determined item effect content is 0, the expectation degree of a predetermined expectation type (for example, dialogue effect) corresponding to the predetermined item. (For example, FIG. 86) causes the item effect executing means to execute a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display based on the dialogue effect data) to which a predetermined expectation degree (for example, dialogue (red)) is notified. When the number of the predetermined items specified in the determined item effect content is 1 or more, the expected degree of the predetermined expectation type corresponding to the predetermined item is performed. After being notified of an expectation level (for example, dialogue (green)) that is lower than the predetermined degree of expectation by the number of the predetermined items, the predetermined degree of expectation is notified based on the predetermined item. A gaming machine characterized in that the item effect executing means is made to execute the predetermined effect (for example, the process shown in S498 of FIG. 86 is performed).

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to give a more varied jackpot notice (notice of transition to a specific gaming state).

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the item effect control means executes the item effect, the determination result that the specific game state transition determination means shifts to the specific game state can be obtained. The item specified in the item effect content determined before the variation display of the identification information corresponding to the start storage information becomes started (for example, before the variation) by the identification information display means. The item pre-notification determination means (for example, the item acquisition effect processing shown in FIG. 90 by the sub CPU 71) for determining whether or not to notify the type of the item is included, and the item type can be notified by the item pre-notification determination means. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the item effect executing means executes a pre-notification effect that, once determined, informs the type of the item.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when giving a big hit notice (notice of transition to a specific gaming state), it is possible to perform a more varied look-ahead effect (effect based on the start memory before the variable execution). It will be possible.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the variation pattern determining means stores a predetermined number (for example, three) or more of the starting storage information by the starting storage information storage means, the specific game When the determination result of shifting to the specific gaming state is not obtained by the state transition determination means, the specific fluctuation time (for example, 2000 ms) whose fluctuation time is shorter than the normal fluctuation time (for example, 4000 ms) is set. When the associated specific variation pattern (for example, a special symbol variation pattern for shortening variation) is determined, and the advance notification determination means determines the specific variation pattern by the variation pattern determining means (for example, the specific variation pattern is determined (). For example, when the determination result of S483 in FIG. 85 is YES), it is not determined whether or not to notify the type of the item specified in the item effect content determined by the item effect content determining means. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even when the item effect (for example, the item look-ahead effect) is executed, the balance of the effect is lost due to the relationship with the fluctuation time (particularly the shortened fluctuation). Can be prevented.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board (for example, a gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which the gaming medium can roll, and a starting area (for example, a first) provided in the gaming area through which the gaming medium can pass. 1 start port 32, second start port 33), and a variable winning device (for example, a first mode) provided in the game area and variable between a first mode in which a game medium is easily accepted and a second mode in which a game medium is difficult to accept. A specific gaming state (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player due to the fluctuation of the variable winning device on condition that the gaming medium has passed through the large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37) and the starting area. It is a condition that the specific game state transition determination means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to the specific game state transition means and the determination result for shifting to the specific game state transition by the specific game state transition determination means can be obtained. In addition, a specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) that controls the game state to the specific game state and a predetermined start condition are satisfied (for example, the game medium passes through the specific area 38A in the big hit game state). After the specific gaming state ends, a special gaming state (for example, a special gaming state that is advantageous to a player different from the specific gaming state) until a predetermined ending condition is satisfied (for example, 180 special symbol games are digested). , ST game state) controllable special game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) and game count counting means (for example) for counting the number of games in a predetermined section (for example, ST mode story section) in the special game state. , ST middle management counter), a specific gaming state number counting means (for example, ST middle consecutive villa counter) that counts the number of times controlled to the specific gaming state by the specific gaming state control means in the special gaming state. Based on the count result by the game count counting means and the count result by the specific game state count means, a series of story effects are executed in the predetermined section, and the story effect is related to the series of story effects in the specific game state. A story effect executing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 4) for executing a related story effect, and a story effect control means (for example) for controlling the progress of the series of story effects and the related story effect executed by the story effect execution means. , Sub CPU 71), and the game number counting means sets the predetermined number of games (for example, 5 times) in the predetermined section by 1. As a set, a set number counting means for counting the number of sets (for example, the process shown in S459 of FIG. 83) is included, and the story effect control means controls to the specific gaming state counted by the specific gaming state number counting means. The story is advanced in the series of story production units based on the number of times (for example, the process shown in S460 of FIG. 83), and the series of story production is based on the number of sets counted by the set number counting means. A gaming machine characterized by advancing a story (for example, the process shown in S460 of FIG. 83).

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the story production (for example, a series of story production) is performed according to the number of consecutive villas of the big hit in the special gaming state (for example, the value of the ST middle consecutive villa counter) and the number of sets. It will proceed. Further, in the specific game state, the story effect (for example, the related story effect) related to the story effect (for example, a series of story effect) executed in the special game state is executed. Therefore, the story production can be appropriately advanced without increasing the control load and the amount of information stored in the storage area.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is in the series of story effects when the story effect control means obtains a determination result that the specific game state transition determination means shifts to the specific game state. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the story effect executing means executes the related story effect according to the progress of the story (for example, the value of the management counter during ST).

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the specific gaming state, story production (for example, related story production) is performed according to the progress of the story production executed in the special gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to produce a story having an appropriate relationship between the special gaming state and the specific gaming state without increasing the control burden and the amount of information stored in the storage area.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the related story production is a production that displays a summary (for example, a synopsis) of the story in the series of story production according to the degree of progress in the series of story production. The gaming machine described above, characterized by.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a series of story productions progresses according to the number of consecutive villas of big hits in the special gaming state (for example, the value of the ST middle villa counter), the next series of stories It is possible to produce a related story in a specific gaming state with the production content of the production and the production content that does not cause a discrepancy.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the story effect executing means has a first image (for example, a story) corresponding to the current number of sets counted by the set number counting means in the series of story effects. The first image display means for displaying images 703a, 703b) (for example, the set story display area 703) and the story corresponding to the number of sets counted by the set number counting means in the series of story productions. The related story effect comprises the second image display means (eg, schedule set window display area 704) for displaying a second image (eg, window images 704a, 704b) suggesting the above series of story effects. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the second image and a story corresponding to the second image (for example, a famous scene and a description of the famous scene) are displayed according to the degree of progress in the above.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a series of story productions progresses according to the number of consecutive villas of big hits in the special gaming state (for example, the value of the ST middle villa counter), the next series of stories A related story production in a specific game state can be performed with a production content that does not cause a discrepancy with the production content of the production, and a second image (for example, a window image) used in a series of story production can also be used in the related story production. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the production image data and secure a larger storage area.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board (for example, a gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which the gaming medium can roll, and a starting area (for example, a first) provided in the gaming area through which the gaming medium can pass. 1 start port 32, second start port 33) and a variable winning device (for example, a first mode) provided in the game area and variable between a first mode in which a game medium is easily accepted and a second mode in which a game medium is difficult to accept. A specific gaming state (for example, a jackpot) that is advantageous to the player by fluctuating the variable winning device on condition that the gaming medium has passed through the large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37) and the starting area. A specific game state transition determination means (for example, the main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to the game state) and an identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display unit 53, the second special) that variablely displays the identification information. The variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 61) that determines the variation pattern of the identification information that is variablely displayed by the identification information display means according to the determination result of the symbol display unit 54) and the specific gaming state transition determination means. And, on condition that the determination result of shifting to the specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition determination means, the specific gaming state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) that controls the gaming state to the specific gaming state. When a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the gaming medium passes through the specific area 38A in the big hit gaming state), after the specific gaming state ends, a special gaming state different from the specific gaming state (for example, ST) is satisfied. A special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) that controls the game state) and a game count counting means (for example, during ST) that counts the number of games in a predetermined section (for example, a story section in ST mode) in the special game state. The management counter), the story effect executing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 4) that executes a series of story effects in the predetermined section based on the count result by the game number counting means, and the story effect executing means. A gaming machine including a story effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 71) for controlling the progress of the series of story effects, wherein the variation pattern determination means determines the specific game state transition in the predetermined section. When the determination result of shifting to the specific gaming state is not obtained by the means, the first fluctuation pattern corresponding to the first fluctuation time (for example, 2s) (for example, the fluctuation pattern indicating shortened fluctuation). High It can be determined with a probability, and when the determination result of shifting to the specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition determination means in the predetermined section, the first variation time is longer than the first fluctuation time. It is possible to determine a second fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern indicating super reach) corresponding to the fluctuation time of 2 (for example, 30s), and the game count counting means has a predetermined number of games (for example, for example) in the predetermined section. 5 times) as one set, a set number counting means for counting the number of sets (for example, the process shown in S459 of FIG. 83) and an in-set game number counting means for counting the number of games in the one set (for example, for example). The story effect control means, including an in-set counter), advances the story in the series of story effects based on the number of sets counted by the set number counting means (for example, shown in S460 of FIG. 83). Processing), in the predetermined section, the time (for example, 10s) obtained by multiplying the first fluctuation time by the predetermined number of games is set as the basic production time, and the set in the series of story productions based on the basic production time. When the story corresponding to the number (in-set effect) is advanced and the second variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern determining means in the predetermined section, the counting result by the in-set game count counting means. And the remaining effect time is determined based on the basic effect time, and it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation time is longer than the remaining effect time (for example, the process of S473 in FIG. 84 is performed). At the same time, when it is determined that the second fluctuation time is longer than the remaining effect time (for example, when the determination result of S473 in FIG. 84 is NO), the second fluctuation time is determined. The specification is made by suggesting the number of sets corresponding to the end by a special effect mode (for example, an effect mode in which a window image suggesting an effect in the set of the effect end target set is displayed in a display mode different from the usual one). A gaming machine characterized in that it notifies that a determination result for shifting to the specific gaming state has been obtained by the gaming state transition determination means.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the production time of a series of story effects executed over a plurality of games and the fluctuation time of the identification symbol are generally synchronized with one set as one unit by a simple configuration. Even if it is decided to shift to a specific game state (for example, to be a big hit) in a game in the middle of a series of story production, the series of story production will be inconsistent as much as possible. It is possible to give a big hit notice (notice of transition to a specific game state) that will advance the game so that it does not occur and that will improve the interest of the player.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the story effect control means is a portion corresponding to the number of sets to be suggested by the special effect mode in the series of story effects (for example, an effect end target set). The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the control for advancing the story is executed so as to synchronize with the end of the second fluctuation time.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even if it is decided to shift to a specific gaming state in a game in the middle of a story production executed over a plurality of games, the story production is inconsistent as much as possible. It is possible to give a big hit notice that can be advanced without any trouble and that will improve the interest of the player.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the story effect executing means has a first image (for example, a story) corresponding to the current number of sets counted by the set number counting means in the series of story effects. The first image display means for displaying images 703a, 703b) (for example, the set story display area 703) and the story corresponding to the number of sets from the next time onward counted by the set number counting means in the series of story productions. The story effect control means includes the second image display means (for example, the schedule set window display area 704) for displaying the second image (for example, window images 704a, 704b) suggesting the above-mentioned special effect. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the second image corresponding to the number of sets to be suggested by the aspect is displayed in a display mode different from the usual one.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a window image (second image) suggesting a story corresponding to the number of sets from the next time onward can be used to give a big hit notice that will further improve the interest. It will be possible.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board (for example, a gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which the gaming medium can roll, and a starting area (for example, a first) provided in the gaming area through which the gaming medium can pass. A first variable winning device (for example, a first variable winning device (for example, 1 start port 32, a second start port 33), which is provided in the game area and can be varied into a first mode in which it is easy to accept a game medium and a second mode in which it is difficult to accept a game medium. The first large winning opening 36) and a specific area (for example, a specific area) provided in the game area, which can be varied into a first aspect in which the game medium is easily accepted and a second aspect in which the game medium is difficult to be accepted, and through which the game medium can pass. , A specific gaming state (eg, a specific gaming state) advantageous to the player, provided that the gaming medium has passed through the second variable winning device (for example, the second large winning opening 37) having the specific area 38A) inside. , The specific game state transition determination means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to the big hit game state), and the determination result for shifting to the specific game state by the specific game state transition determination means can be obtained. The specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) that controls the game state to the specific game state, and the specific game on the condition that the game medium passes through the specific area in the specific game state. After the state is completed, the special gaming state is controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a probabilistic / shortened gaming state) in which a determination result indicating the transition to the specific gaming state is relatively easy to be obtained by the specific gaming state transition determination means. A control means (for example, the main CPU 61) and a first round game executing means (for example, a first round game executing means capable of executing a first round game for varying the first variable winning device into the first aspect and the second aspect in the specific gaming state). For example, the main CPU 61) and the second round game executing means (for example, the main) capable of executing the second round game in which the second variable winning device is changed to the first mode and the second mode a predetermined number of times in the specific game state. The CPU 61), a music pattern selection means (for example, a sub CPU 71) that selects a music pattern from a plurality of music patterns when the specific game state control means controls the specific game state, and the music pattern selection. A music output means (for example, a speaker 10) that outputs a music corresponding to a music pattern selected by the means in the special gaming state, and a winning rate determining means for determining the winning rate of the gaming medium in a predetermined period of the specific gaming state. (For example, a gaming machine equipped with a sub CPU 71). The second round game executing means can perform a specific second round game in which the passage of the game medium to the specific area becomes relatively easy during the execution of the second round game, and the specific second round game can be performed. The game state is set to be at least once by the second round game execution means after the first round game is executed a specific number of times (for example, four times of 1 to 4R) by the first round game execution means. The first specific game state in which the specific second round game is executed (for example, the big hit game state corresponding to the hit pattern 3) and the first round game of the first specific number of times by the first round game execution means. The music pattern selection means includes a second specific game state (for example, a big hit game state corresponding to the hit pattern 8) in which the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game execution means after the execution. Can select a first music pattern (for example, music pattern A (reversal)) when the specific game state control means controls the first specific game state, and the specific game state control means When controlled to the second specific gaming state, a second music pattern (for example, music pattern A)
(Failure)) can be selected, and when the first music pattern is selected and the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is less than a predetermined threshold value, the predetermined first music When a pattern (for example, music pattern A (reverse) long) is selected and the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the music pattern is higher than the predetermined first music pattern. When selecting a specific first music pattern (music pattern A (reverse) short) in which the time for outputting a predetermined music by the music output means is relatively short, and selecting the second music pattern. If the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is less than a predetermined threshold, a predetermined second music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure) long) is selected, and the winning rate determination is made. When the winning rate determined by the means is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the time for outputting the predetermined music by the music output means is relatively shorter than that of the predetermined second music pattern. A specific second music pattern (music pattern A (failure) short) is selected, and the first music pattern is the first common portion (for example, the first section) of the predetermined music by the music output means. It is predetermined that a specific part of the predetermined music (for example, reversal of the fifth section) is output after the predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) has elapsed after the A melody) is output. It is a music pattern, and in the second music pattern, the first common portion of the predetermined music is output by the music output means, and after the predetermined branching period elapses, the specific portion of the predetermined music. Is a music pattern in which is not output, and the music output means is predetermined regardless of whether the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means. (For example, during the waiting time before the start of the first R when the initial section is started), the output of the predetermined music is started, and at the predetermined time, the first music pattern is transmitted by the music pattern selection means. When selected, it is characterized in that it is a time when the output of the specific portion of the predetermined music can be started before the execution of the specific second round game is started by the second round game execution means. A game machine to play.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board (for example, a gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which the gaming medium can roll, and a starting area (for example, a starting area) provided in the gaming area and through which the gaming medium can pass. , 1st start port 32, 2nd start port 33), and the first aspect provided in the game area, which is easy to accept the game medium, and the second mode, which is difficult to accept the game medium, can be varied, and the game medium passes through. It is advantageous to the player on condition that the variable winning device (for example, the large winning opening 37 shown in FIG. 117) having a possible specific region (for example, the specific region 38A) inside and the gaming medium have passed through the starting region. The specific gaming state transition determination means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state (for example, the big hit gaming state) and the specific gaming state transition determination means are used to shift to the specific gaming state. The specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) that controls the game state to the specific game state, and the game medium has passed through the specific area in the specific game state, on condition that the determination result of the above is obtained. As a condition, after the specific gaming state is completed, it is relatively easy to obtain a determination result that the specific gaming state transition determination means shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, a probability change / time saving gaming state). The special gaming state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) to be controlled to the above, and the first variable winning device are varied into the first and second aspects in the specific gaming state, and the gaming medium is passed through the specific area. The first round game executing means (for example, the main CPU 61) capable of executing the first round game relatively difficult, and the second variable winning device in the specific gaming state are the first aspect and the second. A second-round game executing means (for example, the main CPU 61) capable of executing a specific second-round game a predetermined number of times, which is varied depending on the embodiment and makes it relatively easy for the game medium to pass through the specific area, and the specific game. A music pattern selection means (for example, a sub CPU 71) that selects a music pattern from a plurality of music patterns when the state control means controls the specific gaming state, and a music pattern selected by the music pattern selection means. A music output means (for example, a speaker 10) that outputs music according to the above-mentioned special gaming state, and a winning rate determining means (for example, a sub CPU 71) that determines a winning rate of a gaming medium in a predetermined period of the specific gaming state. A gaming machine equipped with the above-mentioned specific gaming machine. The state is such that after the first round game is executed a specified number of times (for example, four times of 1 to 4R) by the first round game execution means, the second round game execution means at least once. The first specific game state in which the specific second round game is executed (for example, the big hit game state corresponding to the hit pattern 3) and the first round game in the first specific number of times are executed by the first round game execution means. The music pattern selection means includes a second specific game state (for example, a big hit game state corresponding to the hit pattern 8) in which the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game execution means. When the specific game state control means controls the first specific game state, the first music pattern (for example, music pattern A (reversal)) can be selected, and the specific game state control means can be used to select the first music pattern. When controlled to the second specific gaming state, a second music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure)) can be selected, and when the first music pattern is selected, the winning rate determination means. When the winning rate determined by is less than a predetermined threshold, a predetermined first music pattern (for example, music pattern A (reverse) long) is selected, and the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is selected. When is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value, a specific first music pattern in which the time for outputting the predetermined music by the music output means is relatively shorter than that of the predetermined first music pattern. When (music pattern A (reverse) short) is selected and the second music pattern is selected, if the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is less than a predetermined threshold value, a predetermined first When 2 music patterns (for example, music pattern A (failure) long) are selected and the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the predetermined second music pattern A specific second music pattern (music pattern A (failure) short) in which the time for outputting the predetermined music by the music output means is relatively short is selected, and the first music pattern is used. Is to output the first common part (for example, A melody of the first section) of the predetermined music by the music output means, and after the predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) has elapsed, the predetermined It is a music pattern in which it is predetermined that a specific part of the music (for example, the reversal of the fifth section) is output, and the second music pattern is the music output. It is a music pattern in which the first common part of the predetermined music is output by force means, and the specific part of the predetermined music is not output after the predetermined branching period has elapsed. When either the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means, the music output means is at a predetermined time (for example, before the start of the first R when the initial section is started). The output of the predetermined music is started from (during the waiting time), and at the predetermined time, when the first music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means, the second round game execution means is used. A gaming machine characterized in that it is a time when the output of the specific portion of the predetermined music can be started before the execution of the specific second round game is started.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a predetermined music (for example, in the first specific gaming state in which the specific second round game is executed and in the second specific gaming state in which the specific second round game is not executed). The first common portion (for example, the verse of the first section) of the music corresponding to the music pattern A is output, and a predetermined branching period (for example, the first branching section) elapses. Then, in the first specific game state, after the lapse of the predetermined branch period, a specific part of a predetermined music (for example, reversal of the fifth section) suggesting that the specific second round game is executed is output. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player in the specific gaming state.

Further, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, before the execution of the specific second round game is started, the output of the specific part of the predetermined music is started at a predetermined time (for example, the initial section). By configuring so that the output of a predetermined song (for example, the output of the intro of the initial section) is started from (during the waiting time before the start of the 1st round), it is not necessary to monitor the round game. , It is possible to prevent the control load from increasing.

Further, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to produce a jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) that matches the player's gaming tendency (game progress speed), and to output a predetermined music. It is possible to make it easier to synchronize the end of the jackpot game state (specific game state) with the end of the game. __ __

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the specific gaming state is the second specific number of times (for example, 8 times of 1 to 8R), which is larger than the first specific number of times by the first round game execution means. A third specific game state (for example, a big hit game state corresponding to the hit pattern 1) in which the specific second round game is executed at least once by the second round game execution means after the one round game is executed. , A fourth specific game state (for example,) in which the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game execution means after the first round game is executed the second specific number of times by the first round game execution means. , A big hit game state according to the hit pattern 7), and the music pattern selection means is controlled to the third specific game state by the specific game state control means, a third music pattern (for example, , Music pattern A
(Success)) can be selected, and a fourth music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure)) can be selected when the specific game state control means controls the fourth specific game state. When the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is less than a predetermined threshold when the third music pattern is selected, a predetermined third music pattern (for example, music pattern A (success)). ) Long) is selected, and when the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the predetermined music is produced by the music output means rather than the predetermined third music pattern. When a specific third music pattern (for example, music pattern A (success) short) whose output time is relatively short is selected and the fourth music pattern is selected, the winning rate determination is made. When the winning rate determined by the means is less than a predetermined threshold value, a predetermined fourth music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure) long) is selected, and the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is selected. When the rate is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the time during which the predetermined music is output by the music output means is relatively shorter than that of the predetermined fourth music pattern. A music pattern (music pattern A (failure) short) is selected, and in the third music pattern, the first common portion of the predetermined music is output by the music output means, and the predetermined branching period has elapsed. Later, after the second common part of the predetermined song (for example, the B melody of the second section) is output and a specific branch period (for example, the second branch section) elapses, the said of the predetermined song. It is a music pattern in which a specific part (for example, a chorus of a third section) is output in advance, and the fourth music pattern is a music pattern in which the first common part of the predetermined music is output by the music output means. It is output, and after the predetermined branching period has elapsed, the second common part of the predetermined music is further output, and after the specific branching period has elapsed, the specific part of the predetermined music is not output. This is a predetermined music pattern, and the music output means is the predetermined time regardless of whether the third music pattern or the fourth music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means. The output of the predetermined music is started from the above, and at the predetermined time, when the third music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means, the second round game executor. The gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that it is a time when the output of the specific portion of the predetermined music can be started before the execution of the specific second round game is started by the stage.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in any of the first to fourth specific gaming states, the first common portion (for example, the first section) of a predetermined music (for example, a music corresponding to the music pattern A) A melody) is output, and a predetermined branching period (for example, the first branching section) elapses. Here, in the first specific game state, a specific part of a predetermined music (for example, reversal of the fifth section) suggesting that the specific second round game is executed after the lapse of the predetermined branch period is output. Then, in the third specific gaming state or the fourth gaming state, the second common part of the predetermined music (for example, the B melody of the second section) is output, and the specific branch period (for example, the second branch section) is output. ). Then, in the third specific game state, after the lapse of this specific branch period, a specific part of a predetermined music (for example, chorus in the third section) suggesting that the specific second round game is executed is output. .. With such a configuration, the expectation of the player in the specific gaming state can be further increased.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first music pattern occupying the case where either the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means is selected. The degree of expectation that the third music pattern is selected when either the third music pattern or the fourth music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means is higher than the degree of expectation. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is configured in such a manner.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first music pattern occupied when either the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected (for example, 18 + 17 = 35/200) is selected. The third music pattern that occupies when either the third music pattern or the fourth music pattern is selected (for example, 46 + 16 = 62/200) is selected rather than the expectation degree (for example, 18/35). By configuring the expectation level (for example, 46/62) to be high, after the elapse of a predetermined branching period (for example, the first branching section), the second common part of the predetermined music (for example, the B melody of the second section) is set. ) Is output, the expectation that the specific second round game will be executed becomes relatively high, so that the role of the predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) can be diversified and specified. It is possible to further increase the expectation of the player in the gaming state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the predetermined music includes the first music and the second music, and the music pattern corresponding to the first music is selected by the music pattern selection means. In this case, the music pattern corresponding to the second music is selected by the music pattern selection means rather than the expectation that the specific second round game is executed by the second round game execution means. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the second round game executing means is configured to have a higher expectation that the specific second round game is executed.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a specific second round game when a music pattern (for example, music pattern A) corresponding to a first music (for example, a music corresponding to music pattern A) is selected. To the second music (for example, the music corresponding to the music pattern B) rather than the expectation that the music is executed (for example, the ratio at which the winning pattern 1 or 3 is determined when the music pattern A is selected). When the corresponding music pattern (for example, music pattern B) is selected, the degree of expectation that the specific second round game is executed (for example, when music pattern B is selected, the winning pattern 1 or 3 is determined. By setting the ratio) to be high, it is possible to change the degree of expectation between the songs, and it is possible to further raise the expectation of the player in the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board (for example, a gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which the gaming medium can roll, and a starting area (for example, a first) provided in the gaming area through which the gaming medium can pass. A variable winning device (for example, a first aspect) that is provided in the game area and can be varied into a first aspect in which the game medium is easily accepted and a second aspect in which the game medium is difficult to be accepted. A specific gaming state (for example, a jackpot) that is advantageous to the player by fluctuating the variable winning device on condition that the gaming medium has passed through the large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37) and the starting area. The specific game state transition determination means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to the game state) and the specific game state transition determination means can obtain a determination result of shifting to the specific game state. When the specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for controlling the game state to the specific game state and the predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the game medium passes through the specific area 38A in the big hit game state). In addition, a special game state control means for controlling a special game state (for example, ST game state) different from the specific game state for a predetermined number of games (for example, 180 times) after the specific game state ends. (For example, the main CPU 61) and the normal gaming state (for example,) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the specific gaming state and the special gaming state after the games are played a predetermined number of games in the special gaming state. It is related to a specific story in the normal game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) that controls the normal game state (non-probability change / non-time reduction), the specific game state, the special game state, and the normal game state. A story effect executing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 4) that executes an effect, and a story effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 71) that controls the progress of an effect related to the specific story executed by the story effect executing means. The specific story includes at least a first story (for example, a first story) and a second story (for example, a second story), and the story production control means is at least the story. A first effect control state in which an effect related to the first story is executed by the effect executing means, and a second effect control in which the effect related to the second story is executed by the story effect executing means. It has a state and the above-mentioned first The effect control state transition control means for shifting from one effect control state to the second effect control state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition is included, and the predetermined transition condition is the specific game in the special gaming state. A gaming machine comprising: being controlled to the normal gaming state by the normal gaming state controlling means without being controlled to the specific gaming state by the state controlling means.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to produce a story having appropriate relevance in a plurality of gaming states, and even when a state advantageous to the player ends, a specific state can be achieved. By advancing the story, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board (for example, a gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which the gaming medium can roll, and a starting area (for example, a starting area) provided in the gaming area and through which the gaming medium can pass. , 1st start port 32, 2nd start port 33), and a variable winning device (for example, a variable winning device) provided in the game area and variable between a first mode in which the game medium is easily accepted and a second mode in which the game medium is difficult to accept. A specific gaming state (for example,) that is advantageous to the player due to the fluctuation of the variable winning device on condition that the gaming medium has passed through the first major winning opening 36 and the second major winning opening 37) and the starting area. , The specific game state transition determination means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to the big hit game state), and the determination result for shifting to the specific game state by the specific game state transition determination means can be obtained. On condition that the game state is controlled to the specific game state (for example, the main CPU 61), the game medium passes through the specific area 38A in the jackpot game state (for example, the big hit game state). ), A special gaming state that controls a special gaming state (for example, ST gaming state) different from the specific gaming state for a predetermined number of games (for example, 180 times) after the specific gaming state ends. After the control means (for example, the main CPU 61) and the game of the predetermined number of games are played in the special game state, the normal game state (for example, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the specific game state and the special game state). For example, in a normal game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) that controls a normal game state (non-probability change / non-time reduction), and in the specific game state, the special game state, and the normal game state, a specific story A story effect executing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 4) that executes a related effect, and a story effect control means (for example, a sub) that controls the progress of the effect related to the specific story executed by the story effect executing means. CPU71), the particular story includes at least a first story (eg, a first story) and a second story (eg, a second story), and the story production control means is at least. A first effect control state in which an effect related to the first story is executed by the story effect executing means, and a second effect related to the second story being executed by the story effect executing means. Has a production control state, The effect control state transition control means for shifting from the first effect control state to the second effect control state based on the establishment of the predetermined transition condition is included, and the predetermined transition condition is the specific gaming state transition control. A gaming machine characterized in that it is controlled to the specific gaming state by means, or is controlled to the special gaming state by the special gaming state transition control means.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to produce a story having appropriate relevance in a plurality of gaming states, and when the player shifts to a state advantageous to the player, a specific story progresses. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board (for example, a gaming board 1) having a gaming area on which the gaming medium can roll, and a starting area (for example, a first) provided in the gaming area and through which the gaming medium can pass. 1 start port 32, second start port 33) and a variable winning device (for example, a first mode) provided in the game area and variable between a first mode in which a game medium is easily accepted and a second mode in which a game medium is difficult to be accepted. A specific gaming state (for example, a jackpot) that is advantageous to the player by fluctuating the variable winning device on condition that the gaming medium has passed through the large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37) and the starting area. The specific game state transition determination means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to the game state) and the identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display unit 53, the second special) for variablely displaying the identification information. The variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 61) that determines the variation pattern of the identification information that is variablely displayed by the identification information display means according to the determination result of the symbol display unit 54) and the specific gaming state transition determination means. And, on condition that the determination result of shifting to the specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition determination means, the specific gaming state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) that controls the gaming state to the specific gaming state. When a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game medium passes through the specific area 38A in the big hit gaming state), a predetermined gaming state for controlling to a predetermined gaming state (for example, ST gaming state) different from the specific gaming state is satisfied. In the control means, the in-set game number counting means (for example, the in-set counter) that counts the number of games in the one set with the predetermined number of games as one set in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined game state. An effect executing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 4) that executes a predetermined effect (for example, an in-set effect) capable of executing a series of effects over a predetermined number of games, and an effect control that controls the progress of the predetermined effect. When the variable pattern determining means includes means (for example, a sub CPU 71) and the determination result of shifting to the specific gaming state by the specific gaming state transition determining means has not been obtained in the predetermined gaming state. The first fluctuation pattern (for example, shortened fluctuation A) corresponding to the specific fluctuation time (for example, 2s) can be determined with high probability, and in the predetermined gaming state, the specific gaming state transition determination means can be used. The determination result of shifting to the specific gaming state has been obtained. In this case, it is possible to determine a second fluctuation pattern (for example, special fluctuations A to E) different from the first fluctuation pattern, and the effect control means has the predetermined number of games during the specific fluctuation time. The time (for example, 10 s) multiplied by the above is set as the basic effect time, the effect executing means is made to execute the predetermined effect based on the basic effect time, and the variation pattern determining means is the specific in the predetermined gaming state. When the determination result of shifting to the specific gaming state is obtained by the gaming state transition determining means, synchronization with the end of the predetermined effect is performed based on the counting result by the game count counting means in the set. A gaming machine characterized in that the second fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time can be determined with high probability.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the effect time of a predetermined effect (for example, the effect in a set) in which a series of effects are executed over a plurality of games and the variation time of the identification symbol are appropriately configured in a simple configuration. Because it is possible to synchronize with, it is possible to shift to a specific game state in a game in the middle of a predetermined production without increasing the control load and the amount of information stored in the storage area (it became a big hit). Even if it is decided, it is possible to proceed with the predetermined production without causing any discrepancy as much as possible.

[Examples of other embodiments]
Next, examples of other embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 120.
FIG. 117 is a perspective view showing a large winning opening of a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. The same or similar components as those according to the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIG. 117 is provided with only one large winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 117, a large winning opening 37 is provided in a part of the game board. Inside the large winning opening 37, a ball passage 37B for guiding the game ball downward is formed. At the lower end of the ball passage 37B, a specific area 38A and a non-specific area 38B are provided so as to be adjacent to each other on the left and right sides. A large winning opening count switch 370 is arranged at a position where the large winning opening 37 enters the ball passage. A specific area switch 380A is arranged in the specific area 38A, and the V prize of the game ball to the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area switch 380A. A non-specific area switch 380B is arranged in the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of the game ball through the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area switch 380B. A displacement member 39'that can be displaced to the left or right is provided in the vicinity of the specific region 38A and the non-specific region 38B inside the ball passage 37B. In FIG. 117, the position where the displacement member 39'is shown by a solid line is the position after the displacement, and the position where the displacement member 39'is shown by a virtual line in FIG. 117 is the initial position.

The displacement member 39'switches the specific region 38A into an open state or a closed state. As shown by the solid line in FIG. 117, when the displacement member 39'is in the fixed position on the left side farthest from the specific area 38A, the specific area 38A is opened and the V prize of the game ball to the specific area 38A is awarded. Make it easy. At this time, the displacement member 39'forms a gap through which the game ball can sufficiently pass between the displacement member 39'and the right side wall of the ball passage 37B. As a result, the game ball guided from above the ball passage 37B is guided downward through between the right side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39', and can pass through the specific area 38A. be. Further, when the displacement member 39'is in a fixed position on the left side, a gap through which the game ball can pass is formed between the left side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39'. As a result, the game ball guided from above the ball passage 37B may pass between the left side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39'and pass through the non-specific region 38B.

When the specific area is opened, the displacement member may be moved to a position where the game ball cannot pass through the non-specific area. Further, when the specific area is opened, the first position of the displacement member such that the game ball can pass through the non-specific area and the first position of the displacement member such that the game ball cannot pass through the non-specific area. The displacement member may be placed in any of the two positions, and the displacement member may be controlled to move to the first position or the second position according to the game mode or the like. For example, when the displacement member is placed in the second position, the game ball always passes through a specific area if a prize is won in the large winning opening, so that the game is more advantageous to the player than the one according to the above-described embodiment. Modes can be provided.

On the other hand, as shown by a virtual line in FIG. 117, when the displacement member 39'is in the fixed position on the right side closest to the specific area 38A, the specific area 38A is closed and the game ball to the specific area 38A. V prize is impossible. At this time, the displacement member 39'forms a gap through which the game ball can pass between the displacement member 39'and the left wall of the ball passage 37B. As a result, the game ball guided from above the ball passage 37B is guided downward through between the left side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39', and always passes through the non-specific region 38B. Become.

Even in a pachinko gaming machine using such a displacement member 39', it is possible to shift to a probabilistic gaming state or the like after the end of the jackpot gaming state in which the V prize in the specific area 38A is successfully completed in the jackpot gaming state. That is, according to the large winning opening 37 shown in FIG. 117, even if only one large winning opening (variable winning device) is provided, it is relatively difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 38A. Since it is possible to execute a one-round game and a specific second-round game that makes it relatively easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area 38A, there are two large winning openings (variable winning devices) on the game board. ) Is difficult to secure, but it is easy to shift to the special gaming state according to the opening pattern of the large winning opening (variable winning device) in the specific gaming state, or It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a playability that makes it difficult.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a large winning opening opening / closing pattern (modification example) of the gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. Is a diagram showing a displacement member operation pattern corresponding to the large winning opening opening / closing pattern of FIG. 118. The large winning opening opening / closing pattern and the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIGS. 118 and 119 are applied to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIG. 117.

As shown in FIG. 118, the modification of the large winning opening opening / closing pattern is basically the same as the large winning opening opening / closing pattern shown in FIG. 53, and is applied to one large winning opening provided with a specific area. It is a possible big winning opening opening and closing pattern. In such a large winning opening opening / closing pattern, as shown in FIG. 119, the displacement member 39'that opens / closes the specific area 38A is set to the operating state only at the 10th R as an example, and is in the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 117. Become. On the other hand, at the 1st to 9th rounds and the 11th to 16th rounds, the displacement member 39'is in an inactive state and is in a state shown by a virtual line in FIG. 117. Even in a pachinko gaming machine in which such a large winning opening opening / closing pattern is applied to one large winning opening, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be realized.

FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process of the gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. This special symbol control process is a pachinko gaming machine in which the main CPU determines whether or not to shift to a probabilistic gaming state according to the type of jackpot symbol without providing a specific area while providing only one big winning opening. It applies to.

As shown in FIG. 120, first, in S1000, the main CPU performs a process of determining the presence / absence of start storage. In this process, when the main CPU determines that there is no start storage of the special symbol game, that is, when the data is not stored in the special symbol start storage area (0) to the special symbol start storage area (4), the data is stored. This process is repeated until it is stored. On the other hand, when the main CPU determines that there is a start memory, the processing is transferred to S1001.

In S1001, the main CPU executes the jackpot determination process. In this process, the main CPU uses a jackpot determination table for high probability with a large number of jackpot determination values or a low probability determination table with a small number of jackpot determination values, depending on whether or not the game status flag indicates a probability variation gaming state. Refer to the jackpot judgment table of. Further, the main CPU refers to the hit determination random value in the special symbol start storage area, which is extracted at the time of winning the game ball, and the selected jackpot determination table. Then, when the hit determination random value and the jackpot determination value match, the main CPU determines that the jackpot is a jackpot. That is, the main CPU determines whether or not to set the jackpot game state advantageous to the player. That is, as a result of the special symbol game, either a big hit or a loss is determined. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1002.

In S1002, the main CPU determines whether or not the determination result of S1001 is a big hit. In this process, if the main CPU determines that it is a big hit, it shifts the process to S1003. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a big hit, that is, when it is determined that it is not a big hit, the main CPU shifts the processing to S1000.

In S1003, the main CPU controls the jackpot gaming state. That is, the main CPU performs a display command during the opening of the large winning opening, a set of data during the opening of the large winning opening, and the like. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU performs a process of determining whether or not the control of the jackpot gaming state executed in S1003 is based on the special symbol of the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined that it is based on the special symbol of the probabilistic jackpot, the process is transferred to S1006. If it is determined that it is not based on the special symbol of the probabilistic jackpot, the process is transferred to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU controls the non-probability variable gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state that started the control in S1003. That is, in the jackpot gaming state based on a special symbol other than the probability variation jackpot, the game shifts to the non-probability variation game state after the end. When shifting to such a non-probability changing gaming state, the main CPU again shifts the processing to S1000.

In S1006, the main CPU controls the probabilistic gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state that started the control in S1003. That is, in the big hit game state based on the special symbol of the probable change big hit, the state always shifts to the probable change game state after the end. When shifting to such a probabilistic gaming state, the main CPU again shifts the process to S1000.

In a pachinko gaming machine to which such a special symbol control process is applied, by providing an effect mode or the like similar to that of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in a round in which it is easy to win a prize in the big winning opening.

<Gist of the invention>
In the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-21401), since the movable accessory can move between the inside of the liquid crystal display area and the outside of the liquid crystal display area, the front surface of the liquid crystal display device can be used. Movable accessories can be easily moved. By the way, since the space for installing the movable accessory is limited inside the gaming machine, if the movable accessory moves even in the standby position inside the gaming machine, the movable accessory is installed in the standby position. It is difficult to secure space.

In particular, the size and number of movable accessories are determined according to the space of the gaming machine, so if the space of the gaming machine can be effectively utilized, the movable accessories can be made larger to enhance the effect of the movable accessories. It can be further enhanced.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a gaming board (1) having a gaming area (1p) on which the gaming medium rolls, and a movable accessory provided on the gaming board and movable so as to perform a predetermined movable effect. (Lower movable effect member 101B), a winning opening (first starting opening 32) provided on the game board so as to be located in front of the movable accessory, and a game medium can win a prize, and passing through the winning opening. The movable accessory is provided with a game medium passage (ball passages 203, 204, 206) for discharging the game medium from the front of the movable accessory to the back surface of the game board through the lower part of the movable accessory, and the movable accessory stands by. It is possible to execute a movable effect that is movable in the direction of the game medium passage, which is at least below the movable accessory at the position, and in a state where the movable accessory is movable in the standby position, the game medium passage is the movable accessory. It has a configuration provided so as to pass below the movable accessory from the front of the above.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the movable accessory is movable in the standby position, the game medium passage is provided so as to pass from the front of the movable accessory to the bottom of the movable accessory, so that the movable accessory is movable in the standby position. It is possible to secure a space in which the accessory can move. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effectability of the movable accessory while sufficiently securing the installation space for the movable accessory.

In addition, since a large installation space for the movable accessory can be secured, the size of the movable accessory can be increased and the movable range of the movable accessory in the standby position can be expanded, and the effect of the movable accessory can be enhanced more effectively. be able to.

Further, by installing the winning opening in front of the movable accessory, it becomes possible for the player who visually recognizes the winning opening during the game to visually recognize the movable accessory existing behind the winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively improve the effect of the movable accessory on the player.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, it is preferable that the movable accessory performs a movable effect of moving so as to expand in the radial direction at the standby position.
By doing so, the movable range of the movable accessory can be expanded, and the effect of the movable accessory can be more effectively improved.

In particular, when the movable accessory is movable in the standby position, the game medium passage is provided so as to pass below the movable accessory from the front of the movable accessory, so that a wide space in which the movable accessory can move in the standby position is provided. Is possible, so that the movable accessory can be moved so as to expand in a wider range in the radial direction. As a result, the movable accessory can be dynamically moved, and the effectability of the movable accessory can be enhanced more effectively.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a gaming board (1) having a gaming area (1p) on which the gaming medium rolls, and is provided behind the gaming board and moves to a standby position and a movable position. A movable accessory (lower movable effect member 101B) that is movable so as to execute a predetermined movable effect, and a prize that is provided on the game board so as to be located in front of the movable accessory and can win a prize in the game medium. A gaming machine provided with a mouth (first starting port 32) and a game medium passage (ball passages 203, 204, 206) for discharging the game medium winning in the winning opening through the front of the movable accessory. The movable accessory has a plurality of movable portions (outer ring members 117) separated by a gap (121) in the circumferential direction, and the movable portion passes through the gap in the circumferential direction at the standby position. The game medium passage is provided so as to be movable at a first position separated from the other and at least a second position outside the radial direction, and the game medium passage is provided so as to pass through the gap.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the gaming medium discharge passage is provided so as to pass through the gap of the movable portion of the movable accessory, it is possible to secure a space in which the movable accessory can move in the standby position. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effectability of the movable accessory while sufficiently securing the installation space for the movable accessory.

In addition, since a large installation space for the movable accessory can be secured, it is possible to increase the size of the movable accessory and expand the movable accessory in the standby position, and it is possible to more effectively enhance the effect of the movable accessory. ..

Further, by installing the winning opening in front of the movable accessory, it becomes possible for the player who visually recognizes the winning opening during the game to visually recognize the movable accessory existing behind the winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively improve the effect of the movable accessory on the player.

In addition to this, since the game medium passage can be installed in front of the movable accessory while avoiding the movable portion, it is possible to prevent the game board from becoming large in the vertical direction and reduce the installation space of the game board.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a gaming board (1) having a gaming area (1p) on which the gaming medium rolls, and a standby position and a movable position provided behind the gaming board. A movable accessory (lower movable effect member 101B) that can be moved so as to perform a predetermined movable effect by moving to and a first winning opening (lower side movable effect member 101B) that is provided on the game board and allows a game medium to win a prize. A gaming machine provided with a first starting port 32) and a second winning opening (general winning opening 40A to 40C) provided on the game board and capable of winning a game medium, and the first winning opening. The first passage (ball passages 204 and 206) for discharging the game medium winning in the above through the lower part of the movable accessory and the game medium winning in the second winning opening are discharged through the lower part of the movable accessory. A first passage (ball passage 212) and a first passage that is provided in the first passage and passes through the first passage, and that detects a gaming medium that rolls in the first direction. Sensor (first start port switch 320) and a second sensor (general winning opening sensor) provided in the second passage and detecting a game medium that rolls in a second direction different from the first direction. 400A), the first sensor is installed in front of the second sensor, and is located below the movable accessory between the first passage and the second passage. A magnetic detection sensor (magnetic sensor 214) is provided in the first passage and the second passage has a configuration in which a downstream area where a game medium is discharged joins.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first passage is provided with a first sensor for detecting a gaming medium rolling in the first direction, and the second passage is provided with a second sensor different from the first direction. A second sensor for detecting a game medium rolling in the direction of the above is provided, and the first passage and the second passage meet the downstream area where the game medium is discharged, so that, for example, in the horizontal direction and up and down. The first passage and the second passage can be installed in different directions such as directions, and the first passage and the second passage can be merged.

In addition to this, since the first sensor is installed in front of the second sensor and the magnetic detection sensor is provided between the first passage and the second passage below the movable accessory, the first sensor is provided. Three sensors including one sensor, a second sensor and a magnetic detection sensor can be installed in a small space below the movable accessory.

Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effectability of the movable accessory while sufficiently securing the installation space for the movable accessory.

In addition, since a large installation space for the movable accessory can be secured, the size of the movable accessory can be increased, and the effect of the movable accessory can be enhanced more effectively.

Further, the game machine according to the present invention is provided with a game board (1) having a game area (1p) on which the game medium rolls, and is provided behind the game board, and is movable so as to execute a predetermined movable effect. A movable accessory (lower movable effect member 101B), a winning opening (first starting opening 32) provided on the game board and capable of winning a game medium, and a game medium winning in the winning opening are discharged downstream. The winning opening unit (first starting port member 202) having the upstream side game medium passage (203, 204) and the light emitting illuminated substrate (215), and the game medium discharged to the upstream side game medium passage. A game medium passage portion (ball passage unit 205) in which a downstream side game medium passage (ball passage 206) is formed to be discharged through below the movable accessory, and a downstream side game medium passage provided in the downstream side game medium passage. A game machine including a game medium detection member (first start port switch 320) for detecting a game medium passing through a passage and wiring (cable 216) connected to the illuminated board, wherein the game medium is detected. A support portion (projection 217) that is provided on the upper surface of the game medium passage portion so as to be located above the member and supports the wiring extending from the illuminated board, and the movable portion that covers the upper portion of the support portion. It is composed of a member provided with a covering member (semi-cylindrical member 219) provided between the accessory and the game medium passage portion.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the upstream side game medium passage and the downstream side game medium passage can be passed from the front of the movable accessory to the bottom of the movable accessory, and a space in which the movable accessory can move is secured. can do. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effectability of the movable accessory while sufficiently securing the installation space for the movable accessory.

In addition, since a large installation space for the movable accessory can be secured, the size of the movable accessory can be increased, and the effect of the movable accessory can be enhanced more effectively.

Further, since it is provided on the upper surface of the game medium passage portion so as to be located above the game medium detection member and has a support portion for supporting the wiring extending from the illuminated board, the wiring extending from the illuminated board is a movable accessory. You can prevent it from fluttering downwards. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring from interfering with the movable accessory when the movable accessory is movable, the movable accessory can be smoothly moved, and the wiring can be protected from the movable accessory.

Further, since a covering member is provided between the movable accessory and the game medium passage portion so as to cover the upper part of the support portion, the wiring and the movable accessory can be shielded by the covering member, and the wiring can be provided when the movable accessory is movable. It is possible to more effectively prevent interference with movable accessories. Further, by colliding the game medium with the covering member when the game medium flows down from the movable accessory side, it is possible to prevent the game medium from colliding with the wiring and protect the wiring from the game medium.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the support portion includes a U-shaped protrusion (217) protruding from the upper surface of the game medium passage portion, and the wiring is supported by the protrusion by a binding member. It is preferable to have.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention can firmly fasten the wiring to the protrusion by a binding member such as a binding band, and can more effectively prevent the wiring from fluttering under the movable accessory.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-21401), the movable accessory only moves between the inside of the liquid crystal display area and the outside of the liquid crystal display area, and the movable accessory is , Does not move in the standby position. As a result, it is not possible to further enhance the effect of the movable accessory.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine provided with a movable accessory (lower movable effect member 101B) that can be moved so as to perform a predetermined movable effect by moving to a standby position and a movable position. The movable accessory has a first movable body (movable body 106) that can move in one direction and another direction by rotation of a drive member (motor 110A), and a pressing portion (107C), and the first one. A second movable body (movable body 107) that is movably provided on the movable body and can move in one direction and the other direction together with the first movable body, and the other direction together with the second movable body. A third movable body (movable body 108) that can be moved to the surface, and an interlocking portion (arm member) that has a guide hole (112A) and is swingably provided on the first movable body and can be pressed by the pressing portion. 112), a rotating member (rotating) having a first fitting portion (fitting protrusion 114A) to be fitted to the interlocking portion and a plurality of slits (114B) and rotatably provided on the third movable body. The body 114) has a second fitting portion (fitting protrusion 115A) that fits into the plurality of slits, and is movable at least in the radial direction of the rotating member by rotation of the rotating member (slider). The first movable member is provided with a movable member (109) having a member 115 and an outer ring member 117), and the drive member is rotated forward from an initial position in a state where the movable accessory is located at the standby position. The body and the second movable body are moved in the one direction to convert the swing of the interlocking portion into the rotation of the rotating member in one direction, and the movable portion is at least allowed to rotate while allowing only the rotation of the rotating member. By moving in the radial direction and rotating the drive member in the reverse direction from the initial position, the first movable body is moved in the other direction, and the swing of the interlocking portion is changed to the rotation of the rotating member in the one direction. While being converted, the third movable body is moved in the other direction to move the movable accessory to the movable position, and the movable portion is moved at least in the radial direction.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, two different effects, such as an effect of moving a movable accessory in a standby position and an effect of moving while moving from a standby position to a movable position, are performed in a single driving member in a rotation direction. It can be easily performed only by switching, and the effect of the movable accessory can be further enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-21401), the movable accessory is capable of emitting light, but when a decorative member capable of emitting light is provided separately from the movable accessory. It is necessary to separately provide a light emitting portion on the decorative member, which increases the manufacturing cost of the light emitting element.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a movable accessory (upper movable effect member 101A) movable between the standby position and the movable position, and a full-color provided on the movable accessory. A first light emitting unit (LED 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a) which is a light emitting body, a colored lens member (front decoration 160) provided on the movable accessory and located in front of the first light emitting unit, and A decorative member (99) provided in front of the movable accessory located at the standby position and capable of transmitting at least rear light forward, and a decorative member (99) provided behind the decorative member and emitting light to the decorative member. The first light emitting unit is provided with a second light emitting unit (LED 291) which is a monochromatic light emitting body, and the first light emitting unit is visually recognized from the front by emitting light in a state where the movable accessory is located at the standby position. It is possible to change the color of the movable accessory to a color similar to the emission color of the second light emitting unit, and when the movable accessory is positioned from the standby position to the movable position, the decorative member The color of the decorative member visually visible from the front can be changed.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first light emitting unit emits light in a state where the movable accessory is located in the standby position, so that the color of the movable accessory visually recognized from the front is the color of the second light emitting unit. Since it is possible to change the color to a color similar to the light emitting color, it is possible to make the decorative member emit light by a movable accessory without the need to provide a light emitting portion on the decorative member. In addition to this, the amount of the full-color first light emitting unit mounted can be reduced so that the decorative member can emit light in the same color. As a result, the configuration of the decorative member can be simplified and the manufacturing cost of the decorative member can be reduced.

Further, since it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the light emitting portion in the decorative member, a sufficient space for the depth of the decorative member can be secured.
In addition, when the movable accessory is in the movable position from the standby position, the color of the decorative member that can be visually recognized from the front of the decorative member can be changed, so that various colors can be produced by the movable accessory. The color rendering of movable characters can be improved.

Further, for example, if the effect of moving the movable accessory from the standby position to the movable position while emitting light is performed, the movable accessory that moves while emitting light from the player's line of sight can be focused on. As a result, it is possible to make the production of the movable accessory stand out.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-21401), the movable accessory only moves between the inside of the liquid crystal display area and the outside of the liquid crystal display area, and the movable accessory depends on the movable accessory. The production is monotonous. Therefore, it is not possible to enhance the effect of the movable accessory.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a movable accessory (upper movable effect member 101A) that can be moved so as to perform a predetermined movable effect by moving to a standby position and a movable position. The movable accessory is provided so as to be movable relative to the first movable base (rear side movable base 163) provided so as to be movable and the first movable base, and a plurality of movable members (upper left blade member). A second movable base (front movable base 164) that swingably supports 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175), and the first movable base are provided. The first engaging portion (engagement protrusion 163D) and the second movable base are movably provided, and by moving with respect to the second movable base, the movable member can be moved to the first position and the first position. A third movable base (blade movable rack 165) that swings to the position of 2 and a second engaging portion (a second engaging portion that is provided on the third movable base and can be engaged with the first engaging portion). The movable accessory is provided with an engaging protrusion 165G) and an urging member (coil spring 171) having one end attached to the second movable base and the other end attached to the third movable base. When moving from the standby position to the movable position, the first movable base and the second movable base are moved so as to be relatively extended, and the second engaging portion is moved to the first. By engaging with the engaging portion of the above, the third movable base is moved to swing the movable member from the first position to the second position, and the movable member is moved from the movable position to the standby position. In this case, the urging member has a configuration for urging the third movable base so that the movable member swings from the second position to the first position.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the movable accessory moves from the standby position to the movable position, the first movable base and the second movable base move so as to be relatively extended, and the second movable base is moved. By engaging the engaging portion of the above with the first engaging portion, the third movable base is moved and the movable member is swung from the first position to the second position. As a result, it is possible to enhance the color rendering of the movable accessory with a simple configuration.

Further, when the movable accessory moves from the movable position to the standby position, the urging member urges the third movable base so that the movable member swings from the second position to the first position. Therefore, the movable member can be quickly returned from the second position to the first position. This makes it possible to more effectively improve the color rendering of the movable accessory.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a movable accessory (upper movable effect member 101A) that can be moved so as to perform a predetermined movable effect by moving to a standby position and a movable position, and the movable accessory. The movable accessory is provided with a decorative member (99) provided in the front, and the movable accessory includes a plurality of movable members (upper left blade member 172, upper right blade member 173, lower left blade member 174, and right) that are long in the longitudinal direction. A gaming machine including a lower blade member 175) and light emitting units (LEDs 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, 195a) provided on the plurality of movable members, wherein the plurality of movable members are in the standby position. It is located behind the decorative member, its longitudinal direction extends in the first direction, and the light emitting portion is configured to emit light toward the decorative member, and the movable accessory is said to be from the standby position. When it is moved to the movable position, it has a configuration in which the longitudinal direction is movable in the second direction orthogonal to the first direction and is close to the movable position.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is configured to be located behind the decorative member in the standby position, the longitudinal direction extends in the first direction, and the light emitting portion emits light toward the decorative member. When the movable accessory moves from the standby position to the movable position, the plurality of movable members move and approach in the second direction whose longitudinal direction is orthogonal to the first direction, so that the effect of the movable accessory is enhanced. be able to.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the movable member has a suction member that generates a suction force, and when the movable member moves in the second direction, the movable member faces the left-right direction and is said to be the same. It is preferable that they are adsorbed by the adsorption member and united.

With this configuration, the gaming machine of the present invention is united in a state where the movable member is adsorbed when the movable member moves in the second direction, so that the state in which the movable member is united can be stably maintained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the movable member from shaking and the like, and to more effectively enhance the effectability of the movable accessory.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a movable accessory (upper movable effect member 101A) that can move to perform a predetermined movable effect by moving to a standby position and a movable position. The movable accessory has a plurality of main body members (fixed base 162, rear movable base 163, front movable base 164) so that at least one of the plurality of main body members approaches the other main body member. When the plurality of main body members are moved to, the overlap of the plurality of main body members is increased, and when at least one of the plurality of main body members is moved away from the other main body member, the overlap of the plurality of main body members is reduced. The moving mechanism (rack 162A, gears 169A to 169E, protrusion 164A) for moving the one main body member closer to or away from the other main body member, and the one main body member are attached to the other main body member. Movable members (upper left blade member 172, upper right blade member 173, lower left blade member 174 and right) that can swing between the first position and the second position as they move closer to or further away from each other. The plurality of main body members include a lower blade member 175), and the plurality of main body members have a guide portion extending along the extending direction of each main body member, and a first guide portion (guide surface 163v, 163w) and the second guide portion (guide surface 164v, 164w) in the main body member different from the one main body member are provided so as to face each other, and the first guide portion and the second guide portion are provided so as to face each other. A protrusion (lower stopper 163x, 163y) is provided at the end of at least one of the guide portions in the extending direction, and the first guide portion and the second guide portion are used on the other side. The guide portion facing the protruding portion has a distance between the protruding portion and the guide portion facing the protruding portion as the movable accessory moves from the standby position toward the movable position. It has inclined surfaces (190b, 191b) such that the separation distance is gradually narrowed, and when the movable accessory moves to the movable position, the protrusion and the guide portion facing the protrusion The movable member swings from the first position to the second position while the separation distance is the narrowest.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the movable accessory moves to the movable position, the distance between the protruding portion and the guide portion facing the protruding portion is the narrowest, so that the movable accessory is movable from the standby position. By moving to the position, the overlap of the plurality of main body members is small (the state in which the plurality of main body members are relatively extended), and when the ends of the plurality of main body members in the extending direction overlap with each other in a short length, the plurality of main body members are overlapped. The main body members can be firmly connected. As a result, it is possible to prevent rattling when the movable accessory is moved to the movable position.

Further, when the movable accessory moves from the standby position to the movable position, the guide portion of the main body member on the other side can be moved along the inclined surface. As a result, it is possible to smoothly move between a state in which the overlap between the main body members is small and a state in which the overlap is large (a state in which a plurality of main body members are relatively contracted), and as a result, smooth operation of the movable accessory can be performed. It can be carried out.

Further, when the movable accessory moves to the movable position, the separation distance between the protruding portion and the guide portion facing the protruding portion becomes the narrowest, and the movable member is positioned from the first position to the second position. Since it swings to the ground, the effect of the movable accessory can be improved more effectively.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-21401), it is considered that wiring such as a flexible cable is connected to the light emitting board, but the wiring is for a movable accessory. It is unknown how it is wired.

As a result, it is not possible to know how the wiring and the members such as gears that drive the movable accessory are laid out when the movable accessory moves in a complicated manner, and the wiring accompanies the movement of the movable accessory. I can't tell if I can move smoothly.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a movable accessory that can move to perform a predetermined movable effect by moving to a standby position and a movable position, and the movable accessory is a plurality of movable accessories. It has a main body member (fixed base 162, rear movable base 163, front movable base 164), and when at least one of the plurality of main body members moves so as to approach the other main body member, the main body members overlap. Is increased, and when at least one main body member of the plurality of main body members moves away from the other main body member, the overlap of the main body members becomes small, and the plurality of main body members is the other main body. A moving mechanism (rack 162A, gear 169A, gears 169B to 169E, projecting portion 164A) that moves toward or away from the member, and the one main body member moves toward or away from the other main body member. With movable members ((upper left blade member 172, upper right blade member 173, lower left blade member 174, lower right blade member 175)) that can swing between the first position and the second position. The light emitting unit (LED160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a) capable of emitting light and the wiring (flexible cable 186) connected to the light emitting unit are provided, and the wiring is the one main body member and the other main body. It is locked to the member and is bent and wired between the one main body member and the other main body member, and the moving mechanism is either the one main body member or the other main body member. The wiring is installed on one side of the central axis in the width direction, and the wiring is installed on the other side.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the wiring is locked to one main body member and another main body member, and is bent and wired between one main body member and another main body member. When one main body member moves toward or away from another main body member, the wiring can be smoothly moved while preventing the main body member from floating with respect to the plurality of main body members.

Further, since the moving mechanism is installed on one side of one of the main body members or the other main body member across the widthwise central axis and the wiring is installed on the other side, it is possible to prevent the wiring from interfering with the moving mechanism. While doing so, one main body member and another main body member can be relatively moved. As a result, the wiring can be moved more effectively and smoothly.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-21401), it is considered that wiring such as a flexible cable is connected to the light emitting board, but the wiring is for a movable accessory. It is unknown how it is wired.

As a result, when the movable accessory moves in a complicated manner, it is not possible to know in what state the wiring is accommodated with respect to the movable accessory, and the wiring accommodated in the movable accessory is accommodated. May flutter inside.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a movable accessory (upper movable effect member 101A) that can be moved so as to perform a predetermined movable effect by moving to a standby position and a movable position. The movable accessory includes a plurality of main body members (fixed base 162, rear movable base 163, front movable base 164) that move relative to each other, wiring (flexible cable 186) attached to the plurality of main body members, and the plurality. The movable accessory is provided with at least one of the main body members and a protruding portion (198) provided in one of the main body members, and the movable accessory is entirely overlapped so that the plurality of main body members are relatively contracted at the standby position. The plurality of main body members are partially overlapped so as to extend relatively in the movable position, and the wiring is bent between the main body members when the movable accessory moves from the movable position to the standby position. It has a structure in which it is housed in a slingshot and is bent by being pressed against the protruding portion.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the movable accessory moves from the movable position to the standby position, it is bent and accommodated between the main body members, and is bent by being pressed against the projecting portion. The wiring that is bent and accommodated between the plurality of main body members can be further bent by the protruding portion.

As a result, the length of the wiring accommodated between the plurality of main body members can be lengthened to reduce the gap between the main body member and the wiring, the piping can be prevented from fluttering between the main body members, and the wiring can be connected to the main body member. Can be stably accommodated between.

Further, by further bending the wiring by the protruding portion, it is possible to generate a restoring force that tends to extend straight from the bent state of the wiring. Therefore, the frictional force between the wiring and the main body member can be increased to more effectively prevent the wiring from fluttering between the main body members, and the wiring can be more stably accommodated by the main body member.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-21401), rattling of the movable accessory is caused in a state where the movable accessory is movable from the inside of the liquid crystal display area to the outside of the liquid crystal display area. Not configured to prevent.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a movable accessory (upper movable effect member 100) that can operate so as to perform a predetermined movable effect by moving to a standby position and a movable position. The movable accessory has a plurality of main body members (fixed base 162, rear movable base 163, front movable base 164) so that at least one of the plurality of main body members approaches the other main body member. When the main body member is moved to, the overlap of the main body members is increased, and when at least one of the main body members is moved away from the other main body member, the overlap of the main body members is reduced. The member has a guide portion extending along the extending direction of each main body member, and the first guide portion (guide surface 163v, 163w) in at least one main body member and the main body different from the one main body member. The second guide portion (guide surface 164v, 164w) in the member is provided so as to face each other, and at least one end of the first guide portion and the second guide portion in the extending direction. A protruding portion (lower stopper 163x, 163y) is provided in the portion, and the guide portion which is one of the first guide portion and the second guide portion and faces the protruding portion has a protruding portion (lower stopper 163x, 163y). An inclined surface such that the separation distance, which is the distance between the protrusion and the guide portion facing the protrusion, gradually narrows as the movable accessory moves from the standby position toward the movable position. (190b, 191b) are provided.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the distance between the protruding portion and the guide portion facing the protruding portion as the movable accessory moves from the standby position to the movable position in the guide portion facing the protruding portion. It is provided with an inclined surface such that the separation distance is gradually narrowed. As a result, when the movable accessory is moved from the standby position to the movable position, the gap between the protruding portion and the guide portion of the main body member on the other side facing the protruding portion can be reduced.

As a result, the movable accessory moves from the standby position to the movable position, so that the overlap of the plurality of main body members is small (the plurality of main body members extend relatively), and the ends of the plurality of main body members in the extending direction are formed. When overlapping with a short length, a plurality of main body members can be firmly connected. As a result, it is possible to prevent rattling when the movable accessory is moved to the movable position.

Further, when the movable accessory moves from the standby position to the movable position, the guide portion of the main body member on the other side can be moved along the inclined surface. As a result, it is possible to smoothly move between a state in which the overlap between the main body members is small and a state in which the overlap is large (a state in which a plurality of main body members are relatively contracted).

Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-21401), it is considered that wiring such as a flexible cable is connected to the light emitting board, but the wiring is for a movable accessory. It is unknown how it is wired. Therefore, no consideration is given to reducing the load applied to the wiring.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine provided with a movable accessory (upper movable effect member 100) that can be moved so as to perform a predetermined movable effect by moving to a standby position and a movable position. The movable accessory includes a main body member (case 161), a flexible cable 186 provided on the main body member, and a wiring board (relay board 185) connected to the wiring, and the main body member is the wiring. The first groove (guide groove 187) to which the wiring is fitted and the second groove (guide groove 188) to which the wiring extends at right angles to the extending direction of the first groove and the wiring is fitted. ), And the first groove is the other end in the extending direction communicating from one end portion (187a) in the extending direction located at the connection position between the wiring board and the wiring to the second groove. The wiring has a bottom surface (187c) inclined toward the portion (187b), and the wiring is the other end portion in the extending direction of the first groove and one end portion (188a) in the extending direction of the second groove. It has a configuration in which it is fastened to the main body member by a fastening member (189) at a position where it communicates with the main body member.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first groove is directed from one end in the extending direction located at the connection position between the wiring board and the wiring toward the other end in the extending direction communicating with the second groove. Since it has an inclined bottom surface, wiring fitted in the first groove can be extended along the inclined bottom surface of the first groove to the second groove.

Therefore, the wiring is bent as compared with the case where the inclination of one end of the first groove located at the connection position between the wiring and the wiring board in the extending direction is steep (for example, a step having an inclination of 90 °). Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to protect the wiring by preventing a load from being applied to the connection position between the wiring and the wiring board.

Further, since the wiring is fastened to the main body member by the fastening member at a position where the other end portion in the extending direction of the first groove and the one end portion in the extending direction of the second groove communicate with each other, the first wiring is performed. It is possible to prevent the wiring from fluttering at a bent position where the groove of No. 1 and the second groove communicate with each other.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-21401), it is considered that wiring such as a flexible cable is connected to the light emitting board, but the wiring is for a movable accessory. It is unknown how it is wired.

As a result, it is not possible to know how the wiring and the members such as gears that drive the movable accessory are laid out when the movable accessory moves in a complicated manner, and the wiring accompanies the movement of the movable accessory. I can't tell if I can move smoothly.

Furthermore, when the movable accessory is complicatedly movable, it is not possible to know in what state the wiring is accommodated with respect to the movable accessory, and the wiring accommodated in the movable accessory is the movable accessory. May flutter inside.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a movable accessory (upper movable effect member 101A) that can be moved so as to perform a predetermined movable effect by moving to a standby position and a movable position. The movable accessory is movable with respect to a fixed base (162) having a first rack (rack 162A) on which a first uneven portion (rack teeth 162a) continuous in the longitudinal direction is formed, and the fixed base. A first movable base (rear) provided with a first gear (gear 169A) that meshes with the first concavo-convex portion and a second gear (gears 169B-169E) to which power is transmitted from the first gear. A side movable base 163), a second rack (protruding portion 164A) and a first engaging portion in which a second uneven portion (rack tooth 164a) that continuously meshes with the second gear in the longitudinal direction is formed. A second movable base (front movable base 164) that has (engagement projection 163D) and is relatively movable between a position that extends relative to the first movable base and a position that contracts relative to the first movable base. A third movable base (with a second movable base (engagement protrusion 165G) slidably provided on the second movable base and capable of engaging with the first engaging portion). A movable member (upper left blade) provided on the blade movable rack 165) and the second movable base and capable of swinging between a first position and a second position as the third movable base slides. Member 172, upper right blade member 173, lower left blade member 174 and lower right blade member 175), light emitting parts (LEDs 181a to 184a) provided on the movable member, and wiring (flexible cable) connected to the light emitting part. 186) and a protruding portion (198) provided in at least one of the fixed base, the first movable base and the second movable base, and when the movable accessory is in the movable position. The fixed base, the first movable base and the second movable base are configured to extend relatively so that the end of the first movable base and the end of the second movable base overlap each other. By being locked to the fixed base and the second movable base, the wiring is bent from the fixed base by the first movable base and extends to the second movable base. The first gear and the second gear are wired, and the first gear and the second gear are installed on one side of the central axis in the extending direction of the first movable base, and the wiring is provided on the first movable base. It is arranged on the other side of the central axis in the extending direction, and the movable accessory is in the standby position. Occasionally, the wiring is bent and accommodated between the fixed base and the first movable base and between the first movable base and the second movable base, and is pressed against the protrusion. It has a structure that bends by itself.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the wiring is locked to the fixed base and the second movable base, so that the wiring is bent from the fixed base to the first movable base and extends to the second movable base. Since it is wired, when the first movable base and the second movable base move to the relatively extended position and the relatively contracted position, the wiring is the first movable base and the second movable base. It is possible to move the wiring smoothly while preventing it from floating.

Further, the first gear and the second gear are installed on one side of the central axis of the first movable base in the extending direction, and the wiring is placed on the other side of the central axis of the first movable base in the extending direction. Since it is wired to, the first movable base and the second movable base are relatively contracted to the relatively extended position while preventing the wiring from interfering with the first gear and the second gear. Can be moved to and from position. As a result, the wiring can be moved more effectively and smoothly.

Further, when the movable accessory is in the standby position, the wiring is bent and accommodated between the fixed base and the first movable base and between the first movable base and the second movable base, and is projected. Since the wiring is bent by being pressed against the shaped portion, the wiring bent and accommodated by the plurality of main body members can be further bent by the protruding portion.

As a result, the length of the wiring accommodated between the plurality of main body members can be lengthened to reduce the gap between the main body member and the wiring, and the wiring can be prevented from fluttering inside the main body member, and the wiring can be connected to the main body member. Can be stably accommodated.

Further, by further bending the wiring by the protruding portion, it is possible to generate a restoring force that tends to extend straight from the bent state of the wiring. Therefore, the frictional force between the wiring and the main body member can be increased to more effectively prevent the wiring from fluttering inside the main body member, and the wiring can be more stably accommodated by the main body member.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-79356), the gaming balls won from a plurality of gaming medium winning openings merge in one ball passage and are discharged to the ejection port. When the number of game balls passing through the ball passage per unit time is increased in order to shorten the game speed, there is a high possibility that the game balls won from the game medium winning opening will come into contact with each other at the confluence of the ball passages. Therefore, it is assumed that the game ball is clogged in the ball passage, and there is a high possibility that the game will be interrupted.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a first gaming medium winning opening (general winning opening 40A) in which a gaming medium can be won, and at least one second gaming medium winning opening (general winning opening) in which a gaming medium can be won. Ports 40B, 40C), a first game medium passage (ball passage 208) for discharging the game medium winning in the first game medium winning opening downstream, and a game winning in the second game medium winning opening. A gaming machine provided with at least one or more second gaming medium passages (ball passages 209, 210) for discharging the medium downstream, and the second gaming medium passage is the second gaming medium winning prize. A configuration in which the passage area, which is the area of the cross section orthogonal to the direction in which the game medium passes, is larger than the passage area of the first game medium passage, which merges with the first game medium passage downstream of the mouth. Have.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second gaming medium passage merges with the first gaming medium passage downstream of the second gaming medium winning opening, and the passage area thereof is the first gaming medium passage. Since it is larger than the passage area of, for example, even if the number of game media passing through the game medium passage per unit time is increased in order to shorten the game speed, the first game medium winning opening and the first It is possible to prevent the game medium winning from the second game medium winning opening from being clogged downstream of the second gaming medium winning opening. As a result, the game medium can be smoothly discharged toward the downstream, and the game playability can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, it is preferable that the width of the second game medium passage in the front-rear direction is larger than the width of the first game medium passage in the front-rear direction.

By doing so, for example, while preventing the area occupied by the second game medium passage from increasing in the vertical direction of the game board, winning from the first game medium winning opening and the second game medium winning opening. It is possible to prevent the game medium from being clogged downstream of the second game medium winning opening.

Further, in the game machine of the present invention, it is preferable that the vertical width of the second game medium passage is larger than the vertical width of the first game medium passage.

By doing so, for example, while preventing the area occupied by the second game medium passage from increasing in the front-rear direction of the game board, winning from the first game medium winning opening and the second game medium winning opening. It is possible to prevent the game medium from being clogged downstream of the second game medium winning opening.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, it is preferable that the width of the second game medium passage in the front-rear direction is larger than the width of the first game medium passage in the front-rear direction.

By doing so, while preventing the area occupied by the second game medium passage from increasing in the vertical direction of the game board, the game won from the first game medium winning opening and the second game medium winning opening. It is possible to prevent the medium from being clogged downstream of the second game medium winning opening.

Further, in the game machine of the present invention, it is preferable that the vertical width of the second game medium passage is larger than the vertical width of the first game medium passage.

By doing so, while preventing the area occupied by the second game medium passage from increasing in the front-rear direction of the game board, the game won from the first game medium winning opening and the second game medium winning opening. It is possible to prevent the medium from being clogged downstream of the second game medium winning opening.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a first winning opening (first large winning opening 254) in which a gaming medium can be won, and at least one second winning opening (second prize opening) in which a gaming medium can be won. A large winning opening 255), a first game medium passage (ball passage 263) for discharging the game medium winning in the first winning opening, and a minimum of discharging the gaming medium winning in the second winning opening. A gaming machine provided with one or more second game medium passages (ball passages 259), wherein the second game medium passage is the first game medium passage downstream of the second winning opening. The passage area, which is the area of the cross section orthogonal to the direction in which the game medium passes, is formed to be larger than the passage area of the first game medium passage, and is formed with the first game medium passage. A game medium having a communication portion (ball passage 264) communicating with the first game medium passage separately from the confluence portion of the above, and the game medium winning the first winning opening is the second one via the communication portion. It also has a structure that can be discharged to the game medium passage.

According to the game machine according to the present invention, the second game medium passage merges with the first game medium passage downstream of the second winning opening, and has a cross section orthogonal to the direction in which the game medium passes. The passage area, which is an area, is formed to be larger than the passage area of the first game medium passage, and communicates with the first game medium passage separately from the confluence portion with the first game medium passage. It has a communication part. Further, since the game medium that has won the first prize opening can be discharged to the first game medium passage through the communication unit, the game medium that has won the prize from the first winning opening is clogged downstream thereof. Can be prevented. As a result, the game medium can be smoothly discharged toward the downstream, and the game playability can be improved.

1 Game board 1p Game area 4 Liquid crystal display device 32 1st start opening (winning opening, 1st winning opening))
33 2nd start opening 36 1st big winning opening 36A 1st big winning opening shutter 37 2nd big winning opening 37 2nd big winning opening shutter 38A specific area 38B non-specific area 39, 39'displacement member 40A general winning opening (1st) 2 winning openings, 1st gaming medium winning opening)
40B general winning slot (second winning slot, second game medium winning slot)
40C general winning opening (second winning opening, second game medium winning opening)
61 Main CPU
71 Sub CPU
73 Work RAM
83 Payout device 99 Decorative member 101A Upper movable effect member (movable accessory)
101B Lower movable effect member (movable accessory)
106 Movable body (first movable body)
107 Movable body (second movable body)
108 Movable body (third movable body)
109 Movable member 110A motor (drive member)
112 Arm member (interlocking part)
114 Rotating body (rotating member)
114A Fitting protrusion (first fitting part)
114B Slit 115A Fitting protrusion (second fitting part)
115 Slider member (moving part)
117,117A Outer ring member (moving part)
121 Gap 160 Front decoration (lens member)
160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, 195a LED (light emitting part, first light emitting part)
161 case (main body member)
162 Fixed base (fixed base)
162A rack (first rack, moving mechanism) 162a rack teeth (first uneven part)
163 Rear movable base (main body member, first movable base)
163D engaging protrusion (first engaging part)
163v, 163w Guide surface (first guide part)
164v, 164w Guide surface (second guide part)
163x, 163y Lower stopper (protruding part)
164 Front movable base (main body member, second movable base)
164A projecting part (second rack, moving mechanism)
164a rack teeth (second uneven part)
165 Movable blade rack (third movable base)
165G engaging protrusion (second engaging part)
169A gear (first gear, moving mechanism)
169B-169E gear (second gear, moving mechanism)
171 Coil spring (biasing member)
172 Upper left blade member 172 (movable member)
173 Upper right blade member (movable member)
174 Lower left blade member (movable member)
175 Lower right blade member (movable member)
185 Relay board (wiring board)
186 Flexible cable (wiring)
187 Guide groove (first groove)
188 Guide groove (second groove)
190,191 Guide protrusion (protruding part)
190a, 191a Inclined surface 197A, 197B Magnet (adsorption member)
198 Protruding part 203 Ball passage (upstream game medium passage, game medium passage)
204 Ball passage (upstream game medium passage, first passage, game medium passage)
202 First starting port member (winning port unit)
205 Ball passage unit (game medium passage section)
206 Ball passage (downstream side game medium passage, first passage, game medium passage)
208 Ball passage (first game medium passage)
209 Ball passage (second game medium passage)
210 Ball passage (second game medium passage)
212 Ball passage (second passage)
214 Magnetic sensor (magnetic detection sensor)
215 Illuminations board 216 Cable (wiring)
217 Protrusion (support part)
219 Semi-cylindrical member (covering member)
254 1st prize opening (1st prize opening)
255 2nd prize opening (2nd prize opening)
259 ball passage (second game medium passage)
263 Ball passage (first game medium passage)
264 ball passage (communication part)
291 LED (second light emitting part)
320 1st start port switch (1st sensor, game medium detection member)
400A General winning opening left switch (second sensor)

Claims (1)

A specific game state determination means for determining whether or not to execute a specific game state that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a specific game state determination means.
The effect display means to display the effect,
An effect of notifying the execution expectation of the specific gaming state according to the expectation level of the specific effect displayed on the effect display means, and determining the content of the specific effect to be executed while the identification symbol is changed. Determining means and
The effect control means for controlling the effect displayed on the effect display means,
A specific display determining means for determining in advance whether or not to display a specific display for changing the content of the specific effect on the effect display means is provided.
The effect control means is
When the specific display is not determined to be displayed by the specific display determining means and the expected degree type determined by the effect content determining means is the expected degree type of the specific stage, the specific stage It is possible to execute an expectation type at a stage lower than the expectation type of, and then execute an effect that changes the content of the effect to the expectation type at the specific stage without being based on the specific display.
When the specific display is displayed and the expected degree type determined by the effect content determining means is the expected degree type of the specific stage, the content of the effect is displayed without being based on the specific display. It is possible to change to an expectation type of a lower stage than the expectation type of a specific stage, and then change the content of the effect to the expectation type of the specific stage based on the specific display.
An effect in which a plurality of the specific displays are displayed has a higher degree of expectation than an effect in which the specific displays are not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images